Loading...
HomeMy WebLinkAbout1929 PALOMAR OAKS WAY; TECHNICAL; CB121560; PermitTEdHNICAL 1 t 440' Crestcourt Lane, FallbrooK CA ^ZOZS phone l(fiO~47?>--iZ5^ wvivi.ldnconsulting.net fajc 7C>O-C>0f'4f4^ August 30, 2011 RECEIVED Mr. Neil Patel Excel Hotel Group ' 11 2012 10660 Scripps Ranch Blvd Suite #100 Quy OF CARLSB AO San Diego, CA 92131 BUILDING DIVISION Subject: Fairfield Inn and Suites Development Interior Noise Assessment Carlsbad CA Dear Mr. Patel: The firm of Ldn Consulting, Inc. is pleased to submit the following interior noise impact analysis for the proposed Fairfield Inn and Suites hotel development in the City of Carlsbad. The purpose of the survey is to determine the estimated interior noise levels within the residential structures and recommend mitigation measures for compliance with the California Code of Regulations Title 24 and the City of Carlsbad guidelines and requirements for interior noise. PROJECT LOCATION/DESCRIPTION The proposed project is located on Palomar Oaks Way near the intersection of Palomar Airport Road east of College Boulevard in the City of Carlsbad CA. The primary noise source that affects the site is from vehicular traffic from Palomar Airport Road located approximately 100 feet north and parallel to Palomar Oaks way. The project vicinity can be seen in Figure 1. The Project consists of a single 3 story building with 96 hotel rooms and an outdoor pool and spa area located along the northern side of the proposed building. The site plan is provided in Figure 2 below showing the proposed building configuration and outdoor area. 8/30/2011 1 1169-03 Fairfield Inn Noise Report C5lZ' ISIPO Mr. Nell Patel Excel Hotel Group 10660 Scripps Ranch Blvd Suite #100 San Diego, CA 92131 Ldn Coneuifing, Inc^ 440 tCrestccurt Uw, F^llbrooK CA 1Z0ZS phone lt,o-47f-lZ9f Fur^ 7Oo-(f01-414? Figure 1: Project Site Location a e©» Course 5 ^ i J • Aifpoi San Marcos t< sad l^e San % N 1 s rtnltlnr.--. ! .1 I' 'I tsCofts 8*0 E^is LaGo^ta 'St*, If Encinitas CmM By Ti)»-s»a i ? Bfustge^At BatK»» Rancho Ea!«r»liS Cove 8/30/2011 1169-03 Fairfield Inn Noise Report Mr. Neil Patel Excel Hotel Group 10660 Scripps Ranch Blvd Suite #100 San Diego, CA 92131 440 Crfsfcourt Lane, fyllbroot: CA 12OZ0 phene 7ttO-4T^-lZ9^ far. 7lfO-O0i-4i49 Figure 2: Proposed Project Site Plan WAY a-3^ t sr •IE -r 7 ^| ^ ' -r £.i5i»>>3 Rift:* ?4 ;insis ! •^'S Sots: !S6«ll3 fXCWSiSii «S^iiJtS site plan scaie t*-=20'-0'' ACOUSTICAL FUNDAMENTALS Noise is defined as unwanted or annoying sound which interferes with or disrupts normal activities. Exposure to high noise levels has been demonstrated to cause 8/30/2011 1169-03 Fairfield Inn Noise Report Mr. Neil Patel Excel Hotel Group 10660 Scripps Ranch Blvd Suite #100 San Dlego, CA 92131 Ldn ^onMdfing, Inc^ 440 Crestcourt Lane, FallbrooK CA IZOZS phone 10o-41^-lZ^ Fa% 700-Ogi-4f4? hearing loss. The individual human response to environmental noise is base on the sensitivity of that individual, the type of noise that occurs and when the noise occurs. Sound is measured on a logarithmic scale consisting of sound pressure levels known as a decibel (dB). The sounds heard by humans typically do not consist of a single frequency but of a broadband of frequencies having different sound pressure levels. The method for evaluating all the frequencies of the sound is to apply an A-weighting to reflect how the human ear responds to the different sound levels at different frequencies. The A-weighted sound level adequately describes the instantaneous noise whereas the equivalent sound level depicted as Leq represents a steady sound level containing the same total acoustical energy as the actual fluctuating sound level over a given time interval. The Community Noise Equivalent Level (CNEL) is the 24 hour A-weighted average for sound, with corrections for evening and nighttime hours. The corrections require an addition of 5 decibels to sound levels in the evening hours between 7 p.m. and 10 p.m. and an addition of 10 decibels to sound levels at nighttime hours between 10 p.m. and 7 a.m. These additions are made to account for the increased sensitivity during the evening and nighttime hours when sound appears louder. CNEL values do not represent the actual sound level heard at any particular time, but rather represents the total sound exposure. Additionally, Sound Transmission Class (or STC) is an integer rating of how well airborne sound is attenuated by a building partition. STC is widely used to rate interior partitions, ceilings/floors, doors, windows and exterior wall configurations (see ASTM International Classification E413 and E90). The STC number is derived from tested sound attenuation values found at the 1/3 octave band frequencies. These transmission-loss (TL) values are then plotted and compared to a standard reference contour. Acoustical engineers fit these values to the appropriate TL Curve to determine a single STC value found at 500 Hertz. STC is roughly the decibel reduction in noise a partition can provide, abbreviated 'dB'. If an 85 dB sound on one side of a wall is reduced to 50 dB on the other side, that partition is said to have an STC of 35. This number does not apply across the range 8/30/2011 1169-03 Fairfield Inn Noise Report Mr. Neil Patel Excel Hotel Group 10660 Scripps Ranch Blvd Suite #100 San Diego, CA 92131 Ldn ^onstdting. Inc. 440 CresUourt Lane, fBllhroot: CA 1ZOZS phone lOo-413-iZ^ Fa% lOO-OSI-414'f of frequencies because the STC value is derived from a curve-fit from the tested 1/3 octave band frequencies. Any partition will have less TL at lower frequencies. For example, a wall with an STC of 35 may provide over 40 dB of attenuation at 3000 Hz but only 15 dB of attenuation at 125 Hz. INTERIOR NOISE STANDARDS California's Title 24 Noise Standards In 1974, the California Commission on Housing and Community Development adopted noise insulation standards for multi-family residential buildings (Title 24, Part 2, California Code of Regulations or CCR). CCR Title 24 establishes standards, based on the U.S. Department of Housing and Urban Development (HUD) requirements, for interior room noise (attributable to outside noise sources). The regulations also specify that acoustical studies must be prepared whenever a multi-family residential or motel/hotel building or structure is proposed to be located near an existing or adopted freeway route, expressway, parkway, major street, thoroughfare, rail line, rapid transit line, or industrial noise source, and where such noise sources create an exterior CNEL (or Ldn) of 60 dBA or greater. Such acoustical analysis must demonstrate that the residence has been designed to limit intruding noise to an interior CNEL (or Ldn) of at least 45 dBA. City of Carlsbad Noise Standards The City of Carlsbad has adopted interior and exterior noise standards for transportation related sources as part of their Noise Guidelines Manual General for assessing the compatibility of land uses with transportation related noise impacts. The guidelines for maximum exterior noise levels for non-residential uses are provided in the Land Use Compatibility for Community Noise Environments Matrix (see Figure-iii of the City Noise Guidelines Manual For transient, lodging, hotels and motel uses, the City recommends an exterior noise level of less than 65 dBA CNEL and an interior noise level of less than 45 dBA CNEL. 8/30/2011 1169-03 Fairfield Inn Noise Report Mr. Neil Patel Excel Hotel Group 10660 Scripps Ranch Blvd Suite #100 San Diego, CA 92131 Ldn Conetdfing, Inc. 440 CreiUourt Lane, FallbrooK CA tZOZS phone 10o-4T}-lz9f Fa* 70o-0Si-4'l4? ANALYSIS PROCEDURES Exterior Noise Levels To determine the future noise environment the Caltrans Sound32 noise model was utilized. The critical model input parameters, which determine the projected vehicular traffic noise levels, include vehicle travel speeds, the percentages of automobiles, medium trucks and heavy trucks in the roadway volume, the site conditions (hard or soft) and the peak hour traffic volume. The peak hour traffic volumes range between 6- 12% of the average daily traffic (ADT) and 10% is generally acceptable for noise modeling purposes. The required coordinate information necessary for the Sound32 traffic noise prediction model input was taken from the preliminary site plans provided by Coffey Engineering and Robert F. Tuttle Architects (August 2011). To determine the future noise levels the preliminary site plans were used to identify the pad elevations, the roadway elevations, and the relationship between the noise source(s) and the receptor areas. To evaluate the future potential noise levels at the proposed development's building facades; modeled observers were located at the facades adjacent to the roadways. The first floor modeled observers were placed five feet above the finished pad elevation. All second floor facades were located fifteen feet above the proposed pad elevation and third floor facades were modeled twenty five feet above the pad elevation. Table 1 presents the roadway parameters used in the analysis including the average daily traffic volumes, vehicle speeds and the hourly traffic flow distribution (vehicle mix) for the future buildout conditions. The vehicle mix provides the hourly distribution percentages of automobile, medium trucks and heavy trucks for input into the Sound32 Model. The Buildout conditions include the future year 2030 traffic volume forecasts provided SANDAG Series 11 Traffic Prediction Model and the peak hour traffic volumes and vehicle speeds. The modeled building facade and outdoor use area locations are presented in Figure 3 below. The future exterior noise levels from Palomar Airport Road are provided in Table 2 and the Sound32 model inputs and outs are provided as Attachment A. 8/30/2011 1169-03 Fairfield Inn Noise Report Mr. Neil Patel Excel Hotel Group 10660 Scripps Ranch Blvd Suite #100 San Diego, CA 92131 Ldn Coneidfing Inc. 440 CresUourt Lane, FallbrooK CA IZOZS phone 700-47?-IZ9? Faf 7Oo-O0f-4f49 Table 1: Future Traffic Parameters Roadway Average Daily Traffic (ADT) 1 Peak Hour Volume ^ Modeled Speeds (MPH)' Vehicle Mix "A Medium Auto ^ , Trucks )3 Heavy Trucks Palomar Airport Road 35,000 3,500 55 96 2 2 ' Source: SANDAG 2030 Traffic Prediction Model ^10% of the ADT ^ Typical Vehide Mixed observed in City of Carlsbad Figure 3: Receptor Locations WAY ''yt £*KM&i' H 8/30/2011 1169-03 Fairfield Inn Noise Report Mr. Neil Patel Excel Hotel Group 10660 Scripps Ranch Blvd Suite #100 San Diego, CA 92131 Ldn ConBidHng Inc 440 CresUourt Lane. FallbrooK CA 1ZOZ0 phone 70o-4T}-lZ^ Fa% 70o-Ogi-4i4^ Table 2: Future Exterior Noise Levels Receptor Number Receptor Description First Floor Noise Level (dBA CNEL) Second Floor Noise Level (dBA CNEL) Third Floor Noise Level (dBA CNEL) 1 NW Building Facade 63.6 64.6 66.7 2 NE Building Facade 63.6 64.3 66.4 3 Pool/SPA Area 63.6 ~ - * Interior noise reductions are needed to meet 45 dBA CNEL standard. As can be seen in Table 2, the exterior outdoor use areas at the pool and spa area are below the City's 65 dBA CNEL threshold and no mitigation is required. The building facades are above 60 dBA CNEL and therefore interior noise reductions need to be evaluated to determine compliance with the 45 dBA CNEL standard. Interior Noise Levels The methodology used to determine the resultant interior noise levels is based upon the exterior noise level minus the sound transmission loss as identified in the American Society of Testing and Materials (ASTM) guidelines: E413 &E90. Standard building construction will provide a noise reduction of approximately 15 dBA with a windows open conditions and minimum 20 dBA noise reduction with the windows closed. The exterior noise levels at the proposed structures calculated in terms of dBA are converted to the six octave band sound pressure levels between: 125 Hertz - 4000 Hertz. Acoustical modeling of the proposed project dwelling units was performed in accordance with the above guidelines and included combining the transmission loss for each of the building components that will reduce the interior noise levels. Building components typically Include the windows, exterior doors, and exterior walls. The total noise reduction is dependent upon the transmission loss of each building component, their subsequent surface area, quality of the building/construction materials, a building fagade and angle correction. 8/30/2011 1169-03 Fairfield Inn Noise Report Mr. Neil Patel Excel Hotel Group 10660 Scripps Ranch Blvd Suite #100 San Diego, CA 92131 Ldn ^onstdting Inc 440 Crestcourt Lane, Fallbroot: CA 1Z0Z» phone 700-473-IZ9? Far. 70o-0m-414? The interior noise level is also dependent on the acoustical energy absorbed within the room based upon the Noise Reduction Coefficients (NRC). NRC is a scalar representation of the amount of sound energy absorbed upon striking a particular surface and the arithmetic value average of sound absorption coefficients indicating a material's ability to absorb sound. The absorption coefficients for individual surface areas such as carpet, drywall and furnishings are used to calculate the interior room effects. The calculated building noise reduction includes both the room absorption characteristics and the transmission loss from the exterior wall assembly. The interior noise reduction calculations were performed using Ldn's interior noise model. The model converts the exterior sound level to octave band frequencies and accounts for the transmission loss, correction factors and room absorption. The floor plans used for this analysis were provided by Robert F. Tuttle Architects dated August 26, 2011. The following construction details were utilized for each of the building assemblies to determine the noise reduction characteristics: Exterior walls and roof assemblies must have a Sound Transmission Class (STC) rating of 46 or better. Exterior walls with this rating consist of 2"x 4" studs or larger, spaced 16" o.c. with R-13 insulation minimum and an exterior surface of 7/8" cement plaster (stucco). Interior wall and ceiling surfaces shall be at least 1/2" thick gypsum or plaster. Roof assemblies should have a minimum of 1/2" sheathing, R-19 insulation and sealed to prevent noise leaks. Glass assemblies should be dual-paned and acoustical sealant applied around the exterior edges. The window assemblies are generally the weakest noise reducing component but are the most convenient and cost effective elements to change if additional attenuation is needed. The STC ratings for the glass assemblies was calculated in the interior noise model and provided in the findings below. Bathrooms, kitchens, closets and corridors are not required to meet the 45 dBA CNEL standard and therefore were not modeled. All living areas where lower noise levels are essential for conversation and sleep should have carpeting installed; this includes bedrooms and living rooms. These rooms and were modeled to determine the interior noise reductions. If the modeled interior noise levels were found to be higher than 45 dBA CNEL in the living areas with the minimum assembly requirements described 8/30/2011 1169-03 Fairfield Inn Noise Report Mr. Neil Patel Excel Hotel Group 10660 Scripps Ranch Blvd Suite #100 San Dlego, CA 92131 Ldn Conetdfing Inc 440 Crestcourt Lane, FallbrooK CA 1ZOZ0 phone 700-4r}-lZ9} Far. 70o-0Sf-4f4? above additional modeling was performed to determine the minimum STC rating for the glass assemblies to further reduce interior noise levels below the acceptable interior threshold of 45 dBA CNEL. FINDINGS The exterior noise levels were determined to be 66.7 or roughly 67 dBA CNEL. Basic calculations show that a windows open condition will only reduce the interior noise levels 15 dBA CNEL and not provide adequate interior noise mitigation. To meet the 45 dBA CNEL interior noise standard, an overall minimum interior noise level reduction of roughly 22 dBA CNEL is needed for the proposed project. Therefore a closed window condition is required to reduce interior noise levels to comply with CCR Title 24 and City of Carlsbad requirements. The windows closed condition requires that mechanical ventilation is installed to move air within the structure and control temperatures. The mechanical ventilation must meet the jurisdictional requirements for these dwelling units. The worst case building fagade noise level was calculated to be almost 67 dBA CNEL. The necessary Sound Transmission Class and transmission losses for all glass assemblies of the hotel room units and common use areas are provided in Table 1. The required structural treatments for the proposed building for all floor plans and units are summarized below in Table 2. The modeled results with an anticipated interior noise level of 45 dBA CNEL or less are provided as Attachment B to this report. Assembly Table 1: Sound Transmission Class Ratings g.^^ Octave Band Transmission Loss (Hz) Rating* j_25 250 500 1000 2000 4000 Windows 26 17 16 22 31 35 27 Glass Doors 26 21 24 27 27 24 28 ' STC Ratings used in P4odel 8/30/2011 10 1169-03 Fairfield Inn Noise Report Mr. Neil Patel Excel Hotel Group 10660 Scripps Ranch Blvd Suite #100 San Diego, CA 92131 Ldn Conetdfing Inc 440 Crestcourt l-ane, Fallbroot: CA fzoze phone 70o-47?-lz9? Fa% 700-OBI-4143 Table 2: Structural Noise Requirements Building Number/Type Architectural Plans/Rooms Assembly STC Rating Required Stucco 46 ALL ALL Windows 26 Glass Doors 26 Source: Ldn Interior Noise Model, 2011 All glass assemblies should be dual-paned and acoustical sealant applied around the exterior edges having a minimum STC 26 rating. No impacts are anticipated with the incorporation of the STC and octave band ratings provided in Table 1 and the structural noise requirements listed in Table 2. If you have any questions, please do not hesitate to contact me directly at (760) 473-1253 orjlouden@ldnconsulting.net. Sincerely, Ldn Consulting, Inc. Jeremy Louden Principal Attachments: A - Sound 32 Model Input and Outputs B - Interior Noise Model Calculations 8/30/2011 11 1169-03 Fairfield Inn Noise Report Attachment A Sound 32 Model Input/Output 1169 Fairfield - First Level T-PEAK HOUR TRAFFIC CONDITIONS, 1 3360, 55, 70, 55, 70, 55 L-Palomar Airport Road, 1 N,69.,754,130, N,283.,669,140, N,494.,600,143, N,823.,519,144, N,1047.,493,145, N,1208.,494,146, N,1532.,548,152, N,1727.,588,157, B-Roadedge NE, 1,1,0,0 1571.,485,154,154, 1303.,457,149,149, 1231.,451,148,148, 958.,446,148,148, 897.,419,148,148, 892.,362,150,150, B-Roadedge NW, 2 ,1,0,0 843.,433,148,148, 774.,471,147,147, 640.,492,147,147, 544.,520,146,146, 405.,565,145,145, 60.,701,130,130, R, 1, 67,500 1113,287,150.,NE Bid R, 2 , 67 ,500 1318,299,150.,NW Bid R, 3 , 67 ,500 1220,287,150.,Pool/spa C,C SOUND32 - RELEASE 07/30/91 TITLE: 1169 Fairfield - First Level REC REC ID DNL PEOPLE LEQ(CAL) 1 NEBId 67. 500. 63.6 2 NWBId 67. 500. 63.6 3 Pool/spa 67. 500. 63.6 1169 Fairfield - Second Level T-PEAK HOUR TRAFFIC CONDITIONS, 1 3360, 55 , 70 , 55 , 70, 55 L-Palomar Airport Road, 1 N,69.,754,130, N,283.,669,140, N,494.,600,143, N,823.,519,144, N,1047.,493,145, N,1208.,494,146, N,1532.,548,152, N,1727.,588,157, B-Roadedge NE, 1,1, 0,0 1571.,485,154,154, 1303.,457,149,149, 1231.,451,148,148, 958.,446,148,148, 897.,419,148,148, 892.,362,150,150, B-Roadedge NW, 2,1,0,0 843.,433,148,148, 774.,471,147,147, 640.,492,147,147, 544.,520,146,146, 405.,565,145,145, 60.,701,130,130, R, 1,67,500 1113,287,160.,NE Bid R, 2 , 67 ,500 1318,299,160.,NW Bid C,C SOUND32 - RELEASE 07/30/91 TITLE: 1169 Fairfield - Second Level REC REC ID DNL PEOPLE LEQ{CAL) 1 NEBId 67. 500. 64.6 2 NWBId 67. 500. 64.3 1169 Fairfield-Third Level T-PEAK HOUR TRAFFIC CONDITIONS, 1 3360,55,70,55,70,55 L-Palomar Airport Road, 1 N,69.,754,130, N,283.,669,140, N,494.,600,143, N,823.,519,144, N,1047.,493,145, N,1208.,494,146, N,1532.,548,152, N,1727.,588,157, B-Roadedge NE, 1,1,0,0 1571.,485,154,154, 1303.,457,149,149, 1231.,451,148,148, 958.,446,148,148, 897.,419,148,148, 892.,362,150,150, B-Roadedge NW, 2,1,0,0 843.,433,148,148, 774.,471,147,147, 640.,492,147,147, 544.,520,146,146, 405.,565,145,145, 60.,701,130,130, R, 1, 67,500 1113,287,170.,NE Bid R, 2 , 67,500 1318,299,170.,NW Bid C,C SOUND32 - RELEASE 07/30/91 TITLE: 1169 Fairfield - Third Level REC REC ID DNL PEOPLE LEQ(CAL) 1 NE Bid 67. 500. 66.7 2 NWBId 67. 500. 66.4 INTERIOR NOISE CALCULATIONS Project Name: Building or Unit(s) Floor Level Arch Plan: Room Type: Fairfield Inn ALL ALL ALL Standard King Ldn Consulting, Inc. Date: 8/30/11 Project # 11-69 Exterior Noise Levels Exterior Noise Level (Traffic Spectrum) Correction for Angle and Facade Adjusted Building Fa?ade Levels dBA CNEL Frequency (Hz.) Exterior Noise Level (Traffic Spectrum) Correction for Angle and Facade Adjusted Building Fa?ade Levels dBA CNEL 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 Exterior Noise Level (Traffic Spectrum) Correction for Angle and Facade Adjusted Building Fa?ade Levels 67.0 6 73.0 53.0 59.0 59.0 57.7 63.7 63.7 60.5 66.5 66.5 62.8 68.8 68.8 59.7 65.7 65.7 54.0 60.0 60.0 Transmission Loss (TL) Exterior Assembly Source Area STC Transmission Loss (dB) Exterior Assembly Source Area STC Frequency (Hz.) Exterior Assembly Source Area STC 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 Stucco NBS W-50-71 130 46 27 42 44 46 49 54 Windows Milgard 0 26 21 17 25 32 37 38 Fixed Window Milgard 40 26 17 16 22 31 35 27 Glass Doors Milgard 0 26 21 24 27 27 24 28 Exterior Door NBS Monograph 77 0 26 16 14 23 30 36 26 Room Absorption (RA) Interior Characteristics Source NRC Absorption Coefficients Interior Characteristics Source NRC Frequency (Hz.) Interior Characteristics Source NRC 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 Carpet Army TM 5-805-4 0.28 0.15 0.17 0.12 0.32 0.52 0.30 Furnishings Army TM 5-805-4 0.45 0.32 0.29 0.42 0.58 0.60 0.48 Drywall Netwell 0.07 0.09 0.08 0.05 0.03 0.06 0.09 Overall Absorption Factor (Furnished Room) 0.8 0.56 0.54 0.59 0.93 1.18 0.87 Noise Reduction Noise Reduction from Absorption based upon Floor Area Noise Level Increase for Defects and Exposed Surface Area 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 Noise Reduction from Absorption based upon Floor Area Noise Level Increase for Defects and Exposed Surface Area -23.6 15.7 -23.6 15.7 -23.6 15.7 -23.6 15.7 -23.6 15.7 -23.6 15.7 Overall Reduction from Tranmission Loss + Room Absorption - Surface Exposure Building Fagade Noise Level (dBA CNEL) 25.9 67.0 Resultant Interior Noise Level (dBA CNEL) 41 INTERIOR NOISE CALCULATIONS Project Name: Building or Unit(s) Floor Level Arch Plan: Room Type: Fairfield Inn ALL ALL ALL King Suite Ldn Consulting, Inc. Date: 8/30/11 Project # 11-69 Exterior Noise Levels Exterior Noise Level (Traffic Spectrum) Correction for Angle and Faf ade Adjusted Building Fagade Levels dBA CNEL Frequency (Hz.) Exterior Noise Level (Traffic Spectrum) Correction for Angle and Faf ade Adjusted Building Fagade Levels dBA CNEL 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 Exterior Noise Level (Traffic Spectrum) Correction for Angle and Faf ade Adjusted Building Fagade Levels 67.0 6.0 73.0 53.0 59.0 59.0 57.7 63.7 63.7 60.5 66.5 66.5 62.8 68.8 68.8 59.7 65.7 65.7 54.0 60.0 60.0 Transmission Loss (TL) Exterior Assembly Source Area STC Transmission Loss (dB) Exterior Assembly Source Area STC Frequency (Hz.) Exterior Assembly Source Area STC 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 Stucco NBS W-50-71 130 46 27 42 44 46 49 54 Windows Milgard 0 26 21 17 25 32 37 38 Fixed Window Milgard 40 26 17 16 22 31 35 27 Glass Doors Milgard 0 26 21 24 27 27 24 28 Exterior Door NBS Monograph 77 0 26 16 14 23 30 36 26 Room Absorption (RA) Interior Characteristics Source NRC Absorption Coefficients Interior Characteristics Source NRC Frequency (Hz.) Interior Characteristics Source NRC 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 Carpet ArmyTM 5-805-4 0.28 0.15 0.17 0.12 0.32 0.52 0.30 Furnishings Army TM 5-805-4 0.45 0.32 0.29 0.42 0.58 0.60 0.48 Drywall Netwell 0.07 0.09 0.08 0.05 0.03 0.06 0.09 Overall Absorption Factor (Furnished Room) 0.8 0.56 0.54 0.59 0.93 1.18 0.87 Noise Reduction Noise Reduction from Absorption based upon Floor Area Noise Level Increase for Defects and Exposed Surface Area 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 Noise Reduction from Absorption based upon Floor Area Noise Level Increase for Defects and Exposed Surface Area -24.1 15.7 -24.1 15.7 -24.1 15.7 -24.1 15.7 -24.1 15.7 -24.1 15.7 Overall Reduction from Tranmission Loss -f- Room Absorption - Surface Exposure Building Fagade Noise Level (dBA CNEL) 26.4 67.0 Resultant Interior Noise Levei (dBA CNEL) 41 INTERIOR NOISE CALCULATIONS Project Name: Building or Unit(s) Floor Level Arch Plan: Room Type: Fairfield Inn ALL ALL ALL Double Queen Ldn Consulting, Inc. Date: 8/30/11 Project # 11-69 Exterior Noise Levels Exterior Noise Level (Traffic Spectrum) Correction for Angle and Facade Adjusted Building Fagade Levels dBA CNEL Frequency (Hz.) Exterior Noise Level (Traffic Spectrum) Correction for Angle and Facade Adjusted Building Fagade Levels dBA CNEL 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 Exterior Noise Level (Traffic Spectrum) Correction for Angle and Facade Adjusted Building Fagade Levels 67.0 6.0 73.0 53.0 59.0 59.0 57.7 63.7 63.7 60.5 66.5 66.5 62.8 68.8 68.8 59.7 65.7 65.7 54.0 60.0 60.0 Transmission Loss (TL) Exterior Assembly Source Area STC Transmission Loss (dB) Exterior Assembly Source Area STC Frequency (Hz.) Exterior Assembly Source Area STC 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 Stucco NBS W-50-71 130 46 27 42 44 46 49 54 Windows Milgard 0 26 21 17 25 32 37 38 Fixed Window Milgard 40 26 17 16 22 31 35 27 Glass Doors Milgard 0 26 21 24 27 27 24 28 Exterior Door NBS Monograph 77 0 26 16 14 23 30 36 26 Room Absorption (RA) Interior Characteristics Source NRC Absorption Coefficients Interior Characteristics Source NRC Frequency (Hz.) Interior Characteristics Source NRC 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 Carpet Furnishings Drywall Army TM 5-805-4 Army TM 5-805-4 Netwell 0.28 0.45 0.07 0.15 0.32 0.09 0.17 0.29 0.08 0.12 0.42 0.05 0.32 0.58 0.03 0.52 0.60 0.06 0.30 0.48 0.09 Overall Absorption Factor (Furnished Room) 0.8 0.56 0.54 0.59 0.93 1.18 0.87 Noise Reduction Noise Reduction from Absorption based upon Floor Area Noise Level Increase for Defects and Exposed Surface Area 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 Noise Reduction from Absorption based upon Floor Area Noise Level Increase for Defects and Exposed Surface Area -24.0 15.7 -24.0 15.7 -24.0 15.7 -24.0 15.7 -24.0 15.7 -24.0 15.7 Overall Reduction from Tranmission Loss -i- Room Absorption - Surface Exposure Building Fagade Noise Level (dBA CNEL) 26.2 67.0 Resultant Interior Noise Level (dBA CNEL) INTERIOR NOISE CALCULATIONS Project Name: Building or Unit(s) Floor Level Arch Plan: Room Type: Fairfield Inn ALL All All Double Queen Suite Ldn Consulting, Inc. Date: 8/30/11 Project # 11-69 Exterior Noise Levels Exterior Noise Level (Traffic Spectrum) Correction for Angle and Fagade Adjusted Building Fagade Levels dBA CNEL Frequency (Hz.) Exterior Noise Level (Traffic Spectrum) Correction for Angle and Fagade Adjusted Building Fagade Levels dBA CNEL 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 Exterior Noise Level (Traffic Spectrum) Correction for Angle and Fagade Adjusted Building Fagade Levels 67.0 6.0 73.0 53.0 59.0 59.0 57.7 63.7 63.7 60.5 66.5 66.5 62.8 68.8 68.8 59.7 65.7 65.7 54.0 60.0 60.0 Transmission Loss (TL) Exterior Assembly Source Area STC Transmission Loss (dB) Exterior Assembly Source Area STC Frequency (Hz.) Exterior Assembly Source Area STC 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 Stucco NBS W-50-71 130 46 27 42 44 46 49 54 Windows Milgard 0 26 21 17 25 32 37 38 Fixed Window Milgard 40 26 17 16 22 31 35 27 Glass Doors Milgard 0 26 21 24 27 27 24 28 Exterior Door NBS Monograph 77 0 26 16 14 23 30 36 26 Room Absorption (RA) Interior Characteristics Source NRC Absorption Coefficients Interior Characteristics Source NRC Frequency (Hz.) Interior Characteristics Source NRC 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 Carpet Furnishings Drywall Army TM 5-805-4 Army TM 5-805-4 Netwell 0.28 0.45 0.07 0.15 0.32 0.09 0.17 0.29 0.08 0.12 0.42 0.05 0.32 0.58 0.03 0.52 0.60 0.06 0.30 0.48 0.09 Overall Absorption Factor (Furnished Room) 0.8 0.56 0.54 0.59 0.93 1.18 0.87 Noise Reduction Noise Reduction from Absorption based upon Floor Area Noise Level Increase for Defects and Exposed Surface Area 125 250 SOO 1000 2000 4000 Noise Reduction from Absorption based upon Floor Area Noise Level Increase for Defects and Exposed Surface Area -25.3 15.7 -25.3 15.7 -25.3 15.7 -25.3 15.7 -25.3 15.7 -25.3 15.7 Overall Reduction from Tranmission Loss + Room Absorption - Surface Exposure Building Fagade Noise Level (dBA CNEL) 27.5 67.0 Resultant Interior Noise Level (dBA CNEL) Tumble DryefS°^°^^i^° L 50 Pound Capacity 75 Pound Capacity starting Serial No. 0904004427 Refer to Page 5 for Model Identification Keep These Instructions for Future Reference. (If this machine changes ownership, this manual must accompany machine.) II Laundry Systems 9 9 www.coinlaundry.com Part No. 70420301ENR8 July 2012 Ch 17' l«« Installation must conform with local codes or, in the absence of local codes, with: In the U.S.A., installation must conform to the latest edition of the American National Standard Z223.1/ NFPA 54 "National Fuel Gas Code" and Standard ANSI/NFPA 70 "National Electric Code." In Canada, installation must comply with Standards CAN/CSA-B149.1 or Natural Gas and Propane Instailation Code and CSA C22.1, latest edition, Canadian Electric Code, Part I. In Australia and New Zealand, installation must comply with the Gas Installations Standard AS/NZS 5601 Part 1: General Installations. WARNING FOR YOUR SAFETY, the information in this manual must be followed to minimize the risk of fire or explosion or to prevent property damage, personal injury or death. Do not store or use gasoline or other flammable vapors and liquids in the vicinity of this or any other appliance. WHAT TO DO IF YOU SMELL GAS: - Do not try to light any appliance. - Do not touch any electrical switch; do not use any phone in your building. - Clear the room, building or area of ali occupants. - Immediately call your gas supplier from a neighbor's phone. Follow the gas supplier's instructions. - If you cannot reach your gas supplier, call the fire department. Installation and service must be performed by a qualified installer, service agency or the gas supplier. IMPORTANT: Information must be obtained from a local gas supplier on instructions to be followed if the user smells gas. These instructions must be posted in a prominent location. Step-by-step instructions of the above safety information must be posted in a prominent location near the tumble dryer for customer use. 70420301 (EN) © Copyright, Alliance Laundry Systems LLC - DO NOT COPY or TRANSMIT A WARNING Installation of unit must be performed by a qualified installer. Install tumble dryer according to manufacturer's instructions and local codes. DO NOT install a tumble dryer with flexible plastic venting materials. If flexible metal (foil type) duct is installed, it must be of a specific type identified by the appliance manufacturer as suitable for use with tumble dryer. Refer to section on connecting exhaust system. Flexible venting materials are known to collapse, be easily crushed, and trap lint. These conditions will obstruct tumble dryer airflow and increase the risk of fire. FOR YOUR SAFETY Do not store or use gasoline or other flammable vapors and liquids in the vicinity of this or any other appliance. The following information applies to the state of Massachusetts, USA. • This appliance can only be installed by a Massachusetts licensed plumber or gas fitter. • This appliance must be installed with a 36 inch (91 cm) long flexible gas connector. • A "T-Handle" type gas shut-ofF valve must be installed in the gas supply line to this appliance. • This appliance must not be installed in a bedroom or bathroom. ) Copyright, Alliance Laundry Systems LLC - DO NOT COPY or TRANSMIT 70420301 (EN) Table of Contents Introduction 5 Model Identification 5 Customer Service 7 Wiring Diagram 7 Serial Plate Location 7 Safety Information 8 Important Safety Instructions 9 Specifications and Dimensions 11 Cabinet Dimensions 12 Exhaust Outlet Locations 13 Gas Connection Locations 14 Electrical Connection Locations 15 Steam Connection Locations 16 Installation 17 Pre-Installation Inspection 17 Location Requirements 18 Position and Level the Tumble Dryer 19 Bolt-On Angle Option 19 To Reverse the Loading Door 21 Before Placing Tumble Dryer into Service 24 Required for CE Models Only 25 Installing CE Gas Drying Tumble Dryers 25 General Information 25 Basic Configuration 27 Specific Conversion Procedures 27 Exhaust Requirements 30 Layout 30 Make-UpAir 30 Venting 30 Individual Venting 31 Manifold Venting 31 Gas Requirements 35 Gas Supply Pipe Sizing and Looping 37 High Altitude Bumer Orifice Sizing 39 Electrical Requirements 40 Grounding Instructions 41 For CE Models Only 41 Service/Ground Location 42 To Connect Electrical Service To The Tumble Dryer 43 Jumper Configuration Instructions 44 Ferrite Ring Installation 44 50 Pound Gas and Steam Models 45 75 Pound Gas and Steam Models 46 50 and 75 Pound Electric Models 47 © Copyright 2012, Alliance Laundry Systems LLC All rights reserved. No part of the contents of this book may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without the expressed written consent of the publisher. 70420301 (EN) ) Copyright, Alliance Laundry Systems LLC - DO NOT COPY or TRANSMIT Steam Requirements 48 Piping Recommendations 49 Installing Steam Trap and Making Condensate Retum Connections 49 Thermal Oil Prep 49 Single Drop Timer 51 Power-Up Mode 51 Ready Mode 51 Start Mode 51 Run Mode 51 Setting Dry Time Dipswitches 51 Resetting Cycle Time to Zero 51 Dipswitch Settings 52 Adjustments 54 Gas Bumer Air Shutter 54 Airflow Switch 55 Loading Door Switch 55 Loading Door Catch 55 Drive Belt 56 Nonreversing Models 56 Reversing Models 56 Removing Tumble Dryer from Service 59 ) Copyright, Alliance Laundry Systems LLC - DO NOT COPY or TF?ANSM1T 70420301 (EN) Introduction Model Identification Information in this manual is applicable to these models: Gas Steam/Thermal Oil Electric CA050L DR55G2-BT050L ST050L CT050S 1PD50S2-IT050S CT050E CA050N DR55G2-BT050N ST050N CT050T IPD50S2-IT050T CU050E CT050L DR55G2-BU050L SU050L CU050S ST050S DR50E2-BT050E CT050N DR55G2-BU050N SU050N CU050T ST050T DR50E2-BU050E CU050L HA050L UA050L DR50S2-BT050S SU050S DR55E2-BT050E CU050N HA050N UA050N DR50S2-BT050T SU050T DR55E2-BU050E T3 1^ DR50G2-BA050L HT050D UT050L DR50S2-BU050S UT050S HT050E 3 Q DR50G2-BA050N HT050L UT050N DR50S2-BU050T UT050T HU050E a. DR50G2-BT050D HT050N UU050L DR55S2-BT050S UU050S IPD50E2-IT050E o DR50G2-BT050L HU050L UU050N DR55S2-BT050T UU050T ST050E DR50G2-BT050N HU050N YT050L DR55S2-BU050S YT050S SU050E DR50G2-BU050L IPD50G2-IT050L YT050N DR55S2-BU050T YT050T UT050E DR50G2-BU050N 1PD50G2-IT050N YU050L HT050S YU050S UU050E DR55G2-BA050L SA050L YU050N HT050T YU050T YT050E DR55G2-BA050N SA050N HU050S YU050E DR55G2-BT050D ST050D HU050T CA075L DR80G2-BT075N STF75L CT075S IPD75S2-1T075S CT075E CA075N DR80G2-BU075L STF75N CT075T IPD75S2-IT075T CU075E CT075L DR80G2-BU075N SU075L CU075S ST075S DR75E2-BT075E CT075N HA075L SU075N CU075T ST075T DR75E2-BU075E CU075L HA075N UA075L DR75S2-BT075S SU075S DR80E2-BT075E CU075N HT075D UA075N DR75S2-BT075T SU075T DR80E2-BU075E DR75G2-BA075L HT075L UT075L DR75S2-BU075S UT075S HT075E c DR75G2-BA075N HT075N UT075N DR75S2-BU075T UT075T HU075E o DR75G2-BT075D HU075L UTF75L DR80S2-BT075S UU075S IPD75E2-IT075E UL in DR75G2-BT075L HU075N UTF75N DR80S2-BT075T UU075T ST075E r-DR75G2-BT075N IPD75G2-IT075L UU075L DR80S2-BU075S YT075S SU075E DR75G2-BU075L IPD75G2-IT075N UU075N DR80S2-BU075T YT075T UB075E DR75G2-BU075N SA075L YT075L HT075S YU075S UT075E DR8()G2-BA075L SA075N YT075N HT075T YU075T UU075E DR80G2-BA075N ST075D YU075L HU075S YT075E DR80G2-BT075D ST075L YU075N HU075T YU075E DR80G2-BT075L ST075N (see next page for control suffixes) 70420301 (EN) © Copyright, Alliance Laundry Systems LLC - DO NOT COPY or TF?ANSM1T Introduction Includes models with the following control suffixes: 3B - reversing DX4 vended 30-DX4 0PL 3V-DX4 vended 3W - reversing DX4 prep for coin 3X - DX4 prep for coin BB- reversing basic electronic, coin BC - basic electronic, coin BL - basic electronic, central pay BW - reversing basic electronic, prep for coin BX - basic electronic, prep for coin BY - basic electronic, prep for card BZ - reversing basic electronic, prep for card DO-DMP OPL DV - DMP vended DX - DMP prep for coin EO - OPL electronic KB - reversing single coin KC - single coin KW - reversing prep for coin KX - prep for coin KY - prep for card KZ - reversing prep for card LB - reversing network adaptable coin LC - network adaptable coin LW - reversing network adaptable, prep for coin LX - network adaptable, prep for coin LY - network adaptable, prep for card LZ - reversing network adaptable, prep for card OM - OPL micro QT - dual digital timer R3 - reversing DX4 OPL RD - reversing DMP OPL RE - reversing OPL electronic RM - reversing OPL micro RQ - reversing dual digital timer RU - reversing UniLinc OPL SD - single drop SX - single drop, prep for coin UO-UniLinc OPL WB - reversing network ready coin WC - network ready coin WW - reversing network ready, prep for coin WX - network ready, prep for coin WY - network ready, prep for card WZ - reversing network ready, prep for card © Copyright, Alliance Laundry Systems LLC - DO NOT COPY or TRANSMIT 70420301 (EN) Introduction Customer Service If literature or replacement parts are required, contact the source from which the machine was purchased or contact Alliance Laundry Systems at (920) 748-3950 for the name and address of the nearest authorized parts distributor. For technical assistance, call (920) 748-3121. Wiring Diagram The wiring diagram is located in the junction or contactor box. The wiring diagram part number is in the lower portion of the electrical data on the serial plate. Serial Plate Location When calling or writing for information about your product, be sure to mention model and serial numbers. Model and serial numbers are found on serial plate on the rear of machine and inside door. ••••••• DDDDano Serial Plate Conversion Table Multiply By To Obtain Multiply By To Obtain Btu 0.252 kCal Pounds/sq. inch 0.06895 Bars Btu 1055 Joules Pounds/sq. inch 0.070 kg/sq. cm Inch 25.4 Millimeters Pounds (Ibs.) 0.454 Kilograms Inches W.C. 0.036 Pounds/sq. inch Boiler Horsepower 33,479 Btu/hr. Inches W.C. 0.249 kPa Boiler Horsepower 34.5 Ibs. steam/hr. Ib./inch^ (psi) 6.895 kPa CFM 0.471 liters/second 28.32 Liters kW 3414 Btu/hr. 70420301 (EN) ) Copyright, Alliance Laundry Systems LLC - DO NOT COPY or TRANSMIT Safety Information Precautionary statements ("DANGER," "WARNING," and "CAUTION"), followed by specific instrucfions, are found in this manual and on machine decals. These precautions are intended for the personal safety of the operator, user, servicer, and those maintaining the machine. DANGER Indicates an imminently hazardous situation that, if not avoided, will cause severe personal injury or death. WARNiNG Indicates a hazardous situation that, if not avoided, could cause severe personal injury or death. CAUTION Indicates a hazardous situation that, if not avoided, may cause minor or moderate personal injury or property damage. Additional precautionary statements ("IMPORTANT" and "NOTE") are followed by specific instructions. IMPORTANT: The word "IMPORTANT" is used to inform the reader of specific procedures where minor machine damage will occur if the procedure is not followed. NOTE: The word "NOTE" is used to communicate installation, operation, maintenance or servicing information that is important but not hazard related. WARNING Failure to install, maintain, and/or operate this machine according to manufacturer's instructions may result in conditions which can produce serious injury, death and/or property damage. NOTE: The WARNING and IMPORTANT instructions appearing in this manual are not meant to cover all possible conditions and situations that may occur. It must be understood that common sense, caution and carefulness are factors which CANNOT be built into this tumble dryer. These factors MUST BE supplied by the person(s) installing, maintaining or operating the tumble dryer. Always contact your dealer, distributor, service agent or the manufacturer on any problems or conditions you do not understand. ) Copyright, Alliance Laundry Systems LLC - DO NOT COPY or TRANSMIT 70420301 (EN) Safety Information Save These Instructions Important Safety Instructions WARNING Hazardous Voltage. Can cause shock, burn or cause death. Allow machine power to remain off for two minutes prior to working in and around AC inverter drive. 1. Read all instructions before using the tumble dryer. 2. Refer to the GROUNDING INSTRUCTIONS for the proper grounding of the tumble dryer. 3. Do not dry articles that have been previously cleaned in, washed in, soaked in, or spotted with gasoline, dry cleaning solvents, other flammable or explosive substances as they give off vapors that could ignite or explode. 4. Do not allow children on or in the tumble dryer. This appliance is not intended for use by young children or infirm persons without supervision. Young children should be supervised to ensure that they do not play with the appliance. 5. Before the tumble dryer is removed from service or discarded, remove the door to the drying compartment and the door to the lint compartment. 6. Do not reach into the tumble dryer if the cylinder is revolving. 7. Do not install or store the tumble dryer where it will be exposed to water and/or weather. 8. Do not tamper with the controls. 9. Do not repair or replace any part of the tumble dryer, or attempt any servicing unless specifically recommended in the user-maintenance instructions or in published user-repair instructions that you understand and have the skills to carry out. 10. Do not use fabric softeners or products to eliminate static unless recommended by the manufacturer of the fabric softener or product. 11. To reduce the risk of fire, DO NOT DRY plastics or articles containing foam rubber or similarly textured rubberlike materials. 12. Always clean the lint filter daily. 13. Keep area around the exhaust opening and adjacent surrounding area free from the accumulation of lint, dust and dirt. 14. The interior of the tumble dryer and the exhaust duct should be cleaned periodically by qualified service personnel. 15. If not installed, operated and maintained in accordance with the manufacturer's instractions or if there is damage to or mishandling of this product's components, use of this product could expose you to substances in the fuel or from fuel combustion which can cause death or serious illness and which are known to the State of Califomia to cause cancer, birth defects or other reproductive harm. 16. Tumble dryer will not operate with the loading door open. DO NOT bypass the door safety switch to permit the tumble dryer to operate with the door open. The tumble dryer will stop tumbling when the door is opened. Do not use the tumble dryer if it does not stop tumbling when the door is opened or starts tumbling without pressing or tuming the START mechanism. Remove the tumble dryer from use and call for service. 17. Tumble dryer will not operate with lint panel open. DO NOT bypass lint panel safety switch to permit the tumble dryer to operate with the lint panel open. 18. Do not put articles soiled with vegetable or cooking oil in the tumble dryer, as these oils may not be removed during washing. Due to the remaining oil, the fabric may catch on fire by itself. 19. To reduce the risk of fire, DO NOT put clothes which have traces of any flammable substances such as machine oil, flammable chemicals, thinner, etc. or anything containing wax or chemicals such as in mops and cleaning cloths, or anything dry-cleaned at home with dry-cleaning solvent in the tumble dryer. 20. Use the tumble dryer only for its intended purpose, drying fabrics. 21. ALWAYS disconnect and lockout the electrical power to the tumble dryer before servicing. Disconnect power by shutting off appropriate breaker or fuse. 70420301 (EN) > Copyright, Alliance Laundry Systems LLC - DO NOT COPY or TRANSMIT Safety Information 22. Install this tumble dryer according to the INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS. All connections for electrical power, grounding, and gas supply must comply with local codes and be made by licensed personnel when required. 23. Remove laundry immediately after tumble dryer stops. 24. Always read and follow manufacturer's instructions on packages of laundry and cleaning aids. Heed all wamings or precautions. To reduce the risk of poisoning or chemical bums, keep them out of reach of children at all times (preferably in a locked cabinet). 25. Do not tumble fiberglass curtains and draperies unless the label says it can be done. If they are dried, wipe out the cylinder with a damp cloth to remove particles of fiberglass. 26. Always follow the fabric care instractions supplied by the garment manufacturer. 27. Never operate the tumble dryer with any guards and/or panels removed. 28. DO NOT operate the tumble dryer if it is smoking, grinding, has missing or broken parts. 29. DO NOT bypass any safety devices. 30. Solvent vapors from dry-cleaning machines create acids when drawn through the heater of the drying unit. These acids are corrosive to the tumble dryer as well as to the laundry load being dried. Be sure make-up air is free of solvent vapors. 31. Failure to install, maintain, and/or operate this machine according to the manufacturer's instractions may result in conditions which can produce bodily injury and/or property damage. A WARNING To reduce the risk of serious injury, install lockable door(s) to prevent public access to rear of tumble dryers. 10 © Copyright, Alliance Laundry Systems LLC - DO NOT COPY or TRANSMIT 70420301 (EN) Specifications and Dimensions Specifications 50 Pound 75 Pound F75 Noise level measured during operation at operator position of 3.3 feet (1 meter) in front of machine and 5.2 feet (1.6 meters) from floor. 60 dBA 65 dBA 67 dBA Net Weight (approximate): Pounds (kg) 545 (247) 615 (279) 710 (322) Standard Packaging Weight: Pounds (kg) 602 (273) 677 (307) 772 (350) Standard Packaging Shipping Dimensions: Inch (mm) 41.5x52.1 X 81 (1054X 1323 X2057) 41.5x56.4x81 (1054 X 1433 x 2057) 41.5x56.4x81 (1054 X 1433 x2057) Slat Crate Packaging Weight: Pounds (kg) 669 (303) 742 (337) 837 (380) Slat Crate Shipping Dimensions: Inch (mm) 44.5 x 55 X 87.75 (1130 x 1397x 2229) 44.5 X 59.25 x 87.75 (1130X 1505 x2229) 44.5 X 59.25 x 87.75 (1130 X 1505x2229) Cylinder Size: Inches (mm) 37x30 (940 x 762) 37x36 (940x914) 37x36 (940x914) Cylinder Capacity (dry weight): Pounds(kg) 50 (22.7) 75 (34) 75 (34) Air Outlet Diameter: Inches (mm) 8 (203) 8 (203) 10 (254) Maximum Static Back Pressure: W.C.I, (mbar) 0.5 (1.3) 0.5 (1.3) 0.5 (1.3) Maximum Airflow: CRM. (Usee.) 750 (354) Gas/Steam 60 Hz 920 (434) Gas/Steam 50 Hz 750 (354) Electric 750 (354) 1100 (519) Motor Horsepower: Nonreversing Reversing Fan Cylinder 1/2 1/3 1/3 3/4 1/3 1/3 Not Applicable 1 1/3 Gas Models Gas Connection 1/2 in. NPT 1/2 in. NPT 3/4 in. NPT Gas Burner Rating: Btu/hr. (Mj/hr.) 130,000 (137.2) 165,000 (174.1) 225,000 (237.4) Electric Models Heating Element Rating: Kilowatts (kW) 21 kW (240 V/50 Hz) 30 kW (other voltages) 30 kW Not Applicable Steam Models Steam Connection 3/4 in. NPT 3/4 in. NPT Not Applicable Steam Coil Rating at 100 psig: Boiler Horsepower (Btu/hr.) (recommended operating pressure 80-100 psig) 5.1 (177,500) 6.1 (210,300) Not Applicable 70420301 (EN) ) Copyright, Alliance Laundry Systems LLC - DO NOT COPY or TRANSMIT 11 Specifications and Dimensions Cabinet Dimensions C 41 ••••••••••••a ODDDDDDDDDDDD ••••••••••••a aDDDDDDDDDDDa ^••••••••••D DODDDDQOOOD W-^ '^"^ Models A B C D E* F 50 Pound Gas and Electric 30.75 in. (781 mm) 33.87 in. (860 mm) 48.25 in. (1226 mm) 76.625 in. (1946 mm) 36 in. (914 mm) 38.625 in. (981 mm) 50 Pound Steam 30.75 in. (781 mm) 33.87 in. (860 mm) 48.25 in. (1226 mm) 80 in. (2032 mm) 36 in. (914 mm) 38.625 in. (981 mm) 75 Pound Gas and Electric 30.75 in. (781 mm) 33.87 in. (860 mm) 54.25 in. (1378 mm) 76.625 in. (1946 mm) 36 in. (914 mm) 38.625 in. (981 mm) 75 Pound Steam 30.75 in. (781 mm) 33.87 in. (860 mm) 54.25 in. (1378 mm) 80 in. (2032 mm) 36 in. (914 mm) 38.625 in. (981 mm) F75 Gas 30.75 in. (781 mm) 33.87 in. (860 mm) 54.25 in. (1378 mm) 76.625 in. (1946 mm) 36 in. (914 mm) 38.625 in. (981 mm) Models G H* 1* J* K 50 Pound Gas and Electric 33 in. (838 mm) 7.1 in. (180 mm) 5.5 in. (140 mm) 6.53 in. (166 mm) 29.5 in. (749 mm) 50 Pound Steam 33 in. (838 mm) 7.1 in. (180 mm) 5.5 in. (140 mm) 6.53 in. (166 mm) 29.5 in. (749 mm) 75 Pound Gas and Electric 33 in. (838 mm) 7.1 in. (180 mm) 5.5 in. (140 mm) 6.53 in. (166 mm) 35.5 in. (902 mm) 75 Pound Steam 33 in. (838 mm) 7.1 in. (180 mm) 5.5 in. (140 mm) 6.53 in. (166 mm) 35.5 in. (902 mm) F75 Gas 33 in. (838 mm) 7.1 in. (180 mm) • 5.5 in. (140 mm) 6.53 in. (166 mm) 35.5 in. (902 mm) * Fire suppression system optional - may not be on machine. 12 ) Copyright, Alliance Laundry Systems LLC - DO NOT COPY or TRANSMIT 70420301 (EN) Specifications and Dimensions Exhaust Outlet Locations ••••DDDDODDDQ ••••••••••••• ••••••••••••a ••••••••••••• "^^••••••••••D 5] A-H Models A B C 50/75 Pound 5.375 in. (137 mm) 8 in. (203 mm) 13.375 in. (340 mm) F75 6.5 in. 10 in. 6.5 in. F75 (165 mm) (254 mm) (165 mm) 70420301 (EN) ) Copyright, Alliance Laundry Systems LLC - DO NOT COPY or TRANSMIT 13 Specifications and Dimensions Gas Connection Locations DDDDaoaanDDD •ODDDDODODDD •••••••••ODD "TsgggaoDDDDD pBSSnDDDDDD Diameter A B 75-1/2 in. NPT 14.75 in. (375 mm) 65.75 in. (1670 mm) F75 - 3/4 in. NPT 14.75 in. (375 mm) 65.75 in. (1670 mm) 14 ) Copyright, Alliance Laundry Systems LLC - DO NOT COPY or TRANSMIT 70420301 (EN) Electrical Connection Locations Specifications and Dimensions ••••••••••••• ••••••••••••• ••••••••••••• DDaaaaDDDDDDD rjanDDDaDnnDD liaoaaaaaaaan GAS AND STEAM w ELECTRIC A B 3.25 in. (83 mm) 75.5 in. (1918mm) NOTE: These figures are approximate dimensions only. 70420301 (EN) ) Copyright, Alliance Laundry Systems LLC - DO NOT COPY or TRANSMIT 15 Specifications and Dimensions Steam Connection Locations 1 B IDDDDD jDoaap Models Diameter A B C D 50/75 Pound 3/4 in. NPT 15.5 in. (394 mm) 78.25 in. (1988 mm) 7.5 in. (190 mm) 64.75 in. (1645 mm) 16 ) Copyright, Alliance Laundry Systems LLC - DO NOT COPY or TRANSMIT 70420301 (EN) Installation Pre-Installation Inspection Upon delivery, visually inspect the crate, carton and parts for any visible shipping damage. If the crate, carton, or cover is damaged or signs of possible damage are evident, have the carrier note the condition on the shipping papers before the shipping receipt is signed, or advise the carrier of the condition as soon as it is discovered. Remove the crate and protective cover as soon as possible and check the items listed on the packing list. Advise the carrier of any damaged or missing articles as soon as possible. A written claim should be filed with the carrier immediately if articles are damaged or missing. IMPORTANT: Remove the shipping tape from the two back draft dampers located in the exhaust outlet. IMPORTANT: Warranty is void unless tumble dryer is installed according to instructions in this manuah Installation should comply with minimum specifications and requirements detailed in this manuai and applicable local gas fitting regulations, municipal building codes, water supply regulations, electrical wiring regulations, and any other relevant statutory regulations. Due to varied requirements, applicable local codes should be thoroughly understood and all pre-installation work arranged for accordingly. Materials Required (Obtain Locally) All Models Gas Models Steam Models One Single Pole fused disconnect switch or circuit breaker on 1 Phase models. Circuit breaker on 3 Phase models. One gas shut-off" valve for gas service line to each tumble dryer. One steam shut-off valve for steam service line to be connected upstream of solenoid steam valve. Two steam shut-off valves for each condensate retum line. Flexible steam hoses with a 125 psig (pounds per square inch gauge) (8.79 kg/sq. cm) working pressure for connecting steam coils. Refer to Figure 22 for sizing and connection configurations. Two steam traps for steam coil outlets to condensate retum line. Optional - Two vacuum breakers for condensate retum lines. IMPORTANT: Keep tumble dryer area clear and free from combustible materials, gasoline and other flammable vapors and liquids. NOTE: 3 Phase Only - Each tumble dryer must be connected to its own individual branch circuit breaker, not fuses, to avoid the possibility of "single phasing" and causing premature failure of the motor(s). 70420301 (EN) © Copyright, Alliance Laundry Systems LLC - DO NOT COPY or TRANSMIT 17 Installation Location Requirements The tumble dryer must be installed on a level floor. Floor covering materials such as carpeting or tile should be removed. To assure compliance, consult local building code requirements. The tumble dryer must not be installed or stored in area where it will be exposed to water and/ or weather. IMPORTANT: DO NOT block the airflow at the rear of the tumble dryer with laundry or other articles. Doing so would prevent adequate air supply to the combustion chamber of the tumble dryer. A typical tumble dryer enclosure is shown in Figure 1. Note the minimum and maximum dimensions. Local codes and ordinances must be complied with. WARNiNG To reduce the risk of serious injury, install lockable door(s) to prevent public access to rear of tumble dryers. IMPORTANT: Install tumble dryers with sufficient clearance for servicing and operation, refer to Figure 1. WARNING To reduce the risk of severe injury, clearance of tumble dryer cabinet from combustible construction must conform to the minimum clearances. TMB2242N NOTE: Shaded areas indicate adjacent structure. 1 0.5 in. (13 mm) recommended between machines for removal or installation 2 Allow 2-4 in. (51-102 mm) opening at top of machine to aid in removal or installation. A removable trim piece may be used to conceal the opening; zero clearance allowed for trim 3 4 in. (102 mm) maximum header thickness 4 12 in. (305 mm) minimum clearance permitted for remainder 5 Guard 6 Provision for make-up air 7 24 in. (610 mm) minimum, 36 in. (914 mm) recommended for maintenance purposes 8 0.25 in. (6 mm) recommended for removal or installation purposes, zero clearance allowed Figure 1 18 ) Copyright, Alliance Laundry Systems LLC - DO NOT COPY or TRANSMIT 70420301(EN) Installation Position and Level the Tumble Dryer Bolt-On Angle Option Remove lint panel door, and unscrew the four shipping bolts (one at each comer). Remove tumble dryer from skid. NOTE: Do not throw bolts away - they are the leveling legs. Remove four nuts Irom the literature package, and screw one fully on to each leveling leg. Screw the four leveling legs (bolts) back into the level adjusting fittings from the bottom. Slide tumble dryer to its permanent location. Adjust the leveling legs until the unit is level, or no more than 0.125 inch (3.18 mm) higher in the front. Refer to Figure 2. Tumble dryer must not rock. Lock leveling legs with nuts previously installed. NOTE: The front ofthe tumble dryer should be slightly higher than the rear (approximately 0.125 inch, 3.18 mm). This will prevent the clothes, while tumbling, from wearing on the door glass gasket. IMPORTANT: Keep tumble dryer as close to floor as possible. The unit must rest flrmly on floor so weight of tumble dryer is evenly distributed. 50 Pound Tumble dryers Only This option allows the tumble dryer depth to be reduced to 34 5/16 inches. The tumble dryer should then fit through a 36 inch door opening (actual 34 1/2 inches). 1. Remove the loading door, access panel, front panel and lint panel. Refer to Figure 3. 1 2 3 4 5 Loading Door Front Panel Access Panel Cylinder Lint Panel Figure 3 Figure 2 70420301 (EN) © Copyright, Alliance Laundry Systems LLC - DO NOT COPY or TRANSMIT 19 Installation TMB2243N 1 Tmnnion Housing 2 Junction/Contactor Box 3 Vertical Trunnion Channel 4 Cylinder Pulley 5 Drive Guard 6 Exhaust Thimble 7 Motor 8 Motor Bracket Figure 4 2. Remove the drive guard. Refer to Figure 4. 3. Remove the drive belts. Refer to Figure 4. 4. Remove the cylinder pulley and shaft key. 5. Pull the cylinder out through the front of the tumble dryer. Refer to Figure 3. 6. To ensure proper cylinder balance for reassembly, mark each channel's original location on cylinder head and number of shims for each channel before removal. Refer to Figure 5. 7. Remove the complete idler assembly. 8. Remove the trunnion housing. Refer to Figure 4. 9. Disconnect the motor hamess(s). 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Number of Shims for this Channel Cylinder Head Trunnion Channel Identifier Shims Channel Location Number of Shims for this Channel Figure 5 10. Remove the motor(s) and motor bracket(s). Refer to Figure 4. 11. Unbolt and remove the two vertical trunnion channels. 12. Remove the junction/contactor box. Refer to Figure 4. 13. Remove the exhaust thimble. 14. The gas supply line may require removal if it extends past the rear panel. If so, disconnect the union located between the gas and shutoff valves and remove the assembly out through the front of the tumble dryer. 15. Remove the tumble dryer from the crate base and slide it through the door, sideways. 16. Refer to the appropriate troubleshooting manual, installation manual and wiring diagram to reassemble and install the tumble dryer correctly. 20 © Copyright, Alliance Laundry Systems LLC - DO NOT COPY or TRANSMIT 70420301 (EN) Installation To Reverse the Loading Door The tumble dryer is delivered with a right hinged door, but the door can be changed to a left hinged position. WARNING To reduce the risk of electric shock, fire, explosion, serious injury or death: • Disconnect electric power to the tumble dryer before servicing. • Close gas shut-off valve to gas tumble dryer before servicing. • Close steam valve to steam tumble dryer before servicing. • Never start the tumble dryer with any guards/panels removed. • Whenever ground wires are removed during servicing, these ground wires must be reconnected to ensure that the tumble dryer is properly grounded. 1. Disconnect power supply to tumble dryer. 2. Unlock and remove control panel. Remove two control assembly mounting screws from right side. Swing open control to access upper flange right guide lug assembly. Refer to Figure 6. 3. Remove lint panel. IMPORTANT: Support door and hinge assembly securely to prevent it from dropping once side screws are removed from door hinge lug. 1 Control Assembly Mounting Screw 2 Control Assembly 3 Guide Lug Assembly 4 Side Screw 5 Screw 6 Lint Panel 7 Front Panel 8 Control Panel Figure 6 70420301 (EN) © Copyright, Alliance Laundry Systems LLC - DO NOT COPY or TRANSMIT 21 Installation 6. Remove four front panel screws. Refer to Figure 6. Keep door hinge cams in place on door hinge lug. Pull lug and door assembly off as one piece. Refer to Figure 7. Remove remaining front panel screws, four on the top and four on the bottom. Refer to Figure 6. Disconnect door switch harness from switch. Take off front panel. Refer to Figure 7. Exchange switch and plug locations. Depress tabs with an adjustable pliers to remove plug and switch from front panel. Reinstall switch, orienting button toward center of machine. Reinstall plug in switch's previous location. Refer to Figure 7. Plug Switch Side Screw Door Hinge Lug Door Assembly TMB199eN 1 Screw Cable Clamp 2 Beginning Location of Door Switch Harness 3 Original Switch Location 4 Lint Panel Switch Harness 5 Wire Ties 6 Original Plug Location 7 Top Panel Figure 8 Figure 7 7. Reroute door switch harness up through top panel, along underside of front flange, through screw cable clamp, back down through top panel and into upper left quadrant of cylinder enclosure. Refer to Figure 8. 22 © Copyright, Alliance Laundry Systems LLC - DO NOT COPY or TRANSMIT 70420301 (EN) Installation 10. 11. 12. Place front panel on machine, loosely attach four bottom screws. Connect door switch harness to switch in new location. Install door assembly and four front panel side screws loosely. Refer to Figure 9. Check lint panel fit, adjusting front panel up or down as required. Tighten four front panel side screws to maintain position of front panel for proper lint panel clearance. Remove lint panel. Fully tighten bottom screws on front panel. Reinstall top screws and guide lugs. Adjust door catch if necessary to allow 7-15 pounds pull (0.48 - 1.03 bar) at center of handle. 13. Reinstall control assembly using mounting screws. 14. Reinstall control panel and lint panel. IMPORTANT: Restore power to tumble dryer and test for proper operation of loading door switch. Tumble dryer should not start with door open; an operating tumble dryer should stop when door is opened. NOTE: If machine is converted back to right hand hinge operation, the door switch harness must be rerouted. 1 Switch (New location) 2 Plug (New location) 3 Door Assembly 4 Side Screw Figure 9 70420301 (EN) © Copyright, Alliance Laundry Systems LLC - DO NOT COPY or TRANSMIT 23 Installation Before Placing Tumble Dryer into Service 1. Remove or open all panels and check accessible bolts, nuts, screws, terminals and fittings for tightness. 2. Check belt tension and adjust if necessary. Refer to Adjustments section. 3. Replace all panels and guards. 4. Turn on electrical supply to tumble dryer. 5. Open the supply valve for gas or steam heated tumble dryers. 6. After performing the previous checks, start the tumble dryer by pressing START. (Refer to the Operating Manual for detailed instractions.) Release the start button and open the loading door. The cylinder should stop rotating within seven seconds after the door is opened a maximum of 2 inches (51 mm). If it does not, adjust the loading door switch. Refer to Adjustments section. 7. Gas tumble dryers: Start the tumble dryer and check the bumer flame. Adjust the air inlet shutter as required. Refer to Adjustments section. IMPORTANT: The electronic ignition system will attempt to light the gas by sparking for the "trial for ignition" period. If gas does not ignite within this period, the ignition control will go into a safety lockout and the valve will no longer open until the control is reset. It may be necessary to retry several times to bleed air from the gas lines. To reset, open and close the loading door and restart tumble dryer. Prepurge Time (seconds) Trial for Ignition (seconds) Reset Lockout Condition By: Australia 18 10 Press reset button CE 18 10 Press reset button All others 1-3 10 Open loading door If lockout condition persists, check that the manual gas shut-off valve is in the ON position and that the gas service is properly connected. If condition still persists, remove tumble dryer from service. Load the cylinder with a full load of clean rags and run to remove oil or dirt from cylinder. Check the airflow switch operation refer to Adjustments section. The heating systems should shut off when the lint panel is opened a maximum of 1.5 inches (38 mm). The airflow switch operation may be affected by shipping tape still in place, lack of make-up air, or an obstraction in the exhaust duct. These should be checked and the required corrective action taken before attempting to adjust the airflow switch. To adjust the airflow switch, refer to Adjustments section. WARNING Do not operate tumble dryer if airflow switch is faulty. An explosive gas mixture could collect in tumble dryer if airflow switch does not operate properly. 10. Wipe out the cylinder using an all-purpose cleaner or detergent and water solution. Refer to Figure 10. Figure 10 If the tumble dryer does not meet ANY of the listed requirements, remove tumble dryer from use. Refer to Removing tumble dryer from Service section. 24 © Copyright, Alliance Laundry Systems LLC - DO NOT COPY or TRANSMIT 70420301 (EN) Installation Required for CE Models Only Once machine is installed, please be sure to complete the following items: • Review and verify machine operation with customer. • Leave all literature and a signed Declaration of Conformity with customer. • Review machine warranty information with customer. • Apply warning sticker on front panel of machine, in language appropriate to country of sale (included in literature packet). Installing CE Gas Drying Tumble Dryers WARNING To reduce the risk of electric shock, fire, explosion, serious injury or death: • Disconnect electric power to the tumble dryer before servicing. • Close gas shut-off valve to gas tumble dryer before servicing. • Close steam valve to steam tumble dryer before servicing. • Never start the tumble dryer with any guards/panels removed. • Whenever ground wires are removed during servicing, these ground wires must be reconnected to ensure that the tumble dryer is properly grounded. General Information This information is to be used when installing gas tumble dryers in countries and/or on gases different than the machine's factory configuration. Tumble dryers are supplied from the factory for operation on Natural Gas 1000 Btu/cu. ft. (8914 kcal/m^), or L.P Gas 2500 Btu/cu. ft. (22,250 kcal/m^),in the countries of GB/IE/PT/ES/IT/GR/LU/CH. To install machines in any other country, or on any other gas, requires some level of modification. Machines are built in two different configurations: • Natural Gas - regulated/governor • Liquefied Petroleum (L.P.) Gas - not regulated/ no governor Machines configured for Natural Gas (regulator/ governor) may be converted to L.P. Gas (not regulated/ no governor) with block-open kit. Part No. M400763. Serial plates supplied from the factory are configured for GB/IE/PT/ES/IT/GR/LU/CH. These insfructions pertain to the situations when the country of use or gas supply is different than that on the serial plate. Table 1 describes the different gases that are available in different CE countries, and how the machines need to be configured to operate with those gases. In the CE, there are Natural Gas configurations that do not allow for machine regulation and L.P. Gas configurations that must be regulated. For L.P. Gas, third family B/P at 50 mbar, order Regulated Natural Gas machines and convert according to Table 1. 70420301 (EN) ) Copyright, Alliance Laundry Systems LLC - DO NOT COPY or TRANSMIT 25 Installation Country Code Gas Type Group Supply Pressure, mbar Burner Orifice Pressure, mbar Capacity/ Model Diameter, mm Quantity Burner Orifice Part No. DK/NO/ SE/FI/CZ/ EE/LV/LT/ SI/SK Natural Gas H 20 8.9 050 075 3.7 3.6 2 3 M401000 M401014 DK/NO/ SE/FI/CZ/ EE/LV/LT/ SI/SK L.P. Gas B/P 30 No Govemor 050 075 2.1 2.0 2 3 M401003 M400999 DE** Natural Gas E 20 8.9 050 075 3.7 3.6 2 3 M401000 M401014 DE** Natural Gas LL 25 12.6 050 075 3.7 3.6 2 3 M401000 M401014 DE** L.P. Gas B/P 30 No Govemor 050 075 2.1 2.0 2 3 M401003 M400999 DE** L.P. Gas B/P 50 28.5 050 075 2.1 2.0 2 3 M401003 M400999 NL Natural Gas L 25 12.6 050 075 3.7 3.6 2 3 M401000 M401014 NL L.P. Gas B/P 30 No Govemor 050 075 2.1 2.0 2 3 M401003 M400999 BE/FR* Natural Gas E+ 20/25 No Govemor 050 075 3.0 2.9 2 3 M401017 N/A BE/FR* L.P. Gas 3+ 28/37 No Govemor 050 075 2.1 2.0 2 3 M401003 M400999 GB/IE/PT/ ES/IT/GR/ LU/CH Natural Gas H 20 8.9 050 075 3.7 3.6 2 3 M401000 M401014 GB/IE/PT/ ES/IT/GR/ LU/CH L.P. Gas 3+ 28/37 No Governor 050 075 2.1 2.0 2 3 M401003 M400999 AT** Natural Gas H 20 8.9 050 075 3.7 3.6 2 3 M401000 M401014 AT** L.P. Gas B/P 50 28.5 050 075 2.1 2.0 2 3 M401003 M400999 CY/IS/MT L.P. Gas B/P 30 No Govemor 050 075 2.1 2.0 2 3 M401003 M400999 HU Natural Gas H 25 8.9 050 075 3.7 3.6 2 3 M401000 M401014 HU L.P. Gas B/P 30 No Govemor 050 075 2.1 2.0 2 3 M401003 M400999 PL Natural Gas H 20 8.9 050 075 3.7 3.6 2 3 M401000 M401014 PL L.P. Gas 3P 37 No Govemor 050 075 2.1 2.0 2 3 M401003 M400999 Bumer orifice information at 0-2000 feet (0-600 meters) altitude. N/A = Part no longer available. * For Natural Gas, Group E+ applications, convert using L.P. Gas model and replace bumer orifice(s). ** For L.P. Gas, Group B/P with 50 mbar supply pressure, convert using Natural Gas model, M411334 regulator spring kit and bumer orifice(s). Table 1 26 © Copyright, Alliance Laundry Systems LLC - DO NOT COPY or TRANSMIT 70420301(EN) Installation Basic Configuration 1. Determine the necessary conversion operations to convert from the factory-supplied configuration to the desired configuration. 2. Perform the conversions required so the machine is properly configured for the desired country and gas (refer to Specific Conversion Procedures section): • How to Convert Gas Valve from Regulated to Unregulated NOTE: Conversion from regulated to unregulated is only needed when regulated tumble dryers were ordered, but unregulated tumble dryers were needed. • How to Change Burner Orifice Size • How to Adjust Gas Valve Governor/Regulator 3. If applicable, peel off the appropriate country sticker (included with machine) and apply it to the serial plate over the existing country information. 4. If applicable, peel off the appropriate conversion sticker (included with machine) and apply it to the serial plate over the "ADJUSTED FOR GAS: " information. 5. Commission tumble dryer for use. WARNING When converting the tumble dryer to a different gas or pressure, first verify that the supply inlet pressure is equipped with a pressure regulator (located ahead of the tumble dryer) that will maintain the gas supply at the inlet pressure specified. Gas Shut-Off Valve (Ahead of pressure tap) (Not Supplied) Pressure Tap Gas Shut-Off Valve (Shown in closed position) (Not Supplied) Figure 11 Specific Conversion Procedures How to Convert Gas Valve from Regulated to Unregulated NOTE: Conversion from regulated to unregulated is only needed when regulated tumble dryers were ordered, but unregulated tumble dryers were needed. 1. Disconnect electrical power from tumble dryer. Close gas shut-ofF valve to tumble dryer. Refer to Figure 11. 2. Follow instructions in Conversion Kit, Part No. M400763 (Johnson Part No. Y71AA-5C). NOTE: This kit does not contain any burner orifices. 3. Replace bumer orifice(s) as per Table 1. 4. Commission tumble dryer for use. 70420301 (EN) ) Copyright, Alliance Laundry Systems LLC - DO NOT COPY or TRANSMIT 27 Installation 1 Gas Valve 2 Regulator Plate 3 Burner Orifice 4 Burner Tube Openings 5 Burner 6 Pressure Tap 7 Spud Holder 8 9 10 11 12 13 Manifold Pipe Anti-Torque Ring Spud Holder Nut Plate Gasket Regulator Cap Figure 12 How to Change Burner Orifice Size Disconnect electrical power from tumble dryer. Close gas shut-off valve to tumble dryer. Refer to Figure 11. Remove spud holder. Unscrew spud holder nut near gas valve. Remove the bumer orifice(s) from spud holder. Refer to Figure 12. 3. Install the new, correct bumer orifice(s). Refer to Figure 13 and Table 1. Torque each to 9 - 10 Nm. 4. Reinstall spud holder assembly to gas valve, making certain burner orifice(s) are in line with burner tube opening. Refer to Figure 13. 5. Commission tumble dryer for use. NOTE: Blank burner orifices are Part No. M400995. 28 ) Copyright, Alliance Laundry Systems LLC - DO NOT COPY or TRANSMIT 70420301 (EN) Installation How to Adjust Gas Valve Governor/Regulator 1. Check gas bumer orifice (manifold) pressure as follows. Refer to Figure 12. 2. Remove screw plug from pressure tap. 3. Connect a "U"-tube manometer (or similar pressure gauge) to the bumer orifice (manifold) pressure tap. 4. Start tumble dryer and note pressure once flame is burning. Remove regulator cap and adjust regulator screw until the bumer orifice pressure per applicable table is achieved. Replace regulator cap. Refer to Figure 12. 5. Commission tumble dryer for use. BURNER ORIFICE Size Stamped on Orifice Figure 13 70420301 (EN) © Copyright, Alliance Laundry Systems LLC - DO NOT COPY or TRANSMIT 29 Exhaust Requirements A WARNING A drying tumble dryer produces combustible lint. To reduce the risk of fire, the tumble dryer must be exhausted to the outdoors. W0S7R1 To reduce the risk of fire and accumulation of combustible gases, DO NOT exhaust tumble dryer air into a window well, gas vent, chimney or enclosed, unventilated area such as an attic wall, ceiling, crawl space under a building, or concealed space ofa building. Layout Whenever possible, install tumble dryers along an outside wall where duct length can be kept to a minimum, and make-up air can be easily accessed. Construction must not block the airflow at the rear of the tumble dryer. Doing so would prevent adequate air supply to the tumble dryer combustion chamber. Make-Up Air A tumble dryer is forced air exhausted and requires provisions for make-up air to replace air exhausted by tumble dryer. IMPORTANT: Do not obstruct flow of combustion and ventilation air. Required Make-Up Air Opening (to the outside) for Each Tumble Dryer Model Opening 50 Pound 144 in^ (928 cm^) 75 Pound 195 \t?(\25Scm^) F75 250 in^ (1613 cm^) Make-up air openings with louvers will restrict airflow. The opening must be increased to compensate for area taken up by louvers. Make-up air openings in rooms containing tumble dryer(s) and/or gas fired hot water heater or other gravity vented appliances must be increased sufficiently to prevent downdrafts in any of the vents when all tumble dryers are in operation. Do not locate gravity vented appliances between tumble dryer(s) and make-up air openings. If it is necessary to duct make- up air to tumble dryer(s), increase area of duct work by 25% to compensate for restrictions in air movement. Venting WARNING To reduce the risk of fire due to increased static pressure, we do not recommend installation of in-line secondary lint filters or lint collectors. If secondary systems are mandated, frequently clean the system to assure safe operation. IMPORTANT: Installing in-line filters or lint collectors will cause increased static pressure. Failure to maintain the secondary lint system will decrease tumble dryer efficiency and may void machine warranty. For maximum efficiency and minimum lint accumulation, tumble dryer air must be exhausted to the outdoors by the shortest possible route. Proper sized exhaust ducts are essential for proper operation. All elbows should be sweep type. Exhaust ducts must be assembled so the interior surfaces are smooth, so the joints do not permit the accumulation of lint. DO NOT use plastic, thin foil or Type B ducts - rigid metal ducts are recommended. Use exhaust ducts made of sheet metal or other noncombustible material. DO NOT use sheet metal screws or fasteners on exhaust pipe joints which extend into the duct and catch lint. Use of duct tape or pop-rivets on all seams and joints is recommended, if allowed by local codes. Verify that old ducts are thoroughly cleaned out before installing new tumble dryer(s). WARNING Improperly sized or assembled ductwork causes excess back pressure which results in slow drying, lint collecting in the duct, lint blowing back into the room, and increased fire hazard. W356 NOTE: Exhaust ducts must be constructed of sheet metal or other noncombustible material. Such ducts must be equivalent in strength and corrosion resistance to ducts made of galvanized sheet steel not less than 0.0195 inches (0.495 mm) thick. Where the exhaust duct pierces a combustible wall or ceiling, the opening must be sized per local codes. The space around the duct may be sealed with noncombustible material. Refer to Figure 15. 30 © Copyright, Alliance Laundry Systems LLC - DO NOT COPY or TRANSMIT 70420301 (EN) Exhaust Requirements IMPORTANT: For best performance provide an individual exhaust duct for each tumble dryer. Do not install a hot water heater in a room containing tumble dryers. It is better to have the water heater in a separate room with a separate air inlet. Individual Venting For maximum efficiency and performance, it is preferred to exhaust tumble dryer(s) individually to the outdoors. IMPORTANT: At no point may the cross sectional area of installed venting be less than the cross sectional area ofthe exhaust outlet of the tumble dryer. The exhaust duct must be designed so the static back pressure measured 12 inches (305 mm) from the exhaust outlet does not exceed the maximum allowable pressure specified on the installation sticker on the rear of the tumble dryer. NOTE: Static back pressure must be measured with the tumble dryer running. The maximum allowable length venting is 14 feet (4.3 m) and two 90° elbows or equivalent. If the equivalent length of a duct required for an installation exceeds the maximum allowable equivalent length, the diameter of a round duct must be increased by 10% for each additional 20 feet (6.1 m). Cross section area of a rectangular duct must be increased by 20% for each additional 20 feet (6.1 m). Refer to Table 2 to determine equivalent venting. Duct Diameter Equivatent Length of Rigid Straight Duct 8 in. (203 mm) 10 in. (254 mm) 12 in. (305 mm) Hin. (356 mm) 16 in. (406 mm) 18 in. (457 mm) One 90° elbow = 9.3 ft. (2.83 m) One 90° elbow =11.6 ft. (3.5 m) One 90° elbow = 14 ft. (4.3 m) One 90° elbow = 16 ft. (4.9 m) One 90° elbow = 18.7 ft. (5.7 m) One 90° elbow = 21 ft. (6.4 m) Equivalent Length (feet) = 1.17 x Duct Diameter (inches) Table 2 Example: A 12 inch (305 mm) diameter duct's equivalent length of 14 feet (4.3 m) of duct and two 90° elbows is: Equivalent Length = 14 feet + (2) 90° elbows = 14 feet + 14 feet + 14 feet = 42 feet (12.8 m) With the tumble dryer in operation, airflow at any point in the duct should be at least 1200 feet per minute (366 m/min.) to ensure that lint remains airborne. If 1200 feet per minute (366 m/min.) cannot be maintained, schedule monthly inspections and cleaning of the ductwork. NOTE: The maximum length of a flexible metal duct must not exceed 7.87 ft. (2.4 m) as required to meet UL2158, clause 7.3.2A. Manifold Venting While it is preferable to exhaust tumble dryers individually to the outdoors, a main collector duct may be used if it is sized according to Figure 16 and Figure 17. This illustration indicates minimum diameters, and should be increased if the collector length exceeds 14 feet (4.3 m) and two 90° elbows. The diameter of a round duct must be increased by 10% for each additional 20 feet (6.1 m). Cross sectional area of a rectangular or square duct must be increased 20% for each additional 20 feet (6.1 m). Refer to Table 3 and Table 4 to determine equivalent ducting sizing. The collector duct may be rectangular or square in cross section, as long as the area is not reduced. Provisions MUST be made for lint removal and cleaning of the collector duct. The vent collector system must be designed so the static back pressure measured 12 inches (305 mm) from the exhaust outlet does not exceed the maximum allowable pressure of 0.5 W.C.I. (1.3 mbar) as specified on the installation sticker on the rear of tumble dryer. Static back pressure must be measured with all tumble dryers vented into the collector operating. NOTE: Never connect a tumble dryer duct at a 90° angle to the collector duct. Refer to Figure 14. Doing so will cause excessive back pressure, resulting in poor performance. Never connect two tumble dryer exhaust ducts directly across from each other at the point of entry to the collector duct. With the tumble dryer in operation, airflow at any point in the duct should be at least 1200 feet per minute (366 m/min.) to ensure that lint remains airborne. If 1200 feet per minute (366 m/min.) cannot be maintained, schedule monthly inspections and cleaning of the ductwork. Figure 14 70420301 (EN) ) Copyright, Alliance Laundry Systems LLC - DO NOT COPY or TRANSMIT 31 Exhaust Requirements 1 Removable strip of panel in framing wall to permit removal of tumble dryer from framing wall 2 Partition or bulkhead 3 Minimum distance between exhaust opening and roof, ground or other obstruction: 36 in. (914 mm) 4 2 in. (51 mm) minimum clearance on both sides of duct 5 Exhaust airflow - maximum length of duct: 14 ft. (4.3 m) Figure 15 NOTE: Do not install wire mesh or screen in exhaust duct opening to avoid lint build-up or impacting proper discharge of air from tumble dryers. NOTE: Where exhaust duct pierces a combustible wall or ceiling, the opening must be sized per local codes. NOTE: Inside of duct must be smooth. Do not use sheet metal screws to join sections. Consult your local building code for regulations which may also apply. 32 © Copyright, Alliance Laundry Systems LLC - DO NOT COPY or TRANSMIT 70420301 (EN) Exhaust Requirements ONE MANIFOLD ASSEMBLY NOTE: Where the exhaust duct pierces a combustible wall or ceiling, the opening MUST be sized per local codes. 2 Outlet duct diameter 3 45° typical Figure 16 Duct 50/75 Pound F75 Station 8 in. (203 mm) Duct 10 in. (254 mm) Duct A 8 in. (203 mm) 10 in. (254 mm) B 12 in. (305 mm) 15 in. (381 mm) c 15 in. (381 mm) 18 in. (457 mm) D 17 in. (432 mm) 21 in. (533 mm) E 19 in. (483 mm) 24 in. (610 mm) F 21 in. (533 mm) 26 in. (660 mm) G 23 in. (584 mm) 28 in. (711 mm) H 25 in. (635 mm) 30 in. (762 mm) 1 26 in. (660 mm) 32 in. (813 mm) J 27 in. (686 mm) 33 in. (838 mm) K 29 in. (737 mm) 35 in. (889 mm) L 30 in. (762 mm) 36 in. (914 mm) Table 3 70420301 (EN) ) Copyright, Alliance Laundry Systems LLC - DO NOT COPY or TRANSMIT 33 Exhaust Requirements TWO MANIFOLD ASSEMBLIES NOTE: Where the exhaust duct pierces a combustible wall or ceiling, the opening MUST be sized per local codes. 2 Outlet duct diameter 3 45° typical Figure 17 Duct 50/75 Pound F75 Station 8 in. (203 mm) Duct 10 in. (254 mm) Duct A 13 in. (330 mm) 15 in. (381 mm) B 17 in. (432 mm) 22 in. (559 mm) c 18 in. (457 mm) 26 in. (660 mm) D 24 in. (610 mm) 30 in. (762 mm") E 27 in. (686 mm) 34 in. (864 mm) F 30 in. (762 mm) 37 in. (940 mm) G 33 in. (838 mm) 40 in. (1016 mm) H 34 in. (864 mm) 43 in. (1092 mm) 1 37 in. (940 mm) 46 in. (1168 mm) J 39 in. (991 mm) 47 in. (1194 mm) K 40 in. (1016 mm) 50 in. (1270 mm) L 42 in. (1067 mm) 51 in. (1295 mm) Table 4 34 ) Copyright, Alliance Laundry Systems LLC - DO NOT COPY or TRANSMIT 70420301 (EN) Gas Requirements WARNING To reduce the risk of fire or explosion, DO NOT CONNECT THE GAS LINE TO THE TUMBLE DRYER IF THE GAS SERVICE IS NOT THE SAME AS THAT SPECIFIED ON THE TUMBLE DRYER SERIAL PLATE! It will first be necessary to convert the gas burner orifice and gas valve. Appropriate conversion kits are available. W060R1 IMPORTANT: Any product revisions or conversions must be made by the Manufacturer's Authorized Dealers, Distributors or local service personneL IMPORTANT: The tumble dryer must be isolated from the gas supply piping system by closing its individual manual shut-off valve during any pressure testing of the gas supply piping system at test pressure equal to or less than 0.5 psig (3.45 kPa, 34.5 mbar). NOTE: For gas valves with a manual shut-off switch on the gas valve, the shut-off switch does not protect the valve from this pressure test. Use the individual manual shut-off valve from the gas supply piping system to protect the gas valve. IMPORTANT: The tumble dryer and its manually operated appliance gas valve must be disconnected from the gas supply piping system during any pressure testing of that system at test pressures in excess of 0.5 psi (3.45 kPa, 34.5 mbar). IMPORTANT: The installation must comply with local codes or, in the absence of local codes: • with the latest edition of the "National Fuel Gas Code," ANSI Z223.1/NFPA 54 in the U.S.A. • with CAN/CSA-B149.1 or Natural Gas and Propane Installation Code in Canada • In Australia and New Zealand, installation must comply with the Gas Installations Standard AS/NZS 5601 Part 1: General Installations. Obtain specific gas service pipe size from the gas supplier. Refer to Table 5 for general pipe size. The following must be fumished and installed by the customer for the gas service line to each tumble dryer. Refer to Figure 18. • Sediment traps • Shut-off valves • Supply pressure taps It is important that equal pressure be maintained at all tumble dryer gas coimections. This can be done by installing a 1 inch (25.4 mm) pipe gas loop to maintain equal pressure at all gas connections. Refer to Figure 19. WARNING To reduce the risk of fire or explosion, if the tumble dryer is to be connected to Liquefied Petroleum (L.P.) gas, a vent to the outdoors must be provided in the room where the tumble dryer is installed. NATURAL GAS pressures with all gas appliances running (tumble dryers, water heaters, space heaters, fumace, etc.): Maximum gas pressure - 10.5 water column inches (2.61 kPa) Recommended gas pressure - 6.5 water column inches (1.62 kPa) Minimum gas pressure - 5 water column inches (1.24 kPa) An in-line pressure regulator may be required if the line pressure exceeds 10.5 water column inches (2.61 kPa) with all gas appliances running. LIQUID PETROLEUM GAS (L.P) pressures with all gas appliances running (tumble dryers, water heaters, space heaters, fumace, etc.): Maximum gas pressure - 13 water column inches (3.23 kPa) Recommended gas pressure - 11 water column inches (2.74 kPa) Minimum gas pressure - 10 water column inches (2.49 kPa) 70420301 (EN) © Copyright, Alliance Laundry Systems LLC - DO NOT COPY or TRANSMIT 35 Gas Requirements For converting Non-CE models from Natural Gas to L.P. Gas: 50 Pound -M4979P3 75 Pound -M4454P3 F75 Pound - M4609P3 CE GASES refers to Installing CE Gas Drying Tumble Dryers section, the above data does not apply to the CE. Tum on gas and check all pipe connections (intemal and extemal) for gas leaks with a non-corrosive leak detection fluid. Purge air in gas service line by operating the tumble dryers in the drying mode. If bumer does not light and unit goes into lockout, open and close the door and restart. Repeat these steps until bumer ignites. Use pipe compound, resistant to actions of L.P. gas, on all pipe threads. WARNING Check all pipe connections, internal and external, for gas leaks using a non- corrosive leak detection fluid. To reduce the risk of explosion or fire, DO NOT USE AN OPEN FLAME TO CHECK FOR GAS LEAKS! Gas connections should be checked twice a year for leakage. 1 \ 3U / s / 1 2 3 4 5 6 Gas Line to Tumble Dryer Controls Gas Supply Piping System Gas T Fitting 6 in. (152 mm) Minimum Gas Pipe Gas Pipe Cap Sediment Trap Figure 18 36 ) Copyright, Alliance Laundry Systems LLC - DO NOT COPY or TRANSMIT 70420301 (EN) Gas Requirements Gas Supply Pipe Sizing and Looping 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 Gas furnace (120,000 Btu/hr) Gas water heaters (400,000 Btu/hr each) Gas space heaters (70,000 Btu/hr each) Sediment traps, supply pressure taps and shut-off valves. Refer to F/gure 18 1 in. (25.4 mm) gas pipe loop 19 ft. (5.8 m) 7 8 9 10 11 12 Minimum Pipe Size is 0.5 in. (12.7 mm) 25 ft. (7.6 m) Main regulator Gas meter Pressure regulator (if required) 50 pound tumble dryers (130,000 Btu/hr. each) 75 pound tumble dryers (165,000 Btu/hr each) F75 pound tumble dryers (225,000 Btu/hr each) SAMPLE CALCULATIONS Equivalent length Total length of main gas supply pipe to the far end of the tumble dryers = 25 ft. + 19 ft. (7.6 m + 5.8 m) gas supply pipe = 44 ft. (13.4 m) Total Gas Line Total Btu/hr = The sum of the Btu/hr of all 50 pound tumble dryers being fed by the main gas supply pipe = 9x130,000 = 1,170,000 Btu/hr Using Table 5, the main supply pipe diameter should be 2 in. (51 mm) IMPORTANT: Gas loop piping must be installed as illustrated to equalize gas pressure for all tumble dryers connected to single gas service. Other gas using appliances should be connected upstream from loop. Figure 19 70420301 (EN) ) Copyright, Alliance Laundry Systems LLC - DO NOT COPY or TRANSMIT 37 Gas Requirements Gas Pipe Size Required for 1000 Btu Natural Gas — 0.64 Specific Gravity at 7 ± 1.5 inches {17.4 ± 4 mbar, 1.74 ± 0.37 kPa) Water Column Pressure Equivalent Length Gas Appliances Total Btu/hr. 25 feet (7.63 m) 50 feet (15.25 m) 75 feet (22.88 m) 100 feet (30.50 m) 125 feet (38.13 m) 150 feet (45.75 m) Based on 0.3 in. Water Column Pressure Drop for Length Given Sizes shown in inches (mm) 100,000 0.75(19.05) 0.75 (19.05) 1 (25.40) 1 (25.40) 1 (25.40) 1 (25.40) 120,000 0.75 (19.05) 1 (25.40) 1 (25.40) 1 (25.40) 1 (25.40) 1 (25.40) 140,000 0.75(19.05) 1 (25.40) 1 (25.40) 1 (25.40) 1 (25.40) 1.25(31.75) 160,000 0.75(19.05) 1 (25.40) 1 (25.40) 1.25 (31.75) 1.25(31.75) 1.25 (31.75) 180,000 1 (25.40) 1 (25.40) 1 (25.40) 1.25 (31.75) 1.25 (31.75) 1.25 (31.75) 200,000 1 (25.40) 1 (25.40) 1.25 (31.75) 1.25 (31.75) 1.25 (31.75) 1.5 (38.10) 300,000 1 (25.40) 1.25 (31.75) 1.25 (31.75) 1.5(38.10) 1.5 (38.10) 1.5 (38.10) 400,000 1.25(31.75) 1.25 (31.75) 1.5 (38.10) 1.5 (38.10) 1.5 (38.10) 2 (50.80) 500,000 1.25(31.75) 1.5 (38.10) 1.5 (38.10) 2 (50.80) 2 (50.80) 2 (50.80) 600,000 1.5 (38.10) 1.5 (38.10) 2 (50.80) 2 (50.80) 2 (50.80) 2 (50.80) 700,000 1.5 (38.10) 2 (50.80) 2 (50.80) 2 (50.80) 2 (50.80) 2.5 (63.50) 800,000 1.5(38.10) 2 (50.80) 2 (50.80) 2 (50.80) 2.5 (63.50) 2.5 (63.50) 900,000 2 (50.80) 2 (50.80) 2 (50.80) 2.5 (63.50) 2.5 (63.50) 2.5 (63.50) 1,000,000 2 (50.80) 2 (50.80) 2 (50.80) 2.5 (63.50) 2.5 (63.50) 2.5 (63.50) 1,100,000 2 (50.80) 2 (50.80) 2.5 (63.50) 2.5 (63.50) 2.5 (63.50) 2.5 (63.50) 1,200,000 2 (50.80) 2 (50.80) 2.5 (63.50) 2.5 (63.50) 2.5 (63.50) 2.5 (63.50) 1,300,000 2 (50.80) 2.5 (63.50) 2.5 (63.50) 2.5 (63.50) 2.5 (63.50) 3 (76.20) 1,400,000 2 (50.80) 2.5 (63.50) 2.5 (63.50) 2.5 (63.50) 3 (76.20) 3 (76.20) 1,500,000 2 (50.80) 2.5 (63.50) 2.5 (63.50) 2.5 (63.50) 3 (76.20) 3 (76.20) 1,600,000 2 (50.80) 2.5 (63.50) 2.5 (63.50) 3 (76.20) 3 (76.20) 3 (76.20) 1,700,000 2 (50.80) 2.5 (63.50) 2.5 (63.50) 3 (76.20) 3 (76.20) 3 (76.20) 1,800,000 2.5 (63.50) 2.5 (63.50) 3 (76.20) 3 (76.20) 3 (76.20) 3 (76.20) 1,900,000 2.5 (63.50) 2.5 (63.50) 3 (76.20) 3 (76.20) 3 (76.20) 3 (76.20) 2,000,000 2.5 (63.50) 2.5 (63.50) 3 (76.20) 3 (76.20) 3 (76.20) 3.5 (88.90) 2,200,000 2.5 (63.50) 3 (76.20) 3 (76.20) 3 (76.20) 3.5 (88.90) 3.5 (88.90) 2,400,000 2.5 (63.50) 3 (76.20) 3 (76.20) 3 (76.20) 3.5 (88.90) 3.5 (88.90) 2,600,000 2.5 (63.50) 3 (76.20) 3 (76.20) 3.5 (88.90) 3.5 (88.90) 3.5 (88.90) 2,800,000 2.5 (63.50) 3 (76.20) 3 (76.20) 3.5 (88.90) 3.5 (88.90) 3.5 (88.90) 3,000,000 2.5 (63.50) 3 (76.20) 3.5 (88.90) 3.5 (88.90) 3.5 (88.90) 4(101.60) For L.P. Gas, correct the total Btu/hr by multiplying it by 0.6. The answer is the equivalent Btu on the above chart Table 5 38 © Copyright, Alliance Laundry Systems LLC - DO NOT COPY or TRANSMIT 70420301 (EN) Gas Requirements High Altitude Burner Orifice Sizing For proper operation at altitudes above 2000 feet (610 m), the gas bumer orifice size must be reduced to ensure complete combustion. Refer to Table 6. For CE models, consult local gas supplier. Model Gas Altitude Burner Orifice New Rate Model Gas feet meters No. inches mm Quantity Part Number (Btu/hr.)* Natural Gas 2001-4000 610-1220 27 0.1440 3.7 2 M400998 119,600 4001-6000 1221-1830 28 0.1405 3.6 M401014 109,200 6001-8000 1831-2440 29 0.1360 3.4 M400997 98,800 50 Pound 8001-10,000 2441-3050 30 0.1285 3.3 M401021 88,400 50 Pound L.P. Gas 2001-4000 610-1220 43 0.0890 2.3 M406184 119,600 4001-6000 1221-1830 44 0.0860 2.2 M401011 109,200 6001-8000 1831-2440 45 0.0820 2.1 M401027 98,800 8001-10,000 2441-3050 46 0.0810 2.1 M401003 88,400 Natural Gas 2001-4000 610-1220 29 0.1360 3.4 3 M400997 151,800 4001-6000 1221-1830 30 0.1285 3.3 M401021 138,600 6001-8000 1831-2440 1/8 0.1250 3.2 M402489 125,400 75 Pound 8001-10,000 2441-3050 31 0.1200 3.0 M401017 112,200 75 Pound L.P. Gas 2001-4000 610-1220 45 0.0820 2.1 M40I027 165,000 4001-6000 1221-1830 47 0.0785 2.0 M400999 138,600 6001-8000 1831-2440 47 0.0785 2.0 M400999 125,400 8001-10,000 2441-3050 48 0.0760 1.9 M401001 112,200 Natural Gas 2001-4000 610-1220 22 0.1570 4.0 3 M402996 207,000 4001-6000 1221-1830 24 0.1520 3.9 M402980 189,000 6001-8000 1831-2440 26 0.1470 3.7 M401000 171,000 F75 8001-10,000 2441-3050 28 0.1405 3.6 M401014 153,000 F75 L.P. Gas 2001-4000 610-1220 41 0.0960 2.4 M401015 225,000 4001-6000 1221-1830 42 0.0935 2.4 M403017 189,000 6001-8000 1831-2440 43 0.0890 2.3 M406184 171,000 8001-10,000 2441-3050 44 0.0860 2.2 M401001 153,000 * Btu/hr. derate of 4% per 1000 feet (305 meters) of altitude. Table 6 70420301(EN) © Copyright, Alliance Laundry Systems LLC - DO NOT COPY or TRANSMIT 39 Electrical Requirements WARNING To reduce the risk of electric shock, fire, explosion, serious injury or death: • Disconnect electric power to the tumble dryer before servicing. • Close gas shut-off valve to gas tumble dryer before servicing. • Close steam valve to steam tumble dryer before servicing. • Never start the tumble dryer with any guards/panels removed. • Whenever ground wires are removed during servicing, these ground wires must be reconnected to ensure that the tumble dryer is properly grounded. WD02R1 To reduce the risk of fire and electric shock, check with a qualified serviceman for proper grounding procedures. Improper connection ofthe equipment grounding conductor may result in a risk of electric shock. W068 To reduce the risk of fire and electric shock, if electrical supply is coming from a three phase service, DO NOT connect a "High Leg" or "Stinger Leg" to a single phase machine. On a three phase machine, if there is a "High Leg" or "Stinger Leg" it should be connected to L3. IMPORTANT: Electrical connections must be made by a qualified electrician using data on serial plate, installation manuals and wiring diagram provided with machine and according to local codes. Install a circuit breaker as close to the tumble dryer as possible. Ifmore than one tumble dryer is being installed, a circuit breaker must be provided for each. NOTE: Connect machine to an individual branch circuit not shared with lighting or other equipment. NOTE: 3 Phase Machines Only - Do not use fuses to avoid the possibility of "single phasing" and causing premature failure of the motors. WARNING In case of servicing (or putting the tumble dryer out of order), disconnect the tumble dryer from the main supply by switching off the circuit breaker. 40 © Copyright Alliance Laundry Systems LLC - DO NOT COPY or TRANSMIT 70420301 (EN) Electrical Requirements Grounding Instructions NOTE: To ensure protection against shock, this tumble dryer MUST be electrically grounded in accordance with the local codes, or in the absence of local codes, with the latest edition of the National Electrical Code ANSI/NFPA No. 70. In Canada the electrical connections are to be made in accordance with CSA C22.1 latest edition Canadian Electrical Code, or local codes. Electrical work should be done by a qualified electrician. This tumble dryer must be grounded. In the event of malfunction or breakdown, grounding will reduce the risk of electric shock by providing a path of least resistance for electric current. This tumble dryer must be connected to a grounded metal, permanent wiring system; or an equipment grounding conductor must be run with the circuit conductors and connected to the appropriate ground location. • Metal conduit and/or BX cable is not considered ground. • Connecting the Neutral from the electrical service box to the tumble dryer ground screw does not constitute a ground. • A dedicated ground conduit (wire) must be connected between the electrical service box ground bar and tumble dryer ground screw. WARNING To reduce the risk of electrical shock, de-energize the electrical circuit being connected to the tumble dryer before making any electrical connections. All electrical connections should be made by a qualified electrician. Never attempt to connect a live circuit. CAUTION Label all wires prior to disconnection when servicing controls. Wiring errors can cause improper and dangerous operation. Verify proper operation after servicing. For CE Models Only All OPL (non-vend) models are factory-equipped with an emergency stop button on the front panel. NOTE: Activation of the emergency stop switch stops all machine control circuit functions, but DOES NOT remove all electrical power from machine. 70420301 (EN) ) Copyright, Alliance Laundry Systems LLC - DO NOT COPY or TRANSMIT 41 Electrical Requirements Service/Ground Location Model Ground and Terminal Block Locations Non-CE Electrical Service Ground Terminal Block Junction Box Electrical- Service Power Disconnect (Models Through 7/31/11) Terminal Block 1 1 O CD ( ) 0 Ground . Junction Box Figure 20 42 © Copyright, Alliance Laundry Systems LLC - DO NOT COPY or TRANSMIT 70420301 (EN) To Connect Electrical Service To The Tumble Dryer The following steps outline the procedure for connecting the electrical service to the tumble dryer. NOTE: The wiring diagram is located in the junction box. 1. Install a circuit breaker as close to the tumble dryer as possible. If more than one tumble dryer is being installed, a circuit breaker should be provided for each. This will make it possible to disconnect each tumble dryer for maintenance purposes. 2. Connect the conduit-encased leads to the circuit breaker. Connect the wire leads to the appropriate labeled terminal on the terminal block. The ground wire must be connected to the ground connection as shown in Figure 20. Electrical Requirements 3. Check the electrical service phase sequence (three phase only) as follows: a. Energize the electrical service (on reversing tumble dryers, ensure nonreversing is selected) and momentarily start the tumble dryer. Check the direction of the cylinder rotation. If the cylinder rotates clockwise (viewed from the front), the phase sequence is correct. If the cylinder rotates counterclockwise, proceed with step b. NOTE: When viewed from the front, the fan should rotate clockwise on 50 and 75 pound models and counterclockwise on F75 models. b. Disconnect and reverse any two service leads on the terminal block (example: switch L2 and L3 on terminal block). 70420301 (EN) ) Copyright, Alliance Laundry Systems LLC - DO NOT COPY or TRANSMIT 43 Electrical Requirements Jumper Configuration Instructions Changing the transformer configuration jumper is required, PRIOR TO SUPPLYING POWER TO THE MACHINE, if any ofthe following apply: IMPORTANT: Failure to install the proper configuration jumper may result in damage to sensitive electronic controls and may void warranty. • Location voltage 200 - 208 Volt service and connecting a model rated for 240 Volt operation. Replace the 240 Volt jumper with the 208 Volt jumper per the conversion label, located on the rear of the tumble dryer, sign and date conversion label to document the conversion. Ferrite Ring Installation Gas and Steam Models with OM and RM Control Suffixes Only (Models Through 7/31/11) The ferrite ring provided in the literature packet must be installed over the power leads during connection of electrical service. The ferrite protects the sensitive electronic controls from desfructive electrical disturbances which may be present on power lines to the machine. Failure to properly install the ferrite ring may result in damage to the electronic controls and will void conttol warranty. To install: 1. Immediately after connection of power leads and before applying power to machine, locate each of the incoming service leads including ground. 2. Snap the ferrite ring closed over all the service leads inside of the contactor box as shown. It is important that the ferrite ring be installed inside the contactor box. Refer to Figure 21. Do not install the ferrite outside of the box or other area. Make sure that service leads are in the center of the ferrite before closing the ring so as not to pinch or damage leads. Non-CE Models CE Models 1 Ferrite Ring 2 Junction Box Models Through 7/31/11 Figure 21 44 > Copyright, Alliance Laundry Systems LLC - DO NOT COPY or TRANSMIT 70420301 (EN) Electrical Requirements 50 Pound Gas and Steam Models Refer to Table 7. NOTE: Wire sizes were obtained from the Canadian Electrical Code for 75 C. wire and are intended for use as a guideline only. Electricai connections should be made by a qualified electricai contractor in accordance witb ail applicable local and national requirements. NOTE: Electrical specifications below are subject to change without notice. Always refer to product serial plate for most current specifications of product being installed. NOTE: Use copper conductors only. NOTE: Connect to individual branch circuit. NOTE: 3 Phase Only - Each tumble dryer must be connected to its own individual branch circuit breaker, not fuses, to avoid the possibility of "single phasing" and causing premature failure of the motor(s). Serial Plate Rating Terminal Block Connections Required Serial Plate Amps Recommended Circuit Serial Plate Rating Terminal Block Connections Required Nonreversing Reversing Breaker Rating Wire Size AWG (mm^) 120V/60Hz/1ph Ll, Neutral and ground 9.3 N/A 15A- 1 pole 14(2.08) 200-208V/60Hz/1ph L1, Neutral and ground 5.1 N/A lOA- 1 pole 14(2.08) 200-208-240V/60HZ/1 ph L1, L2 and ground 5.1 N/A 10A-2pole 14 (2.08) 230-240V/50H2/1ph Ll, Neutral and ground 6.3 6.9 15A- 1 pole 14 (2.08) 200-208V/60Hz/3ph Ll, L2, L3 and ground 2.8 4.0 lOA-3 pole 14(2.08) 200V/50Hz/3ph Ll, L2, L3 and ground 3.3 4.2 lOA-3 pole 14(2.08) 240V/60Hz/3ph Ll, L2, L3 and ground 2.8 4.0 lOA-3 pole 14 (2.08) 230-240V/50Hz/3ph Ll, L2, L3 and ground 3.1 4.3 10A-3pole 14 (2.08) 380V/50 or 60Hz/3ph Ll, L2, L3 and ground 1.6 2.0 lOA-3 pole 14 (2.08) 400-415V/50Hz/3ph Ll, L2, L3 and ground 1.6 2.0 lOA-3 pole 14(2.08) 440V/60Hz/3ph L1, L2, L3 and ground 1.4 1.9 lOA-3 pole 14 (2.08) 460-480V/60Hz/3ph L1, L2, L3 and ground 1.4 1.9 lOA-3 pole 14(2.08) N/A = Not Applicable Table 7 70420301 (EN) ) Copyright, Alliance Laundry Systems LLC - DO NOT COPY or TRANSMIT 45 Electrical Requirements 75 Pound Gas and Steam Models Refer to Table 8 and Table 9. NOTE: Wire size and breaker ratings were obtained from the Canadian Electrical Code for 75 C. wire and are intended for use as a guideline only. Electrical connections should be made by a qualified electrical contractor in accordance with all appUcable local and national requirements. NOTE: Electrical specifications below are subject to change without notice. Always refer to product serial plate for most current specifications of product being installed. NOTE: Use copper conductors only. NOTE: Connect to individual branch circuit. NOTE: 3 Phase Only - Each tumble dryer must be connected to its own individual branch circuit breaker, not fuses, to avoid the possibility of "single phasing" and causing premature failure of the motor(s). Serial Plate Rating Terminal Block Connections Required Serial Plate Amps Recommended Circuit Serial Plate Rating Terminal Block Connections Required Nonreversing Reversing Breaker Rating Wire Size AWG (mm^) 120V/60Hz/1ph Ll, Neutral and ground 13.8 N/A 20A -1 pole 12(3.31) 200-208V/60Hz/1ph L1, Neutral and ground 7.6 N/A 15A- 1 pole 14(2.08) 200-208-240V/60Hz/1ph Ll, L2 and ground 7.6 N/A 15A-2pole 14(2.08) 230-240V/50Hz/1ph Ll, Neutral and ground 6.7 7.0 15A- 1 pole 14(2.08) 200-208V/60Hz/3ph Ll, L2, L3 and ground 3.8 4.3 lOA-3 pole 14 (2.08) 200V/50Hz/3ph Ll, L2, L3 and ground 3.5 4.5 lOA-3 pole 14 (2.08) 240V/60Hz/3ph Ll, L2, L3 and ground 3.8 4.3 lOA-3 pole 14 (2.08) 230-240V/50Hz/3ph Ll, L2, L3 and ground 3.5 4.9 lOA-3 pole 14(2.08) 380V/50 or 60Hz/3ph L1, L2, L3 and ground 1.8 2.1 1 OA-3 pole 14 (2.08) 400-415V/50Hz/3ph L1, L2, L3 and ground 1.8 2.1 lOA-3 pole 14 (2.08) 440V/60Hz/3ph Ll, L2, L3 and ground 1.9 2.1 10A-3pole 14(2.08) 460-480V/60Hz/3ph Ll, L2, L3 and ground 1.9 2.1 lOA-3 pole 14 (2.08) N/A = Not Applicable Table 8 F75 Gas Models Only Serial Plate Rating Terminal Block Serial Plate Amps Recommended Circuit Serial Plate Rating Connections Required Nonreversing Reversing Breaker Rating Wire Size AWG (mm^) 200-208V/60Hz/3ph Ll, L2, L3 and ground N/A 6.3 15A - 3 pole 14(2.08) 240V/60Hz/3ph Ll, L2, L3 and ground N/A 6.3 15A - 3 pole 14 (2.08) 460-480V/60Hz/3ph Ll, L2, L3 and ground N/A 3.1 1 OA-3 pole 14(2.08) N/A = Not Applicable Table 9 46 ) Copyright, Alliance Laundry Systems LLC - DO NOT COPY or TRANSMIT 70420301(EN) 50 and 75 Pound Electric Models Refer to Table 10. NOTE: Wire size and breaker ratings were obtained from the Canadian Electrical Code for 75 C. wire and are intended for use as a guideline only. Electrical connections should be made by a qualified electrical contractor in accordance with all applicable local and national requirements. NOTE: Electrical specifications below are subject to change without notice. Always refer to product serial plate for most current specifications of product being installed. Electrical Requirements NOTE: Use copper conductors only. NOTE: Connect to individual branch circuit. NOTE: 3 Phase Only - Each tumble dryer must be connected to its own individual branch circuit breaker, not fuses, to avoid the possibility of "single phasing" and causing premature failure of the motor(s). Serial Plate Rating Terminal Block Connections Required Serial Plate Amps Recommended Circuit Serial Plate Rating Terminal Block Connections Required Nonreversing Reversing Breaker Rating Wire Size AWG (mm^) 240V/50Hz/1ph (50 Pound only) L1, Neutral and Ground 93 95 125A-1 pole 1 (42.4) 200-208V/60Hz/3ph L1, L2, L3 and ground 89 88 125A-3 pole 1 (42.4) 200V/50Hz/3ph Ll, L2, L3 and ground 84 85 125A-3 pole 1 (42.4) 230V/50Hz/3ph Ll, L2, L3 and ground 73 75 1 OOA-3 pole 3 (26.7) 240V/50Hz/3ph Ll, L2, L3 and ground 79 78 1 OOA-3 pole 3 (26.7) 240V/60Hz/3ph Ll, L2, L3 and ground 79 78 lOOA-3 pole 3 (26.7) 380V/50 or 60Hz/3ph L1, L2, L3 and ground 47 48 60A - 3 pole 6(13.3) 400-415V/50Hz/3ph Ll, L2, L3 and ground 43 44 60A - 3 pole 6(13.3) 440V/60Hz/3ph Ll, L2, L3 and ground 41 41 51A-3 pole 6(13.3) 480V/60Hz/3ph Ll, L2, L3 and ground 38 38 50A - 3 pole 6(13.3) Table 10 70420301 (EN) © Copyright, Alliance Laundry Systems LLC - DO NOT COPY or TRANSMIT 47 steam Requirements NOTE: Machines require a constant 80 to 100 psig (5.62 to 7.03 kg/sq cm) steam service for optimum operation. The maximum allowable steam pressure for use with 60 Hertz or 50 Hertz tumble dryers is 125 psig (8.6 bar). In no case may the pressure exceed the above value. Drying performance is significantly reduced at lower steam pressures. Obtain specific steam service pipe sizes from steam system supplier or a qualified steam fitter. • Refer to Figure 22 for proper steam pipe configurations. • To prevent condensate draining from headers to tumble dryer, piping should have a minimum 12 inch (305 mm) rise above respective header. Do not make steam connection to header with a horizontal or downward facing tee or elbow. • Whenever possible, horizontal rans of steam lines must drain, by gravity, to respective steam header. Water pockets, or an improperly drained steam header will provide wet steam, causing improper operation of tumble dryer. If pockets or improper drainage cannot be eliminated, install a bypass trap to drain condensate from the low point in the steam header to the retum. • In both steam supply and steam retum line, it is recommended that each have a pipe union and shut-ofF valve. This will enable you to disconnect the steam connections and service the tumble dryer while your laundry facility is in operation. • Connect the steam solenoid valve to the related steam coil inlet connection with nipples, flex hoses, unions and tees. • Strainers may require cleaning due to materials from hoses or pipes. • Install vacuum breaker (optional), bucket trap with built-in strainer and check valve. For successful operation of tumble dryer, install frap 18 inches (457 mm) below coil and as near to the tumble dryer as possible. Inspect trap carefully for inlet and outlet markings and install according to trap manufacturer's instructions. If steam is gravity retumed to boiler, omit trap but install vacuum breaker and check valve in retum line near tumble dryer. Gravity retum requires entire retum plumbing be below steam coil outlets. • Install union and shut-off valve in retum line and make final pipe connections to retum header. NOTE: To prevent water hammering, route return lines below outlets of steam coils. 48 ) Copyright, Alliance Laundry Systems LLC - DO NOT COPY or TRANSMIT 70420301 (EN) Piping Recommendations • Trap each steam coil individually. Always keep the trap clean and in good working condition. • When tumble dryer is on the end of a line of equipment, extend header at least 4 feet (1.2 m) beyond tumble dryer. Install shut-off valve, union, check valve and bypass trap at end of line. If gravity return to boiler, omit trap. • Insulate steam supply and retum lines for safety of operator and safety while servicing tumble dryer. • Keep tumble dryer in good working condition. Repair or replace any wom or defective parts. WARNING All system components must have a 125 psig (8.6 bar) working pressure. Shut-off valves must be installed upstream of the steam solenoid valve and downstream of each steam trap so components can be isolated for maintenance or emergency purposes. All components (solenoid valve, traps) must be supported to minimize loads on the tumble dryer steam coil connections. Installing Steam Trap and Making Condensate Return Connections The steam trap must be installed and the coil outlet connections must be connected to the condensate retum lines. The following steps outline the procedure for installing the steam trap and connecting the condensate retum lines. Refer to Figure 22 for typical installations. 1. Use flexible lines between steam inlet solenoid and steam coils, as well as outlet between steam coil and traps. 2. If necessary, install a strainer at the end of each flexible hose. 3. Install a steam trap to each strainer. IMPORTANT: Steam trap must be installed a minimum of 18 inches (457 mm) below the steam coil outlet connections. 4. Install a shut-ofF valve to each steam trap. 5. Connect to the condensate retum lines. steam Requirements 6. For steam solenoid valve wiring connections, refer to Wiring Diagram supplied with tumble dryer. WARNING The flexible steam hoses connecting the coil outlet connections and steam traps must have a minimum of 125 psig (pounds per square inch gauge) (8.79 kg/ sq. cm.) working pressure. A shut-off valve must be instaiied downstream from each steam trap so the condensate return line can be isolated in event a steam trap requires maintenance. Each steam trap must be supported so minimum load is exerted on the coil outlet connection. Thermal Oil Prep It is the responsibility of the customer to install appropriate coil and heating system for thermal oil prep models. Alliance Laundry Systems, LLC. is not responsible for the performance or safety of the customer installed thermal oil system. To ensure proper operation, refer to the Specifications and Dimensions section for the BTU input of equivalent steam models. Thermal oil systems that do not deliver appropriate BTUs will dry slower. For solenoid valve wiring connections, refer to the Wiring Diagram supplied with tumble dryer. 70420301 (EN) ) Copyright, Alliance Laundry Systems LLC - DO NOT COPY or TRANSMIT 49 steam Requirements NOTE: Refer to Table 11 for sizing of steam lines. Piping must also be sized accordingly for length of runs, and number of elbows. 1 Supply 2 12 in. (305 mm) Riser 3 Shut-Off Valve 4 Condensate Return Line from Supply Line 5 Retum 6 Check Valve 7 Vacuum Breaker (Optional) 8 18 in. (457 mm) Drop 9 Solenoid Valve (Supplied with machine) 10 Steam Bonnet 11 Flexible Line 12 Union 13 Trap with Built-in Strainer Figure 22 steam Pressure PSI (bar) Minimum Supply Pipe Diameter Steam Trap Size* (Pounds Condensate/Hour) 80- 100(5.3-6.9) 3/4 in. NPT 160 *Based on 100 psi. 50 Table 11 ) Copyright, Alliance Laundry Systems LLC - DO NOT COPY or TRANSMIT 70420301 (EN) Single Drop Timer NOTE: The following information is for models with an SD control suffix only. Power-Up Mode When power is applied to the tumble dryer, the IN USE light flashes factory status information. Following this, the control goes into READY Mode (light off) or RUN Mode if power was interrupted during a cycle (light on, time remaining unchanged). Ready Mode In READY Mode (light off), the control waits for the vend to be satisfied. When vend is satisfied the control goes into START Mode. Start Mode In START Mode (light on), the vend has been satisfied but the start button has not been pressed. Time remaining in the cycle will not change until the start button is pressed. When the start button is pressed the machine goes into RUN Mode. Run Mode In RUN Mode (light on), the machine is running a cycle and the time remaining is counting down. When time remaining counts down to zero, the control goes into READY Mode. Setting Dry Time Dipswitches To change the dry time on the tumble dryer, combinations of dipswitches can be set on the control. There are eight dipswitches on the tumble dryer control. The first six switches are used to program the amount of additional heat time given for each coin pulse. The additional drying time is added to the factory default minimum heat time of one minute. A valve of 1 to 64 minutes of additional drying time is available For each coin drop pulse. Models Through Serial No. 0908xxxxx The last two switches are used to program the amount of additional cool down time. The additional cool down time is added to the factory default minimum cool down time of 1 minute. A value of 1 to 3 additional minutes is available. The control is shipped from the factory programmed with 1 minute of minimum heat time, preset with 7 additional minutes of drying time (dipswitches 1, 2 and 3 in ON position) and 1 minute of minimum cool down time for a total time of 9 minutes for a coin pulse. For dipswitch settings refer to Table 12. Models Starting Serial No. 0909xxxxx The seventh switch is used to program the amount of additional cool down time. The additional cool down time is added to the factory default minimum cool down time of 1 minute. A value of 3 additional minutes is available. The control is shipped From the Factory programmed with 1 minute oF minimum heat time, preset with 7 additional minutes oF drying time (dipswitches 1,2 and 3 in ON position) and 1 minute oFminimum cool down time For a total time oF9 minutes For a coin pulse. For dipswitch settings reFer to Table 12. The eight switch is used For the cycle reset. IF the switch is OFF (deFault), the control will save the time left on a cycle in case oF a power Failure. IF the switch is ON, the control will clear the cycle and go back to Ready Mode iF there is a power Failure. The control reads the dipswitch settings at power-up. The control must be powered down to change the dipswitch settings. To change the time For a coin pulse, the desired dry time dipswitches must be set to ON position. All other dipswitches must be in OFF position. NOTE: The control must be powered down for 10 seconds before the dipswitches can be changed. Resetting Cycle Time to Zero (Models Starting Serial No.0909xxxxx) To remove any cycle time that may have accumulated on the control during setup, the cycle time on the control can be reset to zero. To reset the time, unplug the tumble dryer and set dipswitch 8 to ON position. Restore power to the tumble dryer for 10 seconds and once again unplug tumble dryer. Set dipswitch 8 to OFF position and restore power to the tumble dryer. 70420301 (EN) © Copyright, Alliance Laundry Systems LLC - DO NOT COPY or TRANSMIT 51 Single Drop Timer Dipswitch Settings Heat Time Per Coin Pulse (in minutes) Heat Switch Number Heat Time Per Coin Pulse (in minutes) 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF 2 ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF 3 OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF 4 ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF 5 OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF 6 ON OFF ON OFF OFF OFF 7 OFF ON ON OFF OFF OFF 8 (factory default) ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF 9 OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF 10 ON OFF OFF ON OFF OFF 11 OFF ON OFF ON OFF OFF 12 ON ON OFF ON OFF OFF 13 OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF 14 ON OFF ON ON OFF OFF 15 OFF ON ON ON OFF OFF 16 ON ON ON ON OFF OFF 17 OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFF 18 ON OFF OFF OFF ON OFF 19 OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF 20 ON ON OFF OFF ON OFF 21 OFF OFF ON OFF ON OFF 22 ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF 23 OFF ON ON OFF ON OFF 24 ON ON ON OFF ON OFF 25 OFF OFF OFF ON ON OFF 26 ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF 27 OFF ON OFF ON ON OFF 28 ON ON OFF ON ON OFF 29 OFF OFF ON ON ON OFF 30 ON OFF ON ON ON OFF 31 OFF ON ON ON ON OFF 32 ON ON ON ON ON OFF 33 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON 34 ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON 35 OFF ON OFF OFF OFF ON 36 ON ON OFF OFF OFF ON 37 OFF OFF ON OFF OFF ON Table 12 (continued) 52 ) Copyright, Alliance Laundry Systems LLC - DO NOT COPY or TRANSMIT 70420301 (EN) Single Drop Timer Table 12 (continued) Heat Time Per Coin Pulse (in minutes) Heat Switch Number Heat Time Per Coin Pulse (in minutes) 1 2 3 4 5 6 38 ON OFF ON OFF OFF ON 39 OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON 40 ON ON ON OFF OFF ON 41 OFF OFF OFF ON OFF ON 42 ON OFF OFF ON OFF ON 43 OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON 44 ON ON OFF ON OFF ON 45 OFF OFF ON ON OFF ON 46 ON OFF ON ON OFF ON 47 OFF ON ON ON OFF ON 48 ON ON ON ON OFF ON 49 OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON 50 ON OFF OFF OFF ON ON 51 OFF ON OFF OFF ON ON 52 ON ON OFF OFF ON ON 53 OFF OFF ON OFF ON ON 54 ON OFF ON OFF ON ON 55 OFF ON ON OFF ON ON 56 ON ON ON OFF ON ON 57 OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON 58 ON OFF OFF ON ON ON 59 OFF ON OFF ON ON ON 60 ON ON OFF ON ON ON 61 OFF OFF ON ON ON ON 62 ON OFF ON ON ON ON 63 OFF ON ON ON ON ON 64 ON ON ON ON ON ON Models Through Serial No. 0908xxxxx Models Starting Serial No. 0909xxxxx Cool Down Per Cycle (in minutes) Cool Down Switch Number Cool Down Per Cycle (in minutes) 7 8 1 (factory default) OFF OFF 2 ON OFF 3 OFF ON 4 ON ON Cool Down Per Cycle (in minutes) Cool Down Switch Number Cool Down Per Cycle (in minutes) 7 1 (factory default) OFF 3 ON Cycle Reset Switch Number 8 OFF ON Total Cycle Time = Heat Time + Cool Down Time Table 12 70420301 (EN) > Copyright, Alliance Laundry Systems LLC - DO NOT COPY or TRANSMIT 53 Adjustments WARNING To reduce the risk of electric shock, fire, explosion, serious injury or death: • Disconnect electric power to the tumble dryer before servicing. • Close gas shut-off valve to gas tumble dryer before servicing. • Close steam valve to steam tumble dryer before servicing. • Never start the tumble dryer with any guards/panels removed. • Whenever ground wires are removed during servicing, these ground wires must be reconnected to ensure that the tumble dryer is properly grounded. 5. After air shutter is adjusted for proper flame, tighten air shutter adjusting screw securely. Gas Burner Air Shutter NOTE: Air inlet shutters on the burner must be adjusted so sufficient air is metered into the system for proper combustion and maximum efficiency. Before adjusting the inlet shutters be sure that all lint is removed from lint compartments and lint screen. Air shutter adjustments will vary from location to location and will depend on the vent system, number of units installed, make-up air and line gas pressure. Opening the shutter increases the amount of primary air supplied to the bumer while closing the shutter decreases the primary air supply. Adjust air shutter as follows: Refer to Figure 23. 1. Open the access panel and remove the bumer inspection hole plate. 2. Start the tumble dryer and check the flame pattem. If the flame pattem is straight up, insufficient air is flowing through the tumble dryer. A flame pattem that flares to the right and left indicates no air is flowing through the tumble dryer. Correct air and gas mixture is indicated if the flame pattem is primarily blue, with small yellow tips, and bends to the right of the heater section. Too little air is indicated if the flame if yellow, lazy and smokey. 3. To adjust the air shutter, loosen air inlet shutter adjusting screw. 4. Open or close air shutter as necessary to obtain proper flame intensity. PROPER AIRFLOW INSUFFICIENT AIRFLOW NO AIRFLOW Air Shutter Adjusting Screws Figure 23 54 ) Copyright, Alliance Laundry Systems LLC - DO NOT COPY or TRANSMIT 70420301 (EN) Adjustments Airflow Switch The airflow switch is set at the factory for proper operation. No adjustment necessary. The airflow switch operation may be afTected by shipping tape still in place, lack of make-up air, or an obstruction in the exhaust duct. These should be checked and the required corrective action taken. WARNING The tumble dryer must not be operated if the airflow switch does not operate properly. Faulty airflow switch operation may cause an explosive gas mixture to collect in the tumble dryer. IMPORTANT: Airflow switch vane must remain closed during operation. If it opens and closes during the drying cycle, this indicates insufficient airflow through the tumble dryer. If switch remains open, or pops open and closed during the cycle, the heating system will shut off. The cylinder and fan will continue to operate even though the airflow switch is indicating insufflcient airflow. NOTE: To properly mount the airflow switch bracket, or in case of a load not drying, the airflow switch bracket may need to be checked for proper alignment. Be sure the locator pins are securely in their respective holes before tightening the bracket mounting screws. This will assure proper alignment of the airflow switch arm in the channel of the airflow switch bracket and prevent binding of the arm. Loading Door Switch Loading door switch is factory preset, no field adjustment is necessary. Loading Door Catch The door catch must be adjusted to have sufficient tension to hold loading door closed against force of load tumbling against it. Proper adjustment is when 8 to 15 pounds (35.6 N - 66.7 N) pull is required to open door. IF adjustment is required, reFer to Figure 24 and proceed as Follows: To adjust, open door, loosen acom nut and tum door strike screw in or out as required. Tighten acorn nut. Door Latch Door Catch Acorn Nut Figure 24 70420301 (EN) © Copyright, Alliance Laundry Systems LLC - DO NOT COPY or TRANSMIT 55 Adjustments Drive Belt Nonreversing Models ReFer to Figure 25. Proper tension is when the drive V-belt can be depressed approximately 0.5 inch (13 mm) by applying light thumb pressure at a point midway between the sheave and motor pulley. 1. Remove guard From rear oF tumble dryer. 2. To adjust belt tension, loosen idler housing bolts holding idler housing assembly to the guide rails. 3. Position housing assembly by turning adjusting bolt until proper belt tension is reached, then retighten idler housing bolts. 4. Replace the guard on rear oF tumble dryer. Reversing Models ReFer to Figure 26. Proper tension is when the drive belt can be depressed approximately 0.5 inch (13 mm) by applying light thumb pressure (approximately 5 pounds [0.35 bar]) at a point midway between the sheave and motor pulley. Proper tension is when each cylinder belt can be depressed approximately 0.19 inch (5 mm) by applying light thumb pressure (approximately 5 pounds [0.35 bar]) at a point midway between the sheave and the idler. 1. Remove guard From rear oF tumble dryer. 2. To adjust cylinder belt tension, loosen idler housing bolts holding idler housing assembly to the guide rails. 3. Position housing assembly by tuming adjusting bolt until proper belt tension is reached, then retighten idler housing bolts. NOTE: Adjusting the cylinder belt tension will change the drive tension. Drive belt tension must also be adjusted. 4. Loosen the locking bolt. 5. Loosen the adjusting nut and use the adjusting screw to move the motor up or down. 6. Once proper belt tension is reached, retighten the adjusting nut and locking bolt. 7. Replace the guard on rear oF tumble dryer. 56 © Copyright, Alliance Laundry Systems LLC - DO NOT COPY or TRANSMIT 70420301 (EN) Adjustments NONREVERSING MODELS Poly V-Belt (Self-Adjusting) Idler Housing Bolts (2) Adjusting Bolt 4 Drive V-Belt 5 Idler Housing Assembly Figure 25 70420301(EN) ) Copyright, Alliance Laundry Systems LLC - DO NOT COPY or TRANSMIT 57 Adjustments 1 2 3 4 Locking Bolt Adjusting Nut Adjusting Screw Cylinder Belts REVERSING MODELS Guide Rail Idler Housing Bolts (2) Adjusting Bolt (Not shown) Drive Belt Figure 26 58 © Copyright, Alliance Laundry Systems LLC - DO NOT COPY or TRANSMIT 70420301 (EN) Removing Tumble Dryer from Service IF the tumble dryer is to be removed From service, perForm the Following steps where applicable: • Tum off electrical supply external to machine. • Tum ofF electrical disconnect on machine. • Tum off gas supply extemal to machine. • Tum off manual gas shut-off valve on machine. • Tum off steam supply extemal to machine. • Remove all electric, gas and steam connections. 70420301 (EN) © Copyright, Alliance Laundry Systems LLC - DO NOT COPY or TRANSMIT 59 Drying Tumbfe* 120 Pound Capacity 170 Pound Capacity Refer to Page 5 for Model Identification 9 P O 0 NOTA: Para bajar una copia de estas instrucciones en espanol, visite www.comlaundry.com. 1^ 0 Keep These Instructions for Future Reference. (If this machine changes ownership, this manual must accompany machine.) Laundry Systems www.comlaundry.com Part No. 70260301R8 January 2009 Installation must conform with local codes or, in the absence of local codes, with: In the U.S.A., installation must conform to the latest edition of the American National Standard Z223.1/ NFPA 54 "National Fuel Gas Code" and Standard ANSI/NFPA 70 "National Electric Code." In Canada, installation must comply with Standards CAN/CSA-B149.1 or Natural Gas and Propane Installation Code and CSA C22.1, latest edition, Canadian Electric Code, Part I. In Australia, installation must comply with the Australian Gas Association Installation Code for Gas Buming Appliances and Equipment. WARNING FOR YOUR SAFETY, the information in this manual must be followed to minimize the risk of fire or explosion or to prevent property damage, personal injury or death. Do not store or use gasoline or other flammable vapors and liquids in the vicinity of this or any other appliance. WHAT TO DO IF YOU SMELL GAS: - Do not try to light any appliance. - Do not touch any electrical switch; do not use any phone in your building. - Clear the room, building or area of all occupants. - Immediately call your gas supplier from a neighbor's phone. Follow the gas supplier's instructions. - If you cannot reach your gas supplier, call the fire department. Installation and service must be performed by a qualified installer, service agency or the gas supplier. MISE EN GARDE POUR VOTRE SECURITE, les informations de ce guide doivent etre respectees afin de reduire les risques d'incendie, d'explosion ou d'eviter les dommages materiels, personnels ou blessures mortelles. Ne pas entreposer ou utiliser d'essence ou toutes autres vapours et liquides inflammables a proximite de cette machine ou de tout autre appareil. QUE FAIRE EN CAS D'ODEUR DE GAZ : - Ne pas mettre d'appareil en marche. - Ne pas toucher aux interrupteurs electriques ; ne pas utiliser le telephone des lieux. - Evacuer la piece, le bailment ou la zone de tous les occupants. - Appeler immediatement le fournisseur de gaz de la maison d'un voisin. Respecter les instructions communiquees par le fournisseur. - Si vous ne pouvez pas joindre le fournisseur de gaz, appeler le service d'incendie. L'installation et I'entretien doivent etre effectues par un installateur, service d'entretien qualifies ou par le fournisseur de gaz. IMPORTANT: Information must be obtained from a local gas supplier on instructions to be followed if the user smells gas. These instructions must be posted in a prominent location. Step-by-step instructions of the above safety information must be posted in a prominent location near the tumbler for customer use. 70260301 ) Copyright, Alliance Laundry Systems LLC - DO NOT COPY or TRANSMIT A WARNING Installation of unit must be performed by a qualified installer. Install tumbler according to manufacturer's instructions and local codes. DO NOT install a tumbler with flexible plastic venting materials. If flexible metal (foil type) duct is instaiied, it must be of a specific type identified by the appliance manufacturer as suitable for use with tumbler. Refer to section on connecting exhaust system. Flexible venting materials are known to collapse, be easily crushed, and trap lint. These conditions will obstruct tumbler airflow and increase the risk of fire. FOR YOUR SAFETY Do not store or use gasoline or other flammable vapors and liquids in the vicinity of this or any other appliance. W053 A MISE EN GARDE L'unite doit etre installee par un installateur qualifie. Installer la secheuse conformement aux instructions du fabricant et aux codes locaux. NE PAS installer une secheuse avec des materiaux d'aeration souples en plastique. Si un conduit d'aeration souple en metal (de type feuille mince) est utilise, il doit etre d'un type specifiquement mentionne par le fabricant de I'appareil comme convenable pour utilisation avec secheuses. Se reporter a la section sur la fa9on de connecter le systeme d'evacuation. Les materiaux d'aeration souples risquent de s'affaisser, ils s'ecrasent facilement, et les fibres et les peluches s'y accumulent. Ces conditions obstruent I'ecoulement de I'air et augmentent les risques d'incendie. W752QU POUR VOTRE SECURITE Ne pas entreposer ou utiliser d'essence ou toutes autres vapeurs et liquides inflammables a proximite de cette unite ou de tout autre appareil. The following information applies to the state oF Massachusetts, USA. • This appliance can only be installed by a Massachusetts licensed plumber or gas fitter. • This appliance must be installed with a 36 inch (91 cm) long flexible gas connector. • A "T-Handle" type gas shut-off valve must be installed in the gas supply line to this appliance. • This appliance must not be installed in a bedroom or bathroom. ) Copyright, Alliance Laundry Systems LLC - DO NOT COPY or TRANSMIT 70260301 Table of Contents Introduction 5 Model Identification 5 Customer Service 5 Wiring Diagram Location 5 Serial Plate Location 6 Safety Information 7 Important Safety Instmctions 8 Specifications and Dimensions 10 120 Pound Tumbler Dimensions and Exhaust Ouflet Locations 11 170 Pound Tumbler Dimensions and Exhaust Outlet Locations 12 Electric and Gas Connection Locations for Gas Models 13 Electric and Steam Connection Locations for Steam Models 14 Installation 15 Pre-Installation Inspection 15 Location Requirements 15 Position and Level the Tumbler 17 Before Placing Tumbler into Service 17 Required for CE Models Only 18 Installing CE Gas Drying Tumblers 19 Generalinformation 19 Basic Configuration 21 Specific Conversion Procedures 22 Exhaust Requirements 25 Layout 25 Make-Up Air 25 Venting 25 Individual Venting 27 Manifold Venting 27 Gas Requirements 31 Gas Supply Pipe Sizing and Looping 33 High Altitude Orifice Sizing 35 Electrical Requirements 36 Grounding Instmctions 36 For CE Models Only 36 Service/Ground Location 37 To Connect Electrical Service to the Tumbler 38 Jumper Configuration Instmctions 39 Ferrite Ring Installation 39 Electrical Requirements 40 Steam Requirements 41 Piping Recommendations 41 Installing Steam Trap and Making Condensate Return Connections 42 Thermal Oil Prep 42 120 Pound Tumblers 43 170 Pound Tumblers 44 © Copyright 2009, Alliance Laundry Systems LLC All rights reserved. No part of the contents of this book may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without the expressed written consent of the publisher. 70260301 ) Copyright, Alliance Laundry Systems LLC - DO NOT COPY or TRANSMIT Adjustments 45 Gas Bumer Air Shutter 45 Airflow Switch 46 Loading Door Strike 46 Loading Door Switch 46 Belt Drive 47 Removing Tumbler from Service 48 © Copyright, Alliance Uundry Systems LLC - DO NOT COPY or TRANSMIT 70260301 Introduction Model Identification InFormation in this manual is applicable to these models. Gas Steam/Thermal Oil AT120L HTI20N WT120L AT120S SU120S AT120N HU120L WT120N DR120S2-BT120S SU120T DR120G2-BA120L HU120N XT120L DR120S2-BT120T UT120S DR120G2-BA120N IPD120G2-IT120L XT120N DR120S2-BU120S UT120T DR120G2-BT120L IPD120G2-IT120N XU120L DR120S2-BU120T UU120S DR120G2-BTI20N SA120L XU120N CT120S UU120T DR120G2-BU120L SA120N YT120L CT120T WT120S DR120G2-BU120N ST120L YT120N CU120S WT120T 120 Pound CA120L ST120N CUI20T XT120S CA120N SU120L HT120S XT120T CT120L SU120N HT120T XU120S CT120N UA120L HU120S XU120T CU120L UA120N HU120T YT120S CUI20N UT120L IPD120S2-IT120S YT120T HA120L UT120N EPD120S2-IT120T YU120S HA120N UU120L ST120S YU120T HT120L UU120N ST120T AT170L HT170N WT170L ATI70S SUI 70S AT170N HU170L WT170N DRI70S2-BT170S SU170T DR170G2-BA170L HU170N XT170L DR170S2-BT170T UT170S DR170G2-BA170N IPD170G2-IT170L XT170N DR170S2-BU170S UT170T DR170G2-BT170L IPD170G2-IT170N XU170L DR170S2-BU170T UUI 70S DR170G2-BT170N SA170L XU170N CTl70S UU170T DR170G2-BU170L SA170N YT170L CT170T WTI 70S DR170G2-BU170N ST170L YT170N GUI 70S WT170T 170 Pound CA170L ST170N CU170T XTl70S CA170N SU170L HTI70S XT170T CT170L SU170N HT170T XU170S CT170N UA170L HUI 70S XU170T CU170L UA170N HU170T YT170S CU170N UT170L IPD170S2-IT170S YT170T HA170L UT170N IPD170S2-IT170T HA170N UU170L STl70S HT170L UU170N ST170T Includes models with the Following control suffixes: RM - reversing OPL Micro RQ — reversing dual digital timer RT - reversing manual timer Customer Service IF literature or replacement parts are required, contact the source From which the machine was purchased or contact Alliance Laundry Systems at (920) 748-3950 For the name and address oF the nearest authorized parts distributor. For technical assistance, call (920) 748-3121. Wiring Diagram Location The wiring diagram is located in the junction or contactor box. Models starting Serial No. 0309_ or later will have the wiring diagram part number in the lower portion oF the electrical data on the serial plate. 70260301 © Copyright, Alliance Laundry Systems LLC - DO NOT COPY or TRANSMIT Introduction Serial Plate Location When calling or writing For inFormation about your product, be sure to mention model and serial numbers. Model and serial numbers are located on the serial plate as shown. 120 POUND TUMBLER 170 POUND TUMBLER TMB1298N Serial Plate Conversion Table Multiply By To Obtain Multiply By To Obtain Btu 0.252 kCal Pounds/sq. inch 0.06895 Bars Btu 1055 Joules Pounds/sq. inch 0.070 kg/sq. cm Inch 25.4 Millimeters Pounds (lbs.) 0.454 Kilograms Inches W.C. 0.036 Pounds/sq. inch Boiler Horsepower 33,479 Btu/hr. Inches W.C. 0.249 kPa Boiler Horsepower 34.5 lbs. steam/hr. lb/inch^ (psi) 6.895 kPa CFM 0.471 liters/second ft^ 28.32 Liters kW 3414 Btu/hr. © Copyright, Alliance Laundry Systems LLC - DO NOT COPY or TRANSMIT 70260301 Safety Information Precautionary statements ("DANGER," "WARNING," and "CAUTION"), Followed by specific instractions, are Found in this manual and on machine decals. These precautions are intended For the personal saFety of the operator, user, servicer, and those maintaining the machine. DANGER DANGER - Indicates an imminently hazardous situation that, if not avoided, will cause severe personal injury or death. WARNING WARNING - indicates a hazardous situation that, if not avoided, could cause severe personal injury or death. WARNING Failure to install, maintain, and/or operate this machine according to manufacturer's instructions may result in conditions which can produce serious injury, death and/or property damage. W051R1 NOTE: The WARNINGS and IIVIPORTANT instructions appearing in this manual are not meant to cover all possible conditions and situations that may occur. It must be understood that common sense, caution and carefulness are factors which CANNOT be built into this tumbler. These factors MUST BE supplied by the person(s) installing, maintaining or operating the tumbler. Always contact your dealer, distributor, service agent or the manufacturer on any problems or conditions you do not understand. CAUTION CAUTION - Indicates a hazardous situation that, if not avoided, may cause minor or moderate personal injury or property damage. Additional precautionary statements ("IMPORTANT" and "NOTE") are followed by specific instractions. IMPORTANT: The word "IMPORTANT" is used to inform the reader of specific procedures where minor machine damage will occur if the procedure is not followed. NOTE: The word "NOTE" is used to communicate installation, operation, maintenance or servicing information that is important but not hazard related. 70260301 ) Copyright, Alliance Laundry Systems LLC - DO NOT COPY or TRANSMIT Safety Information Save These Instructions Important Safety Instructions WARNING Hazardous Voltage. Can cause shock, burn or cause death. Allow machine power to remain off for two minutes prior to working in and around AC inverter drive. 1. Read all instractions before using the tumbler. 2. ReFer to the Grounding Instructions For the proper grounding oF the tumbler. 3. Do not dry articles that have been previously cleaned in, washed in, soaked in, or spotted with gasoline, dry cleaning solvents, other flammable or explosive substances as they give oFf vapors that could ignite or explode. 4. Do not allow children on or in the tumbler. This appliance is not intended For use by young children or infirm persons without supervision. Young children should be supervised to ensure that they do not play with the appliance. 5. BeFore the tumbler is removed From service or discarded, remove the door to the drying compartment and the door to the lint compartment. 6. Do not reach into the tumbler iF the cylinder is revolving. 7. Do not install or store the tumbler where it will be exposed to water and/or weather. 8. Do not tamper with the controls. 9. Do not repair or replace any part of the tumbler, or attempt any servicing unless specifically recommended in the user-maintenance instractions or in published user-repair instractions that you understand and have the skills to carry out. 10. Do not use fabric softeners or products to eliminate static unless recommended by the manufacturer of the fabric softener or product. 11. To reduce the risk of fire, DO NOT DRY plastics or articles containing foam rabber or similarly textured rabberlike materials. 12. Always clean the lint filter daily. 13. Keep area around the exhaust opening and adjacent surrounding area free from the accumulation of lint, dust and dirt. 14. The interior of the tumbler and the exhaust duct should be cleaned periodically by qualified service personnel. 15. IF not installed, operated and maintained in accordance with the manuFacturer's instractions or iF there is damage to or mishandling oF this product's components, use of this product could expose you to substances in the fuel or from fuel combustion which can cause death or serious illness and which are known to the State of Califomia to cause cancer, birth defects or other reproductive harm. 16. Tumbler will not operate with the loading door open. DO NOT bypass the door safety switch to permit the tumbler to operate with the door open. The cylinder will stop rotating when the door is opened. Do not use the tumbler if the cylinder does not stop rotating when the door is opened or starts rotating without pressing or tuming the START mechanism. Remove the tumbler from use and call for service. 17. Tumbler will not operate with lint panel open. DO NOT bypass lint panel safety switch to permit tumbler to operate with the lint panel open. 18. Do not put articles soiled with vegetable or cooking oil in the tumbler, as these oils may not be removed during washing. Due to the remaining oil, the fabric may catch on fire by itself. 19. To reduce the risk of fire, DO NOT put clothes which have traces of any flammable substances such as machine oil, flammable chemicals, thinner, etc. or anything containing wax or chemicals such as in mops and cleaning cloths, or anything dry-cleaned at home with dry-cleaning solvent in the tumbler. 20. Use the tumbler only for its intended purpose, drying fabrics. 21. ALWAYS disconnect the electrical power to the tumbler before servicing. Disconnect power by shutting off appropriate breaker or fuse. ) Copyright, Alliance Laundry Systems LLC - DO NOT COPY or TRANSMIT 70260301 22. Install this tumbler according to this Installation Manual. All connections for electrical power, grounding and gas supply must comply with local codes and be made by licensed personnel when required. 23. Remove laundry immediately after tumbler stops. 24. Always read and follow manufacturer's instractions on packages of laundry and cleaning aids. Heed all wamings or precautions. To reduce the risk of poisoning or chemical bums, keep them out of reach of children at all times (preferably in a locked cabinet). 25. Do not tumble fiberglass curtains and draperies unless the label says it can be done. If they are dried, wipe out the cylinder with a damp cloth to remove particles of fiberglass. 26. Always follow the fabric care instractions supplied by the garment manufacturer. 27. Never operate the tumbler with any guards and/or panels removed. Safety Information 28. DO NOT operate the tumbler if it is smoking, grinding, has missing or broken parts. 29. DO NOT bypass any safety devices. 30. Failure to install, maintain, and/or operate this machine according to the manufacturer's instractions may result in conditions which can produce bodily injury and/or property damage. 31. Solvent vapors from dry-cleaning machines create acids when drawn through the heater of the unit. These acids are corrosive to the tumbler as well as to the laundry load being dried. Be sure make-up air is free of solvent vapors. WARNING To reduce the risk of serious injury, install lockable door(s) to prevent public access to rear of tumblers. 70260301 © Copyright, Alliance Laundry Systems LLC - DO NOT COPY or TRANSMIT Specifications and Dimensions Specifications 120 Pound 170 Pound Noise level measured during operation at operator position of 3.3 feet (1 meter) in front of machine and 5.2 feet (1.6 meters) from floor. 66 dBA 66 dBA Cylinder Size: Inches (mm) 44x41 (1118x 1041) 50.75 x 42.5 (1289 X 1080) Cylinder Capacity dry weight: Pounds (kg) 120 (54.4) 170 (77.1) Cylinder Motor Horsepower 0.75 0.75 Fan Motor Horsepower 1 3 Air Outlet Diameter: Inches (mm) 10 (254) 12 (300) Maximum Static Back Pressure: W.C.I, (mbar) 0.3 (0.8) 0.3 (0.8) Maximum Airflow: CRM {Usee.) 1600 (755) 2450 (1156) Gas Models Net Weight (approximate): Pounds(kg) 1275 (580) 1575 (716) Gas Connection 3/4 in. NPT I in. NPT Gas Burner Rating: Btu/hr (Mj/hr) 300,000 (316) 395,000 (421) Steam Models Net Weight (approximate): Pounds(kg) 1375 (625) 1675 (761) Steam Connection 3/4 in. NPT inlet 3/4 in. NPT outlet 3/4 in. NPT inlet 1 in. NPT outlet Steam Coil Rating at 100 psig: Boiler Horsepower (Btu/hr) 11.7 (405,000) 18.8 (648,000) 10 ) Copyright, Alliance Laundry Systems LLC - DO NOT COPY or TRANSMIT 70260301 Specifications and Dimensions 120 Pound Tumbler Dimensions and Exhaust Outlet Locations Cabinet Dimensions Models A B C D E F G H 120L/N 31.38 in. (797 mm) 32.5 in. (826 mm) 48.91 in. (1242 mm) 49.91 in. (1268 mm) 67.92 in. (1725 mm) 45.38 in. (1153 mm) 46.38 in. (1178 mm) 85.7 in. (2177 mm) 120S 31.38 in. (797 mm) 32.5 in. (826 mm) 48.91 in. (1242 mm) 49.91 in. (1268 mm) 67.92 in. (1725 mm) 45.38 in. (1153 mm) 46.38 in. (1178 mm) 83.5 in. (2121 mm) Refer to Position and Level the Tumbler to temporarily reduce the heights of these models. Exhaust Outlet Dimensions and Locations Models U V W X Y Z 120L/N 63.45 in. (1612 mm) 8.44 in. (214 mm) 7.5 in. (190 mm) 8.18 in. (208 mm) 8.75 in. (222 mm) 8.18 in. (208 mm) 120S 60.7 in. (1542 mm) 8.44 in. (214 mm) 7.5 in. (190 mm) 8.18 in. (208 mm) 8.75 in. (222 mm) 8.18 in. (208 mm) 70260301 © Copyright, Alliance Laundry Systems LLC - DO NOT COPY or TRANSMIT 11 Specifications and Dimensions 170 Pound Tumbler Dimensions and Exhaust Outlet Locations C3_ "TCT Cabinet Dimensions Models A B c D E F G H 170L/N/S 33.86 in. (860 mm) 32.5 in. (826 mm) 50.75 in. (1289 mm) 51.75 in. (1314 mm) 68.85 in. (1749 mm) 52.12 in. (1324 mm) 53.12 in. (1349 mm) 94 in. (2388 mm) Refer to Position and Level the Tumbler to temporarily reduce the heights of these models. Exhaust Outlet Dimensions and Locations Models V W X Y 170L/N/S 42.38 in. 6.75 in. 8.75 in. 7 in. 170L/N/S (1076 mm) (171 mm) (222 mm) (178 mm) 12 ) Copyright, Alliance Laundry Systems LLC - DO NOT COPY or TRANSMIT 70260301 Specifications and Dimensions Electric and Gas Connection Locations for Gas Models r C -M C3_ 120UN 170L/N Models Electrical Connection Gas Connection Models A B C D Diameter Non-CE 120L/N 27.63 in. (702 mm) 72.24 in. (1835 mm) 12.78 in. (325 mm) 70.12 in. (1781 mm) 3/4 in. NPT Non-CE 170L/N 31.12in. (790 mm) 76.11 in. (1933 mm) 14.5 in. (368 mm) 77.38 in. (1965 mm) 1 in. NPT CE 120L/N 19.69 in. (500 mm) 74.98 in. (1904 mm) 12.78 in. (325 mm) 70.12 in. (1781 mm) 3/4 in. NPT CE 170L/N 23.18 in. (589 mm) 78.85 in. (2003 mm) 14.5 in. (368 mm) 77.38 in. (1965 mm) 1 in. NPT NOTE: These figures are approximate dimensions only. 70260301 ) Copyright, Alliance Laundry Systems LLC - DO NOT COPY or TRANSMIT 13 Specifications and Dimensions Electric and Steam Connection Locations for Steam Models 120S -Al A2 •Bl E F 170S Models Steam Inlet Models Diameter Al A2 F 120S 3/4 in. NPT 35.875 in. (911 mm) 13.375 in. (340 mm) 82.75 in. (2102 mm) 170S 3/4 in. NPT 37.625 in. (956 mm) 15.25 in. (387 mm) 88 in. (2235 mm) Models Steam Outlet Models Diameter B1 B2 D 120S 3/4 in. NPT 34.625 in. (879 mm) 13.125 in. (333 mm) 68.5 in. (1740 mm) 170S 1 in. NPT 44.625 in. (1133 mm) 8.75 in. (222 mm) 71.75 in. (1822 mm) Models Electrical Connection Models C E Non-CE 120S 27.63 in. (702 mm) 72.24 in. (1835 mm) Non-CE 170S 31.12 in. (790 mm) 76.11 in. (1933 mm) CE 120S 19.69 in. (500 mm) 74.98 in. (1904 mm) CE 170S 23.18 in. (589 mm) 78.85 in. (2003 mm) 14 © Copyright, Alliance Laundry Systems LLC - DO NOT COPY or TRANSMIT 70260301 Installation Pre-lnstallation Inspection Upon deUvery, visually inspect the crate, carton and parts for any visible shipping damage. If the crate, carton or cover is damaged or signs of possible damage are evident, have the carrier note the condition on the shipping papers before the shipping receipt is signed, or advise the carrier of the condition as soon as it is discovered. Remove the crate and protective cover as soon as possible and check the items listed on the packing list. Advise the carrier of any damaged or missing articles as soon as possible. A written claim should be filed with the carrier immediately iF articles are damaged or missing. IMPORTANT: Warranty is void unless tumbler is installed according to instructions in this manual. Installation should comply with minimum specifications and requirements detailed in this manual and applicable local gas fitting regulations, municipal building codes, water supply regulations, electrical wiring regulations, and any other relevant statutory regulations. Due to varied requirements, applicable local codes should be thoroughly understood and all pre-installation work arranged for accordingly. Materials Required (Obtain locally) All Models Gas Models steam Models One disconnect switch or circuit breaker. One gas shut-off valve for gas service line to each tumbler. One steam shut-off valve for steam service line to be connected upstream of solenoid steam valve. Two steam shut-off valves for each condensate retum line. Flexible steam hoses with a 125 psig (pounds per square inch gauge) (8.79 kg/sq. cm) working pressure for connecting steam coils. Refer to Figure 17 and Figure 18 or sizing and connection configurations. Three steam traps for steam coil outlet to condensate retum line. Optional - Three vacuum breakers for condensate return lines. IMPORTANT: Keep tumbler area clear and free from combustible materials, gasoline and other flammable vapors and liquids. Location Requirements The tumbler must be installed on a level floor. Floor covering materials such as carpeting or tile must be removed. To assure compliance, consult local building code requirements. The tumbler must not be installed or stored in area where it will be exposed to water and/or weather. IMPORTANT: DO NOT block the airflow at the rear of the tumbler with laundry or other articles. Doing so would prevent adequate air supply to the combustion chamber of the tumbler. A typical tumbler enclosure is shown in Figure 1. Note the minimum and maximum dimensions. Local codes and ordinances must be complied with. WARNING To reduce the risk of serious injury, install lockable door(s) to prevent public access to rear of tumblers. IMPORTANT: Install tumblers with sufficient clearance for servicing and operation. Refer to Figure 1. 70260301 } Copyright, Alliance Laundry Systems LLC - DO NOT COPY or TRANSMIT 15 Installation WARNING To reduce the risk of severe injury, clearance of tumbler cabinet from combustible construction must conform to the minimum clearances. ^^^^^^^ TMB2020N NOTE: Shaded areas indicate adjacent structure. 1 0.5 in. (13 mm) recommended between machines for removal or installation. 2 Allow 2-4 in. (51 -102 mm) opening at top of machine to aid in removal or installation. A removable trim piece may be used to conceal the opening; zero clearance allowed for trim. 3 4 in. (102 mm) maximum header thickness 4 Minimum clearance permitted for remainder: Gas 4 in. (102 mm), Steam 12 in. (305 mm) 5 Guard 6 Provision for Make-Up Air 7 24 in. (610 mm) minimum, 36 in. (914 mm) recommended for maintenance purposes 8 0.25 in. (6 mm) recommended for removal or installation purposes, zero clearance allowed Figure 1 16 © Copyright, Alliance Laundry Systems LLC - DO NOT COPY or TRANSMIT 70260301 Installation Position and Level the Tumbler The tumbler may be moved with or without the skid. To remove the skid, unscrew the four shipping bolts, and discard them. To fit a 170 pound tumbler (with shipping skid) through an 8 foot (2.43 meters) high door, you must remove the front access panel. The upper 3 inches (76 mm) of the stove must also be removed on 170 pound gas tumblers. Removing the entire gas or steam heater assembly and the shipping skid, will reduce the height of the 120 pound tumbler to 70 inches (1778 mm), and the 170 pound tumbler to 75 inches (1905 mm). Level the tumbler to within 0.125 inch (3 mm) From Front-to-rear (level on cylinder rib), and side-to-side (level on top panel). Shim under comers to level and stabilize unit. Tumbler must not rock. Before Placing Tumbler into Service 1. Remove or open all panels and check accessible bolts, nuts, screws, terminals and fittings For tightness. 2. Check V-belt tension and adjust iF necessary. ReFer to appropriate paragraphs in Adjustments Section. 3. Replace all panels and guards. 4. Tum on electrical supply to tumbler. 5. Open supply valve For gas or steam heated tumblers. 6. After performing the previous checks, start the tumbler by pressing START (hold for approximately 3 seconds). Release the start button and open the loading door. The cylinder should stop rotating within 7 seconds after the door is opened. 7. Gas tumblers: Start the tumbler and check the bumer flame. Adjust the gas inlet shutter as required. Refer to Adjustments section. IMPORTANT: The Electronic Ignition system will attempt to light the gas by sparking for the "trial for ignition" period. If gas does not ignite within this period, the ignition control will go into a safety lockout and the valve will no longer open until the control is reset. Refer to Table I. It may be necessary to restart several times to bleed air out of gas lines. To reset, open and close loading door, then start. Location Prepurge Time (seconds) Trial for Ignition (seconds) Reset Lockout Condition By: Australia 18 5 Open loading door CE 18 10 Press reset button on control panel All others 1-3 10 Open loading door Table 1 If lockout condition persists, check that the manual gas shut-off valve is in the open position and that the gas service is properly connected. If condition still persists, remove tumbler from service. 8. Load the cylinder with a full load of clean rags and ran to remove oil or dirt from cylinder. 70260301 © Copyright, Alliance Laundry Systems LLC - DO NOT COPY or TRANSMIT 17 Installation A WARNING The tumbler must not be operated if the airflow switch does not operate properly. Faulty airflow switch operation may cause an explosive gas mixture to collect in the tumbler. 9. Check the airflow switch operation by opening the lint panel; be sure to remove shipping tape from airflow switch prior to operation. Refer to Figure 20. Temporarily tape down the lint panel safety switch located behind the upper left comer of the lint panel. The heating systems should shut off when the lint panel is opened a maximum of 6 inches (152.4 mm). The airflow switch operation may be affected by lack of make-up air or an obstraction in the exhaust duct. These should be checked; if there is a problem, contact an authorized service person. 10. Wipe out the cylinder using an all-purpose cleaner or detergent and water solution. If tumbler does not meet any of the listed requirements, remove tumbler From service. ReFer to Removing Tumbler from Service section. Required for CE Models Only Once machine is installed, please be sure to complete the Following items: • Review and veriFy machine operation with customer. • Leave all literature and a signed Declaration of Conformity with customer. • Review machine warranty information with customer. • Apply waming sticker on front panel of machine, in language appropriate to country of sale (included in literature packet). 18 © Copyright, Alliance Laundry Systems LLC - DO NOT COPY or TRANSMIT 70260301 Installation Installing CE Gas Drying Tumblers A WARNING To reduce the risk of electric shock, fire, explosion, serious injury or death: • Disconnect electric power to the tumbler before servicing. • Close gas shut-off valve to gas tumbler before servicing. • Close steam valve to steam tumbler before servicing. • Never start the tumbler with any guards/ panels removed. • Whenever ground wires are removed during servicing, these ground wires must be reconnected to ensure that the tumbler is properly grounded. General Information This information is to be used when installing gas tumblers in countries, and/or on gases, different than the machine's factory configuration. Tumblers are supplied from the factory for operation on Natural Gas 1000 Btu/cu ft. (8914 kcal/m^), or L.R Gas 2500 Btu/cu ft. (22,250 kcal/m^) in the countries of GB/IE/PT/ES/IT/GR/LU/CH. To install machines in any other country or on any other gas requires some level oF modification. Models are built in two different configurations: • Regulated Natural Gas - Injector is sized For Natural Gas, second Family, group H (E) at 20 mbar inlet pressure. Regulator/governor is operational. Gas valve CAN be field converted to a non-regulating type. • Unregulated L.P. (Liquefied Petroleum) Gas - Injector is sized For L.P. Gas, third Family, group 3+ at 28.37 mbar inlet pressure. Regulator/ govemor is blocked open. Gas valve CAN be field-converted to a regulating type. Serial plates supplied From the Factory are configured For the countries oF GB/IE/PT/ES/IT/GR/LU/CH. These instructions pertain to the situations when the country oF use or gas supply is different than that on the serial plate. Table 2 describes the different gases that are available in different CE countries, and how the machines need to be configured to operate with those gases. In the CE, there are Natural Gas configurations that do not allow for machine regulation, and L.P. Gas configurations that must be regulated. For L.P. Gas, third Family B/P at 50 mbar, order Regulated Natural Gas machines and convert according to Table 2. 70260301 © Copyright, Alliance Laundry Systems LLC - DO NOT COPY or TRANSMIT 19 Installation Gases and Configurations Country Code Gas Type Group Supply Pressure, mbar Burner Orifice Pressure, mbar Capacity/ Model Diameter, mm Quantity Burner Orifice Part No. DK/NO/ SBFI/CZ/ EE/LV/LT/ SI/SK Natural Gas E 20 8.9 8.0 120 170 4.8 4.8 3 4 M41I372 M411372 DK/NO/ SBFI/CZ/ EE/LV/LT/ SI/SK L.R Gas B/P 30 No Govemor 120 170 2.6 3.4 3 3 M411376 M400997 DE" Natural Gas E 20 8.9 8.0 120 170 4.8 4.8 3 4 M411372 M411372 DE" L.R Gas B/P 30 and No Govemor or 26.4 or 50** and No Govemor or 28.7 120 170 2.6 3.4 3 3 M411376 M400997 NL Natural Gas LL 25 12.0 120 170 4.8 4.8 3 4 M411372 M411372 NL L.R Gas B/P 30 No Govemor 120 170 2.6 3.4 3 3 M411376 M400997 BE/FR* Natural Gas E+ 20 or 25 No Govemor* 120 170 4.2 3.8 3 4 M402995 M402997 BE/FR* L.R Gas 3+ 28 or 37 No Governor 120 170 2.6 3.4 3 3 M411376 M400997 GB/IE/PT/ ES/IT/GR/ LU/CH Natural Gas E 20 8.9 8.0 120 170 4.8 4.8 3 4 M411372 M411372 GB/IE/PT/ ES/IT/GR/ LU/CH L.R Gas 3+ 28 or 37 No Govemor 120 170 2.6 3.4 3 3 M411376 M400997 AT" Natural Gas E 20 8.9 8.0 120 170 4.8 4.8 3 4 M411372 M411372 AT" L.R Gas B/P 50** 26.4 28.7 120 170 2.6 3.4 3 3 M411376 M400997 CY/IS/MT L.R Gas B/P 30 No Govemor 120 170 2.6 3.4 3 3 M411376 M400997 HU Natural Gas H 25 8.9 8.0 120 170 4.8 4.8 3 4 M411372 M411372 HU L.P. Gas B/P 30 No Govemor 120 170 2.6 3.4 3 3 M411376 M400997 PL Natural Gas H 20 8.9 8.0 120 170 4.8 4.8 3 4 M411372 M411372 PL L.P. Gas 3P 37 No Govemor 120 170 2.6 3.4 3 3 M411376 M400997 Table 2 Burner orifice information at 0-2000 feet (0-600 meters) altitude. * For Natural Gas, Group E+ applications, convert using L.P. Gas model and replace bumer orifices. ** For L.P. Gas, Group B/P with 50 mbar supply pressure, convert using Natural Gas model and appropriate bumer orifices. 20 ) Copyright, Alliance Laundry Systems LLC - DO NOT COPY or TRANSMIT 70260301 Installation Basic Configuration 1. Determine the necessary conversion operations to convert from the factory-supplied configuration to the desired configuration. 2. Perform the conversions required so the machine is properly configured for the desired country and gas (refer to Specific Conversion Procedures section): • How to Convert Gas Valve from Regulated to Unregulated NOTE: Conversion from regulated to unregulated is only needed when regulated tumblers were ordered, but unregulated tumblers were needed. • How to Change Bumer Orifice Size • How to Adjust Gas Valve Governor/Regulator 3. If applicable, peel off the appropriate country sticker (included with machine) and apply it to the serial plate over the existing country inFormation. 4. IF applicable, peel off the appropriate conversion sticker (included with machine) and apply it to the serial plate over the "ADJUSTED FOR GAS: " information. 5. Commission tumbler for use. WARNING When converting the tumbler to a different gas or pressure, first verify that the supply inlet pressure is equipped with a pressure regulator (located ahead of the tumbler) that will maintain the gas supply at the inlet pressure specified. TMB2022N Gas Shut-Off Valve (Ahead of pressure tap) Pressure Tap Figure 2 70260301 > Copyright, Alliance Laundry Systems LLC - DO NOT COPY or TRANSMIT 21 Installation Specific Conversion Procedures How to Convert Gas Valve from Regulated to Unregulated NOTE: Conversion from regulated to unregulated is only needed when regulated tumblers were ordered, but unregulated tumblers were needed. 1. B-M Gas Valve: (120 Pound Models) Refer to Table 2. a. Disconnect electrical power from tumbler. Close gas shut-off valve to tumbler. ReFer to Figure 2. b. Remove converter cover screw. Invert brass converter and install with breather hole down. Reinstall converter cover screw. Refer to Figure 4. c. Change bumer size as required by the appropriate table according to How to Change Burner Orifice Size. d. Commission tumbler For use. 2. Johnson GM2000 Gas Valve: (170 Pound Models) ReFer to Table 2. a. Disconnect electrical power From tumbler. Close gas shut-off valve to tumbler. ReFer to Figure 2. b. Loosen screws on regulator adjustment knob, then tum knob clockwise. When knob no longer tums, retighten screws. ReFer to Figure 3. c. Change bumer size as required by the appropriate table according to How to Change Burner Orifice Size. d. Commission tumbler For use. Figure 3 22 © Copyright, Alliance Laundry Systems LLC - DO NOT COPY or TRANSMIT 70260301 Installation BREATHER HOLE DOWN UNREGULATED (REGULATOR BLOCKED OPEN) 1 Converter Cover Screw 2 Bumer 3 Spud Holder 4 Gas Valve Flange Gasket 5 Gas Valve 6 Regulator Cap 7 Brass Converter Figure 4 How to Cfiange Burner Orifice Size 1. Disconnect electrical power From tumbler. Close gas shut-oFf valve to tumbler. ReFer to Figure 2. 2. Remove gas valve: a. B-M Gas Valve (120 Pound Models) - Use a 4 mm Allen wrench to remove the Four screws holding the spud holder flange to the gas valve. Remove the burner orifice(s) From the spud holder. Refer to Figure 4. b. Johnson GM2000 Gas Valve (170 Pound Models) - Use a 5 mm Allen wrench to remove the four screws holding the spud holder flange to the gas valve. Remove the bumer orifice(s) from the spud holder. Refer to Figure 4. When converting from Natural Gas to L.P. Gas, the left-most burner and orifice (viewed from front) must be removed. In place of the removed orifice, a blank orifice (Part No. M400995) and a Bumer Opening Cover (Part No. M413099) must be installed. 3. Install the new, correct orifices. Refer to Figure 6. Torque each to 9-10 Nm. 4. Reinstall spud holder assembly to gas valve, making certain orifice(s) are in line with bumer tube opening, and flange gasket is in place in flange groove. Refer to Figure 4. 5. Commission tumbler for use. NOTE: Blank burner orifices are available as Part No. M400995. 70260301 © Copyright, Alliance Laundry Systems LLC - DO NOT COPY or TRANSMIT 23 Installation Pressure Tap (Alternate location) Manometer Burner Tube Attaching Screws 4 5 6 Pressure Tap Gas Valve Flange Gas Valve Figure 5 How to Adjust Gas Valve Governor/Regulator 1. Check gas bumer orifice (manifold) pressure as follows. Refer to Figure 5. 2. Remove screw plug from inside pressure tap. 3. Connect a "U"-tube manometer (or similar pressure gauge) to the orifice (maniFold) pressure tap. 4. Start tumbler and note pressure once flame is buming. For 120 pound tumblers, remove regulator cap and adjust regulator screw until the bumer orifice pressure per applicable table is achieved. Replace regulator cap. Refer to Figure 4. For 170 pound tumblers, loosen regulator knob screws. Refer to Figure 3. Tum knob to remove regulator cap and adjust regulator screw until the bumer orifice pressure per applicable table is achieved. Replace regulator cap. 5. Commission tumbler for use. BURNER ORIFICE 1 Size Stamped on Orifice TMB2015N Figure 6 24 © Copyright, Alliance Laundry Systems LLC - DO NOT COPY or TRANSMIT 70260301 Exhaust Requirements WARNING A drying tumbler produces combustible lint. To reduce the risk of fire, the tumbler must be exhausted to the outdoors. W057 To reduce the risk of fire and accumulation of combustible gases, DO NOT exhaust tumbler air into a window well, gas vent, chimney or enclosed, unventilated area such as an attic, ceiling, crawl space under a building, or concealed space of a building. Layout Wherever possible, install tumblers along an outside wall, where duct length can be kept to a minimum and makeup air can be easily accessed. Constraction must not block the airflow at the top rear of the tumbler. Doing so would prevent adequate air supply to the tumbler combustion chamber. Make-Up Air A tumbler is forced air exhausted and requires provisions for make-up air to replace air exhausted by tumbler. Refer to Table 3. IMPORTANT: Do not obstruct flow of combustion and ventilation air. Required Make-Up Air Opening (to the outside) for Each Tumbler Models Opening 120 Pound 360 in^ (2323 cm^) free air 170 Pound 525 in^ (3710 cm^) free air Table 3 Make-up air openings with louvers will restrict air flow. The opening must be increased to compensate for area taken up by louvers. Make-up air openings in rooms containing tumbler(s) and/or gas fired hot water heater or other gravity vented appliances must be increased sufficiently to prevent downdrafts in any of the vents when all tumblers are in operation. Do not locate gravity vented appliances between tumbler(s) and make-up air openings. If it is necessary to duct make-up air to tumbler(s), increase area of duct work by 25% to compensate for any restriction in air movement. Venting WARNING To reduce the risk of fire due to increased static pressure, we do not recommend installation of in-line secondary lint filters or lint collectors. If secondary systems are mandated, frequently clean the system to assure safe operation. IMPORTANT: Installing in-line filters or lint collectors will cause increased static pressure. Failure to maintain the secondary lint system will decrease tumbler efBciency and may void machine warranty. For maximum efficiency and minimum lint accumulation, tumbler must be exhausted to the outdoors by the shortest possible route. Proper sized exhaust ducts are essential for proper operation. All elbows should be sweep type. Exhaust ducts must be assembled so the interior surfaces are smooth, so the joints do not permit the accumulation of lint. DO NOT use plastic or thin foil ducts - rigid metal ducts are recommended. Use exhaust ducts made of sheet metal or other noncombustible material. DO NOT use sheet metal screws or fasteners on exhaust pipe joints which extend into the duct and catch lint. Use duct tape or pop-rivets on all seams and joints. Verify that old ducts are thoroughly cleaned before installing new tumbler(s). 70260301 © Copyright, Alliance Laundry Systems LLC - DO NOT COPY or TRANSMIT 25 Exhaust Requirements WARNING Improperly sized or assembled ductwork causes excess back pressure which results in slow drying, lint collecting in the duct, lint blowing back into the room, and increased fire hazard. NOTE: Exhaust ducts must be constructed of sheet metal or other noncombustible material. Such ducts must be equivalent in strength and corrosion resistance to ducts made of galvanized sheet steel not less than 0.0195 inch (0.495 mm) thick. Where the exhaust duct pierces a combustible wall or ceiling, the opening must be sized per local codes. The space around the duct shall be sealed with noncombustible material. NOTE: For best performance, provide an individual exhaust duct for each tumbler. Do not install a hot water heater in a room containing tumblers. It is better to have the water heater in a separate room with a separate air inlet. Altemate Venting for 120 Pound Tumblers The 120 pound tumbler is equipped from the Factory to exhaust From the top; however, it may be converted to exhaust out the rear by doing the following (refer to Specifications and Dimensions section): 1. Remove belt guard cover. 2. Remove 10 inch (254 mm) diameter elbow and vertical duct. 3. Cut out shape from belt guard cover. ReFer to Figure 7. 4. Screw octagonal piece over 10 inch (254 mm) diameter opening in top oF belt guard. 5. Attach new exhaust duct to exhaust thimble on rear panel. Following all requirements in this section. 6. Replace belt guard cover. 1 Discard 2 Cover (Refer to step 4) Figure 7 26 ) Copyright, Alliance Laundry Systems LLC - DO NOT COPY or TRANSMIT 70260301 Individual Venting For maximum eFficiency and perFormance, it is preFerred to exhaust tumbler(s) individually to the outdoors. IMPORTANT: At no point may the cross sectional area of installed venting be less than the cross sectional area of the exhaust outlet of the tumbler. The exhaust duct must be designed so the static back pressure measured 12 inches (305 mm) From the exhaust outlet does not exceed the maximum allowable pressure specified on the installation sticker on the rear oF the tumbler. NOTE: Static back pressure must be measured with the tumbler running. The maximum allowable length oF venting oF the same diameter as the exhaust thimble is 14 Feet (4.3 meters) and two 90° elbows or equivalent. If the equivalent length of a duct required for an installation exceeds the maximum allowable equivalent length, the diameter of a round duct must be increased by 10% for each additional 20 feet (6.1 meters). Cross section area of a rectangular duct must be increased by 20% for each additional 20 feet (6.1 meters). Refer to Table 4 to determine equivalent venting: NOTE: The maximum length of a flexible metal duct must not exceed 2.4 m (7.87 ft.) as required to meet UL2158, clause 7.3.2A. Duct Diameter Equivalent Length of Rigid Straight Duct 10 in. (254 mm) 12 in. (305 mm) 14 in. (356 mm) 16 in. (406 mm) 18 in. (457 mm) One 90° elbow = 11.6 ft. (3.5 m) One 90° elbow = 14 ft. (4.3 m) One 90° elbow = 16 ft. (4.9 m) One 90° elbow = 18.7 ft. (5.7 m) One 90° elbow = 21 ft. (6.4 m) Equivalent Length (ft.) = 1.17 x Duct Diameter (in.) Table 4 Example: A 12 inch (305 mm) diameter duct's equivalent length of 14 feet (4.3 meters) of duct and two 90° elbows is: Equivalent Length: = 14 ft. (4.3 m) + (2) 90° elbows = 14 ft. (4.3 m) + 14 ft. (4.3 m) + 14 ft. (4.3 m) = 42 ft. (12.8 m) Exhaust Requirements With the tumbler in operation, airflow at any point in the duct should be at least 1200 feet per minute (366 meters per minute) to ensure that lint remains airbome. If 1200 feet per minute cannot be maintained, schedule monthly inspections and cleaning of the ductwork. Manifold Venting While it is preferable to exhaust tumblers individually to the outdoors, a main collector duct may be used if it is sized according to Figure 10 and Figure 11. This illustration indicates minimum diameters, and should be increased if collector length exceeds 20 feet (6.1 meters). Manifold duct may be rectangular in cross section, as long as area is not reduced. Provisions should be made for lint removal and cleaning of duct. Manifold duct must be tapered, as shown in Figure 8. Individual tumbler ducts must enter manifold duct at a 45° angle in the direction if airflow. NOTE: Never connect a tumbler duct at a 90° angle to a collector duct. Refer to Figure 8. Doing so will cause excessive back pressure, resulting in poor performance. Never connect two tumbler exhaust ducts directly across from each other at the point of entry to manifold duct. Figure 8 Exhaust system must be designed so static back pressure measured 12 inches (305 mm) from exhaust thimble does not exceed maximum allowable pressure specified on installation sticker on rear of tumbler. This must be measured with all tumblers ranning that are vented into collector. With the tumbler in operation, airflow at any point in the duct should be at least 1200 feet per minute (366 meters per minute) to ensure that lint remains airbome. If 1200 feet per minute cannot be maintained, schedule monthly inspections and cleaning of the ductwork. 70260301 ) Copyright, Alliance Laundry Systems LLC - DO NOT COPY or TRANSMIT 27 Exhaust Requirements TMB2103N Removable strip of panel in framing wall to permit removal of tumbler from framing wall Partition or bulkhead Minimum distance between exhaust opening and roof, ground or other obstruction: 36 in. (914 mm) 2 in. (51 mm) minimum clearance on both sides of duct Exhaust airflow - maximum length of duct: 14 ft. (4.3 m) Figure 9 NOTE: Do not install wire mesh or screen in exhaust duct opening to avoid lint build-up or impacting proper discharge of air from tumblers. NOTE: Where exhaust duct pierces a combustible wall or ceiling, the opening must be sized per local codes. NOTE: Inside of duct must be smooth. Do not use sheet metal screws to join sections. Consult your local building code for regulations which may also apply. 28 © Copyright, Alliance Laundry Systems LLC - DO NOT COPY or TRANSMIT 70260301 Exhaust Requirements ONE MANIFOLD ASSEMBLY NOTE: Where the exhaust duct pierces a combustible wall or celling, the opening MUST be sized per local codes. 2 Outlet Duct Diameter 3 45° Typical Figure 10 Duct 120 Pound 170 Pound Station 10 in. (254 mm) Duct 12 In. (305 mm) Duct A 10 in. (254 mm) 12 in. (305 mm) B 15 in. (381 mm) 17 in. (432 mm) C 18 in. (457 mm) 21 in. (533 mm) D 21 in. (533 mm) 24 in. (610 mm) E 24 in. (610 mm) 27 in. (686 mm) F 26 in. (660 mm) 30 in. (762 mm) G 28 in. (711 mm) 32 in. (813 mm) H 30 in. (762 mm) 34 in. (864 mm) 1 32 in. (813 mm) 36 in. (914 mm) J 33 in. (838 mm) 38 in. (965 mm) K 35 in. (889 mm) 40 in. (1016 mm) L 36 in. (914 mm) 42 in. (1067 mm) Table 5 70260301 ) Copyright, Alliance Laundry Systems LLC - DO NOT COPY or TRANSMIT 29 Exhaust Requirements TWO MANIFOLD ASSEMBLIES NOTE: Where the exhaust duct pierces a combustible wall or ceiling, the opening MUST be sized per local codes. 2 Outlet Duct Diameter 3 45° Typical TMB2018N Figure 11 Duct Station 120 Pound 170 Pound Duct Station 10 In. (254 mm) Duct 12 In. (305 mm) Duct A 15 in. (381 mm) 17 in. (432 mm) B 21 in. (533 mm) 24 in. (610 mm) C 26 in. (660 mm) 30 in. (762 mm) D 30 in. (762 mm) 34 in. (864 mm) E 33 in. (838 mm) 38 in. (965 mm) F 36 in. (914 mm) 42 in. (1067 mm) G 39 in. (991 mm) 45 in. (1143 mm) H 42 in. (1067 mm) 45 in. (1143 mm) 1 45 in. (1143 mm) 52 in. (1321 mm) J 47 in. (1194 mm) 54 in. (1372 mm) K 49 in. (1245 mm) 57 in. (1448 mm) L 51 in. (1295 mm) 60 in. (1524 mm) Table 6 30 ) Copyright, Alliance Laundry Systems LLC - DO NOT COPY or TRANSMIT 70260301 Gas Requirements WARNING To reduce the risk of fire or explosion, DO NOT CONNECT THE GAS LINE TO THE TUMBLER IF THE GAS SERVICE IS NOT THE SAME AS THAT SPECIFIED ON THE TUMBLER SERIAL PLATE! It will first be necessary to convert the gas burner orifice and gas valve. Appropriate conversion kits are available. IMPORTANT: Any product revisions or conversions must be made by the Manufacturer's Authorized Dealers, Distributors or local service personnel. WARNING The tumbler and its individual shut-off valve must be disconnected from the gas supply piping system during any pressure testing of that system at test pressures in excess of 0.5 psig (3.45 kPa). The tumbler must be isolated from the gas supply piping system by closing its individual manual shut-off valve during any pressure testing of the gas supply piping system at test pressure equal to or less than 0.5 psig (3.45 kPa). IMPORTANT: The installation must comply with local codes or, in the absence of local codes: • with the latest edition of the "National Fuel Gas Code," ANSI Z223.1/NFPA 54 in the U.S.A., • with CAN/CSA-B149.1 Natural Gas and Propane Installation Code in Canada, • and Australian Gas Association/Australian L.P. Gas Association requirements in Australia. Obtain specific gas service pipe size from the gas supplier. Refer to Table 7 for general pipe size. The following must be furnished and installed by the customer for the gas service line to each tumbler. Refer to Figure 12. • Sediment traps • Shut-off valves • Supply pressure taps It is important that equal pressure be maintained at all tumbler gas connections. This can be done by installing a one inch (25 mm) pipe gas loop. Refer to Figure 13. WARNiNG To reduce the risk of fire or explosion, if the tumbler is to be connected to Liquefied Petroleum (L.P.) gas, a vent to the outdoors must be provided in the room where the tumbler is installed. NATURAL GAS line pressure must be maintained at 6.5 water column inches (1.62 kPa), with no less than 5 water column inches (1.24 kPa) and no more than 10.5 water column inches (2.61 kPa), with all gas appliances ranning (tumblers, water heaters, space heaters, fumace, etc.). An in-line pressure regulator may be required if the line pressure exceeds 8 water column inches (2.0 kPa) with all gas appliances ranning. LIQUID PETROLEUM GAS (L.R) line pressure must be maintained at 11 water column inches (2.74 kPa), with no less than 10 water column inches (2.49 kPa) and no more than 13 water column inches (3.23 kPa), with all gas appliances ranning (tumblers, water heaters, space heaters, fumace, etc.). For converting Non-CE models from Natural Gas to L.R Gas: 120 Pound-M4577P3 170 Pound-M4592P3 CE GASES refers to Installing CE Gas Drying Tumblers section, the above data does not apply to the CE. 70260301 © Copyright, Alliance Laundry Systems LLC - DO NOT COPY or TRANSMIT 31 Gas Requirements 1 Gas Line to Tumbler Controls 2 Shut-Off Valve 3 Gas Supply Piping System 4 Gas "T' Fitting 5 6 in. (152 mm) Minimum Gas Pipe 6 Gas Pipe Cap 7 Sediment Trap 8 Supply Pressure Tap WARNING Check all pipe connections, internal and external, for gas leaks using a non- corrosive leak detection fluid. To reduce the risk of explosion or fire, DO NOT USE AN OPEN FLAME TO CHECK FOR GAS LEAKS! Gas connections should be checked twice a year for leakage. Figure 12 Tum on gas and check all pipe connections (intemal and extemal) for gas leaks with a non-corrosive leak detection fluid. Purge air in gas service line by operating the tumbler in the drying mode. If bumer does not light and unit goes into lockout, open and close the door and restart. Repeat these steps until burner ignites. Use pipe compound, resistant to actions of L.P. Gas, on all pipe threads. 32 © Copyright, Alliance Laundry Systems LLC - DO NOT COPY or TRANSMIT 70260301 Gas Requirements Gas Supply Pipe Sizing and Looping Gas Furnace (120,000 Btu/hr) 8 Gas Water Heaters (400,000 Btu/hr each) 9 Gas Space Heaters (70,000 Btu/hr each) 10 Sediment Traps, Supply Pressure Taps and 11 Shut-Off Valves. Refer to Figure 12. 12 1 in. (25.4 mm) Gas Pipe Loop 19 ft. (5.8 m) Minimum Pipe Size to Tumbler is 0.75 in. for 120 Pound Gas, 1 in. for 170 Pound Gas TMB2126N 25 ft. (7.6 m) Main Regulator Gas Meter Pressure Regulator (If required) 120 Pound Tumblers (300,000 Btu/hr each) 170 Pound Tumblers (395,000 Btu/hr each) SAMPLE CALCULATIONS: Equivalent length = Total length of main gas supply pipe to the far end of the tumblers. = 25 ft. + 19 ft. (7.6 m + 5.8 m) gas supply pipe = 44 ft. (13.4 m) total gas line Total Btu/hr = The sum of the Btu/hr of all 120 pound tumblers being fed by the main gas supply pipe. = 9 x 300,000 = 2,700,000 Btu/hr Using Table 7, the main supply pipe diameter should be 3 in. (76 mm). IMPORTANT: Gas loop piping must be installed as illustrated to equalize gas pressure for all tumblers connected to single gas service. Other gas using appliances should be connected upstream from loop. Figure 13 70260301 © Copyright, Alliance Laundry Systems LLC - DO NOT COPY or TRANSMIT 33 Gas Requirements Gas Pipe Size Required for 1000 Btu Natural Gas — 0.64 Specific Gravity at 7 ± 1.5 inches (17.4 ± 4 mbar, 1.74 ± 0.37 kPa) Water Column Pressure Equivalent Length 25 feet 50 feet 75 feet 100 feet 125 feet 150 feet Gas (7.63 m) (15.25 m) (22.88 m) (30.50 m) (38.13 m) (45.75 m) Appliances Appliances Total Btu/hr Based on 0.3 In. Water Column Pressure Drop for Length Given Sizes shown in inches (mm) 300,000 1 (25.40) 1.25 (31.75) 1.25 (31.75) 1.5 (38.10) 1.5 (38.10) 1.5 (38.10) 400,000 1.25 (31.75) 1.25 (31.75) 1.5 (38.10) 1.5 (38.10) 1.5 (38.10) 2 (50.80) 500,000 1.25 (31.75) 1.5 (38.10) 1.5 (38.10) 2 (50.80) 2 (50.80) 2 (50.80) 600,000 1.5(38.10) 1.5 (38.10) 2 (50.80) 2 (50.80) 2 (50.80) 2 (50.80) 700,000 1.5 (38.10) 2 (50.80) 2 (50.80) 2 (50.80) 2 (50.80) 2.5 (63.50) 800,000 1.5 (38.10) 2 (50.80) 2 (50.80) 2 (50.80) 2.5 (63.50) 2.5 (63.50) 900,000 2 (50.80) 2 (50.80) 2 (50.80) 2.5 (63.50) 2.5 (63.50) 2.5 (63.50) 1,000,000 2 (50.80) 2 (50.80) 2 (50.80) 2.5 (63.50) 2.5 (63.50) 2.5 (63.50) 1,100,000 2 (50.80) 2 (50.80) 2.5 (63.50) 2.5 (63.50) 2.5 (63.50) 2.5 (63.50) 1,200,000 2 (50.80) 2 (50.80) 2.5 (63.50) 2.5 (63.50) 2.5 (63.50) 2.5 (63.50) 1,300,000 2 (50.80) 2.5 (63.50) 2.5 (63.50) 2.5 (63.50) 2.5 (63.50) 3 (76.20) 1,400,000 2 (50.80) 2.5 (63.50) 2.5 (63.50) 2.5 (63.50) 3 (76.20) 3 (76.20) 1,500,000 2 (50.80) 2.5 (63.50) 2.5 (63.50) 2.5 (63.50) 3 (76.20) 3 (76.20) 1,600,000 2 (50.80) 2.5 (63.50) 2.5 (63.50) 3 (76.20) 3 (76.20) 3 (76.20) 1,700,000 2 (50.80) 2.5 (63.50) 2.5 (63.50) 3 (76.20) 3 (76.20) 3 (76.20) 1,800,000 2.5 (63.50) 2.5 (63.50) 3 (76.20) 3 (76.20) 3 (76.20) 3 (76.20) 1,900,000 2.5 (63.50) 2.5 (63.50) 3 (76.20) 3 (76.20) 3 (76.20) 3 (76.20) 2,000,000 2.5 (63.50) 2.5 (63.50) 3 (76.20) 3 (76.20) 3 (76.20) 3.5 (88.90) 2,200,000 2.5 (63.50) 3 (76.20) 3 (76.20) 3 (76.20) 3.5 (88.90) 3.5 (88.90) 2,400,000 2.5 (63.50) 3 (76.20) 3 (76.20) 3 (76.20) 3.5 (88.90) 3.5 (88.90) 2,600,000 2.5 (63.50) 3 (76.20) 3 (76.20) 3.5 (88.90) 3.5 (88.90) 3.5 (88.90) 2,800,000 2.5 (63.50) 3 (76.20) 3 (76.20) 3.5 (88.90) 3.5 (88.90) 3.5 (88.90) 3,000,000 2.5 (63.50) 3 (76.20) 3.5 (88.90) 3.5 (88.90) 3.5 (88.90) 4(101.60) 3,200,000 3 (76.20) 3 (76.20) 3.5 (88.90) 3.5 (88.90) 3.5 (88.90) 4(101.60) 3,400,000 3 (76.20) 3.5 (88.90) 3.5 (88.90) 3.5 (88.90) 4(101.60) 4(101.60) 3,600,000 3 (76.20) 3.5 (88.90) 3.5 (88.90) 3.5 (88.90) 4(101.60) 4(101.60) 3,800,000 3 (76.20) 3.5 (88.90) 3.5 (88.90) 4(101.60) 4(101.60) 4(101.60) 4,000,000 3 (76.20) 3.5 (88.90) 3.5 (88.90) 4(101.60) 4(101.60) 4(101.60) For L.P. Gas, correct the total Btu/hr by multiplying it by 0.6. The answer is the equivalent Btu on the above chart. The installation must conform with local codes or, in the absence of local codes: • with the latest edition of the "National Fuel Gas Code," ANSI Z223.1/NFPA 54 in the U.S.A., • with CAN/CSA-B149.1 or Natural Gas and Propane Installation Code in Canada, • and Australian Gas Association/Australian L.P. Gas Association requirements in Australia. Table 7 34 © Copyright, Alliance Laundry Systems LLC - DO NOT COPY or TRANSMIT 70260301 Gas Requirements High Altitude Orifice Sizing For proper operation at altitudes above 2000 feet (610 meters), the gas orifice size must be reduced to ensure complete combustion. Refer to Table 8. For CE models, consult local gas supplier. Non-CE Models Model Gas Altitude Orifice New Rate feet m No. Inches mm Quantity Part No. (Btu/hr)* 2001-4000 610-1220 14 0.1820 4.6 M411371 276,000 Natural 4001 - 6000 1221 - 1830 16 0.1770 4.5 M411373 252,000 Gas 6001 - 8000 1831 -2440 17 0.1730 4.4 M411374 228,000 120L/N 8001 - 10,000 2441 - 3050 19 0.1660 4.2 3 M402995 204,000 120L/N 2001 - 4000 610-1220 35 0.1100 2.8 3 M402487 276,000 L.R 4001 - 6000 1221 - 1830 36 0.1065 2.7 M411375 252,000 Gas 6001 -8000 1831 -2440 38 0.1015 2.6 M411376 228,000 8001 - 10,000 2441 -3050 40 0.0980 2.5 M406361 204,000 2001 -4000 610-1220 14 0.1820 4.6 M411371 363,400 Natural 4001 -6000 1221 - 1830 16 0.1770 4.5 4 M411373 331,800 170L/N Gas 6001 - 8000 1831 -2440 17 0.1730 4.4 4 M411374 300,200 170L/N 8001 - 10,000 2441 - 3050 19 0.1660 4.2 M402995 268,600 L.R 2001 - 6000 610-1830 30 0.1285 3.3 3 M401021 363,400 Gas 6001 - 10,000 1831 -3050 31 0.1200 3.0 3 M401017 300,200 *Btu/hr derate of 4% per 1000 ft. (305 m) of altitude. Table 8 70260301 © Copyright, Alliance Laundry Systems LLC - DO NOT COPY or TRANSMIT 35 Electrical Requirements WARNING To reduce the risk of electric shock, fire, explosion, serious injury or death: • Disconnect electric power to the tumbler before servicing. • Close gas shut-off valve to gas tumbler before servicing. • Close steam valve to steam tumbler before servicing. • Never start the tumbler with any guards/ panels removed. • Whenever ground wires are removed during servicing, these ground wires must be reconnected to ensure that the tumbler is properly grounded. W002 To reduce the risk of fire and electric shock, check with a qualified serviceman for proper grounding procedures. Improper connection of the equipment grounding conductor may result in a risk of electric shock. woes To reduce the risk of fire and electric shock, if electrical supply is coming from a three phase service, DO NOT connect a "High Leg" or "Stinger Leg" to a single phase machine. On a three phase machine, if there is a "High Leg" or "Stinger Leg" it should be connected to L3. NOTE: To ensure protection against shock, this tumbler MUST be electrically grounded in accordance with the local codes or, in the absence of local codes, vnth the latest edition of the National Electrical Code ANSI/NFPA No. 70. In Canada the electrical connections are to be made in accordance with CSA C22.1 latest edition Canadian Electrical Code, Part I and/or local codes. Electrical work should be done by a qualified electrician. Grounding Instructions This tumbler must be grounded. In the event of malfunction or breakdovra, grounding will reduce the risk of electric shock by providing a path of least resistance for electric current. This tumbler must be connected to a grounded metal, permanent wiring system; or an equipment grounding conductor must be ran with the circuit conductors and connected to the appropriate ground location. Metal conduit and/or BX cable is not considered ground. Connecting the Neutral from the electrical service box to the tumbler ground screw does not constitute a ground. A dedicated ground conduit (wire) must be connected between the electrical service box ground bar and the tumbler ground screw. A WARNING All electrical connections should be made by a qualified electrician. To reduce the risk of electrical shock, de- energize the electrical circuit being connected to the tumbler before making any electrical connections. Never attempt to connect a live circuit A CAUTION Label all wires prior to disconnection when servicing controls. Wiring errors can cause improper and dangerous operation. Verify proper operation after servicing. For CE Models Only All models are factory-equipped with an emergency stop button on the front panel. NOTE: Activation of the emergency stop switch stops all machine control circuit functions, but DOES NOT remove all electrical power from machine. 36 ) Copyright, Alliance Uundry Systems LLC - DO NOT COPY or TRANSMIT 70260301 Service/Ground Location Electrical Requirements Model Heat Source Ground and Terminal Block Locations Non-CE Gas or Steam Terminal Block Ground Screw CE Gas or Steam Power Disconnect Ground Screw Figure 14 70260301 © Copyright, Alliance Laundry Systems LLC - DO NOT COPY or TRANSMIT 37 Electrical Requirements To Connect Electrical Service to the Tumbler NOTE: The wiring diagram is located in the junction or contactor box. 1. Install a circuit breaker as close to the tumbler as possible. If more than one tumbler is being installed, a disconnect switch or circuit breaker should be provided for each. This will make it possible to disconnect each tumbler for maintenance purposes. 2. Connect conduit-encased leads to the disconnect switch or circuit breaker. Connect wire leads to the appropriate labeled terminal on the terminal block. The ground wire must be connected to the ground connection as shown in Figure 15. 3. Check the electrical service phase sequence (three phase only). If one of the power leads is a "high leg," connect it to lead L3 in the tumbler. The cylinder must rotate clockwise and the fan must rotate counterclockwise (as viewed from the front of the tumbler - with selector switch in non-reverse position). If not, interchange leads Ll and L2 in the tumbler connection box. NON-CE MODE 1 2 3 4 CE MODELS Contactor Box or Junction Box Electrical Service Fuses Ground Screw TMB1275N Figure 15 38 ) Copyright, Alliance Laundry Systems LLC - DO NOT COPY or TRANSMIT 70260301 Electrical Requirements Jumper Configuration Instructions To install: Changing the transformer configuration jumper is required, PRIOR TO SUPPLYING POWER TO THE MACHINE, if any of the following apply: IMPORTANT: Failure to install the proper configuration jumper may result in damage to sensitive electronic controls and may void warranty. • You have 200 - 208 Volt service and are connecting a model rated for 240 Volt operation. Replace the 240 Volt jumper with the 208 Volt jumper per the conversion label, located on the rear of the tumbler, sign and date conversion label to document the conversion. • You have 400 - 415 Volt service and are connecting a model rated for 380 Volt operation. NOTE: CE electro-mechanical timer models (MT, RT and CD control suffixes) do NOT require conversion jumper. Replace the 380 Volt jumper with the 415 Volt jumper per the conversion label, located on the rear of the tumbler, sign and date conversion label to document the conversion. Ferrite Ring Installation OPL Micro Control Models Only The ferrite ring provided in the literature packet must be installed over the power leads during connection of electrical service. The ferrite protects the sensitive electronic controls from destractive electrical disturbances which may be present on power lines to the machine. Failure to properly install the ferrite ring may result in damage to the electronic controls and will void control warranty. 1. Immediately after connection of power leads and before applying power to machine, locate each of the incoming service leads including ground. 2. Snap the ferrite ring closed over all the service leads inside of the contactor box as shown. It is important that the ferrite ring be installed inside the contactor box. Refer to Figure 16. Do not install the ferrite outside of the box or other area. Make sure that service leads are in the center of the ferrite before closing the ring so not to pinch or damage leads. Contactor Box Ferrite Ring Jumper Figure 16 70260301 © Copyright, Alliance Laundry Systems LLC - DO NOT COPY or TRANSMIT 39 Electrical Requirements Electrical Requirements Refer to Table 9. NOTE: Minimum wire sizes are obtained from Canadian Electrical Code and are intended for use as a guideline only. Electrical connections should be made only by a qualified electrical contractor in accordance with all applicable local and national requirements. NOTE: Electrical specifications below are subject to change without notice. Always refer to product For 120 Pound Tumbler Models serial plate for most current specifications of product being installed. NOTE: Use copper conductors only. NOTE: 3 Phase Only- Each tumbler must be connected to its own individual branch circuit breaker, not fuses, to avoid the possibility of "single phasing" and causing premature failure of the motor(s). Serial Plate Rating Terminal Block Connections Required Rated Current* Breaker Rating Breaker Poles Recommended Wire Size 208-230V/60Hz/3ph Ll, L2, L3 and ground 7.7 15 Amps 3 14 AWG (2.08 mm^) 380-415V/50Hz/3ph Ll, L2, L3 and ground 3.8 10 Amps 3 14 AWG (2.08 mm^) 380V/60Hz/3ph Ll, L2, L3 and ground 4.1 10 Amps 3 14 AWG (2.08 mm^) 440V/60Hz/3ph Ll, L2, L3 and ground 3.8 10 Amps 3 14 AWG (2.08 mm^) 460-480V/60Hz/3ph Ll, L2, L3 and ground 3.9 10 Amps 3 14 AWG (2.08 mm^) * Current ratings vary slightly depending on model; refer to serial plate. For 170 Pound Tumbler Models Serial Plate Rating Terminal Block Connections Required Rated Current* Breaker Rating Breaker Poles Recommended Wire Size 208-230V/60Hz/3ph Ll, L2, L3 and ground 13.5 20 Amps 3 12 AWG (3.31 mm^) 380-415V/50Hz/3ph Ll, L2, L3 and ground 6.9 15 Amps 3 14 AWG (2.08 mm^) 380V/60Hz/3ph Ll, L2, L3 and ground 6.6 15 Amps 3 14 AWG (2.08 mm^) 440V/60Hz/3ph Ll, L2, L3 and ground 6.4 15 Amps 3 14 AWG (2.08 mm^) 460-480V/60Hz/3ph Ll, L2, L3 and ground 6.7 15 Amps 3 14 AWG (2.08 mm^) * Current ratings vary slightly depending on model; refer to serial plate. Table 9 40 ) Copyright, Alliance Laundry Systems LLC - DO NOT COPY or TRANSMIT 70260301 steam Requirements NOTE: Machines require a constant 80 to 100 psig (5.62 to 7.03 kg/sq cm) steam service for optimum operation. The maximum allowable steam pressure for use with 60 Hertz or 50 Hertz tumblers is 125 psig (8.6 bar). In no case may the pressure exceed the above value. Obtain specific steam service pipe sizes from steam system supplier or a qualified steam fitter. • Refer to Figure 17 and Figure 18 for proper steam pipe configurations. • To prevent condensate draining from headers to tumbler, piping should have a minimum 12 inch (305 mm) rise above respective header. Do not make steam connection to header with a horizontal or downward facing tee or elbow. • Whenever possible, horizontal rans of steam lines must drain, by gravity, to respective steam header. Water pockets or an improperly drained steam header will provide wet steam, causing improper operation of tumbler. If pockets or improper drainage cannot be eliminated, install a bypass trap to drain condensate from the low point in the steam header to the retum. • In both steam supply and steam retum line, it is recommended that each have a pipe union and shut-off valve. This will enable you to disconnect the steam connections and service the tumbler while your laundry facility is in operation. • Connect the steam solenoid valve to the related steam coil inlet connection with nipples, flex hoses, unions and tee. • Strainers may require cleaning due to materials from hoses or pipes. • Install vacuum breaker (optional), bucket trap with built-in strainer and check valve. For successful operation of tumbler, install trap 18 inches (457 mm) below coil and as near to the tumbler as possible. Inspect trap carefully for inlet and outlet markings and install according to trap manufacturer's instractions. If steam is gravity returned to boiler, omit trap but install vacuum breaker and check valve in retum line near tumbler. • Gravity retum requires entire return plumbing be below steam coil outlets. • Install union and shut-off valve in retum line and make final pipe connections to retum header. NOTE: To prevent water hammering, route retum lines below outlets of steam coils. Piping Recommendations • Trap each steam coil individually. Always keep the trap clean and in good working condition. • When tumbler is on the end of a line of equipment, extend header at least 4 feet (1.2) beyond tumbler. Install shut-off valve, union, check valve and bypass trap at end of line. If gravity retum to boiler, omit trap. • Insulate steam supply and retum line for safety of operator and safety while servicing tumbler. • Keep tumbler in good working condition. Repair or replace any wom or defective parts. WARNING All system components must have a 125 psig (8.6 bar) working pressure. Shut-off valves must be installed upstream of the steam solenoid valve and downstream of each steam trap so components can be isolated for maintenance or emergency purposes. All components (solenoid valve, traps) must be supported to minimize loads on the tumbler steam coil connections. 70260301 ) Copyright, Alliance Laundry Systems LLC - DO NOT COPY or TRANSMIT 41 steam Requirements Installing Steam Trap and Making Condensate Return Connections The steam trap must be installed and the coil outlet connections must be connected to the condensate retum lines. The following steps outiine the procedure for installing the steam trap and connecting the condensate retum lines. Refer to Figure 17 and Figure 18 for typical installations. 1. Use flexible lines between steam inlet solenoid and steam coils, as well as outlet between steam coil and traps. 2. If necessary, install a strainer to the end of each flexible hose. 3. Install a steam trap to each strainer. IMPORTANT: Steam trap must be installed a minimum of 18 inches (457 mm) below the steam coil outlet connections. 4. Install a shut-ofF valve to each steam trap. 5. Connect to the condensate retum lines. 6. For steam solenoid valve wiring connections, refer to Wiring Diagram supplied with tumbler. Thermal Oil Prep It is the responsibility of the customer to install appropriate coil and heating system for thermal oil prep models. Alliance Laundry Systems, LLC. is not responsible for the performance or safety of the customer installed thermal oil system. To ensure proper operation, refer to the Specifications and Dimensions section for the BTU input of equivalent steam models. Thermal oil systems that do not deliver appropriate BTUs will dry slower. For solenoid valve wiring connections, refer to the Wiring Diagram supplied with tumbler. WARNING All system components must have a 125 psig (8.6 bar) working pressure. Shut-off valves must be installed upstream of the steam solenoid valve and downstream of each steam trap so components can be isolated for maintenance or emergency purposes. All components (solenoid valve, traps) must be supported to minimize loads on the tumbler steam coil connections. 42 © Copyright, Alliance Laundry Systems LLC - DO NOT COPY or TRANSMIT 70260301 Steam Requirements 120 Pound Tumblers TMB2014N NOTE: Refer to Table 10 for sizing of steam lines. Piping must also be sized accordingly for length of runs and number of elbows. 1 Supply 2 12 in. (305 mm) Riser 3 Shut-Off Valve 4 Condensate Return Line from Supply Line 5 Return 6 Check Valve 7 Vacuum Breaker (Optional) 8 18 in. (457 mm) Drop 9 Solenoid Valve (Supplied with machine) 10 Steam Bonnet 11 Flexible Line 12 Union 13 Trap with Built-in Strainer Figure 17 Model Steam Pressure PSI (bar) Minimum Pipe Diameter Steam Trap Size * (Pounds Condensate/Hour) 120S 120-125 (8.3-8.6) 1 in. NPT 345 120S 60-120 (4.1-8.3) 1 in. NPT 345 120S 35-60 (2.4-4.1) 1-1/4 in. NPT 345 *Based on maximum psi. Table 10 70260301 ) Copyright, Alliance Laundry Systems LLC - DO NOT COPY or TRANSMIT 43 Steam Requirements 170 Pound Tumblers SUPPLY RETURN NOTE: Refer to Table 11 for sizing of steam lines. Piping must also be sized accordingly for length of runs and number of elbows. 1 Risers 12 in. (305 mm) 2 Shut-Off Valve 3 Check Valve 4 Vacuum Breaker (optional) 5 Condensate Return Line from Supply Line 6 18 in. Drop (457 mm) 7 Steam Bonnet 8 Solenoid Valve (Supplied with machine) 9 Union 10 Trap with Built-in Strainer Figure 18 Model Steam Pressure PSI (bar) Minimum Pipe Diameter Steam Trap Size * (Pounds Condensate/Hour) 170S 110-125 (7.5-8.6) 1 in. NPT 517 170S 60-110(4.1-7.5) 1-1/4 in. NPT 517 170S 35-60 (2.4-4.1) 1-1/2 in. NPT 517 * Based on maximum psi. Table 11 44 ) Copyright, Alliance Laundry Systems LLC - DO NOT COPY or TRANSMIT 70260301 Adjustments A WARNING To reduce the risk of electric shock, fire, explosion, serious injury or death: • Disconnect electric power to the tumbler before servicing. • Close gas shut-off valve to gas tumbler before servicing. • Close steam valve to steam tumbler before servicing. • Never start the tumbler with any guards/ panels removed. • Whenever ground wires are removed during servicing, these ground wires must be reconnected to ensure that the tumbler is properly grounded. Gas Burner Air Shutter NOTE: Air inlet shutters on the burner must be adjusted so sufficient air is metered into the system for proper combustion and maximum efficiency. Before adjusting the inlet shutters, be sure that all lint is removed from lint compartments and lint screen. Air shutter adjustment will vary from location to location and will depend on the vent system, number of units installed, make-up air and line gas pressure. Opening the shutter increases the amount of primary air supplied to the burner, while closing the shutter decreases the primary air supply. Adjust air shutter as follows: Refer to Figure 19. 1. Remove the upper access panel. 2. Start the tumbler and check the flame pattern. If the flame pattern is straight up, insufficient air is flowing through the tumbler and airflow switch is improperly set. A flame pattern that flares to the right and left indicates no air is flowing through the tumbler. Correct air and gas mixture is indicated if the flame pattem is primarily blue, with small yellow tips, and bends lo the left of the heater section. Too little air is indicated if the flame is yellow, lazy and smoky. 3. To adjust the air shutter, loosen air inlet shutter adjusting screw. 4. Open or close air shutter as necessary to obtain proper flame intensity. 5. After air shutter is adjusted for proper flame, tighten air shutter adjusting screw securely. PROPER AIRFLOW INSUFFICIENT AIRFLOW NO AIRFLOW 1 k J ^ V A A A 1 lin k. 1 Air Shutter Adjusting Screw Figure 19 70260301 © Copyright, Alliance Laundry Systems LLC - DO NOT COPY or TRANSMIT 45 Adjustments Airflow Switch The airflow switch is set at the factory for proper operation. No adjustment necessary. Refer to Figure 20. IMPORTANT: The airflow switch vane must remain closed during operation for the heating system to run. If the air flow switch vane opens and closes during the drying cycle, this indicates insufficient air flow through thc tumbler. Any time the switch is open during the cycle, the heating system will shut off. If the switch opens and closes during the cycle, the heating system will tum off and on as the switch opens and closes (respectively). In the either case, the cylinder and fan will continue to operate normally throughout the cycle. To adjust, open door, loosen jam nut and tum door strike screw in or out as required. Retighten jam nut. Airflow Switch 1 2 3 Door Strike Door Latch Jam Nut Figure 21 Loading Door Switch Loading door switch is factory set; no field adjustment necessary. Figure 20 Loading Door Strike The loading door strike must be adjusted to have sufficient tension to hold loading door closed against force of load tumbling against it. Proper adjustment is when 8-15 pounds (35.6-66.7 N) pull is required to open door. If adjustment is required, refer to Figure 21 and proceed as follows: 46 ) Copyright, Alliance Laundry Systems LLC - DO NOT COPY or TRANSMIT 70260301 Belt Drive The drive assemblies consist of motors, belts, eyebolts and a step pulley. The pulley diameters are sized to produce a cylinder speed of 37-39 RPM for 120 pound models or 29-31 RPM for 170 pound models. The step pulley assembly is used for speed reduction as well as a means of adjusting belt tension. The pulley mounting plate is attached to the cabinet. The frame mounting plate has vertically slotted holes allowing up and down movement of the step pulley mounting plate for belt adjustment. Adjust the belt tension as follows: 1. Disconnect electrical power to the tumbler before attempting any adjustments to the drive assembly. 2. Loosen pulley mounting plate bolts. 3. Loosen the upper nut on the final drive eyebolt. 4. Rotate the lower nut of the final drive eyebolt clockwise until proper belt tension is achieved. Adjustments 5. Rotate upper nut clockwise against the lower nut in order to lock it into place. 6. Tighten pulley mounting plate bolts. Recheck belt tension. 7. If necessary, adjust the drive motor belt tension eyebolt using a similar procedure. 8. Adjust blower belt tension on 120 pound 50 Hertz tumblers and all 170 pound tumblers using a similar procedure. NOTE: Proper tensions for new belts are 45-55 pounds for the motor belt, 55-65 pounds for the final drive, 60-65 pounds for 120 pound blower, and 75-80 pounds for 170 pound blower measured with a Borroughs Belt Tension Gauge. Using a Browning Belt Tension Gauge, the motor belt deflection should be 0.31 inch at five pounds pressure, and final drive belt deflection should be 0.25 inch at flve pounds pressure. Belts should not slip or make any noise when starting up under normal load. 70260301 © Copyright, Alliance Laundry Systems LLC - DO NOT COPY or TRANSMIT 47 Removing Tumbler from Service If the tumbler is to be removed From service, perForm the Following steps where applicable: • Tum oft" electrical supply extemal to machine. • Tum off electrical disconnect on machine. • Tum off gas supply extemal to machine. • Tum ofl" manual gas shut-oFf valve on the machine. • Tum off steam supply extemal to machine. • Remove all electric, gas and steam connections. 48 © Copyright, Alliance Laundry Systems LLC - DO NOT COPY or TRANSMIT 70260301 Washer-ExtractQ©' "'^ Pocket Hardmrf!t!;lf^,° UniLinc 150 Model UniLinc and M30 Control Refer to Page 8 for Model Numbers PHM798N UniLinc 35-125 Models PHM802N M30 35-125 Models Keep These Instructions for Future Reference. (IFthis machine changes ownership, this manual must accompany machine.) 9 0 Laundry Systems www.comlaundry.com Part No. F8138601R11 June 2011 M 0 Table of Contents Safety Information 2 Explanation of Safety Messages 2 Important Safety Instractions 2 Safety Decals 4 Operator Safety 5 Safe Operating Environment 6 Environmental Conditions 6 Machine Location 6 Input and Output Services 7 AC Inverter Drive 7 Introduction 8 Model Identification 8 Delivery Inspection 9 Name plate Location 9 Nameplate Location - UniLinc Models 9 Replacement Parts 9 Customer Service 9 Specifications and Dimensions 11 Machine Dimensions 15 UWTV Models Through 3/31 /09 15 UW Design 1 and Design 2 Models Starting 4/1/09 Through 10/3/10 18 UW Design 3 Models starting 10/4/10 21 Machine Foundation Requirements 24 Concrete Foundation Pad Installation 25 Floor Load Data 27 Mounting Bolt Installation Requirements 30 Machine Mounting and Grouting 31 Mounting Bolt Hole Locations 32 Grout Placement 37 Gap Setting for Vibration Switch 38 Drain Connection Requirements 42 Water Connection 44 Electrical Installation Requirements 46 Steam Requirements- (Steam Heat Option Only) 51 Chemical Injection Supply System 52 External Supplies 55 Chemical Injection Using Internal 24VAC Control Transformer... 56 Chemical injection Using External AC Power Source 57 Extemal Supply Signals 58 © Copyright 2011, Alliance Laundry Systems LLC All rights reserved. No part of the contents of this book may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without the expressed written consent of the publisher. F8138601 ) Copyright, Alliance Laundry Systems LLC - DO NOT COPY or TRANSMIT Safety Information Explanation of Safety Messages Precautionary statements ("DANGER," "WARNING" and "CAUTION"), Followed by specific instructions, are Found in this manual and on machine decals. These precautions are intended For the personal saFety oF the operator, user, servicer, and those maintaining the machine. DANGER DANGER indicates the presence ofa hazard that will cause severe personal injury, death, or substantial property damage ifthe danger is ignored. WARNING WARNING indicates the presence ofa hazard that can cause severe personal injury, death, or substantial property damage ifthe warning is ignored. CAUTION CAUTION indicates the presence of a hazard that will or can cause minor personal injury or property damage if the caution is ignored. Additional precautionary statements ("IMPORTANT" and "NOTE") are Followed by specific instructions. IMPORTANT: The word "IMPORTANT" is used to inform the reader of specific procedures where minor machine damage will occur if the procedure is not followed. NOTE: The word "NOTE" is used to communicate installation, operation, maintenance or servicing information that is important but not hazard related. Important Safety Instructions WARNING To reduce the risk of fire, electric shock, serious injury or death to persons when using your washer, follow these basic precautions: 1. Read all instructions before using the washer. 2. Refer to the GROUNDfNG INSTRUCTIONS in the INSTALLATION manual for the proper grounding of the washer. 3. Do not wash textiles that have been previously cleaned in, washed in, soaked in, or spotted with gasoline, kerosene, waxes, cooking oils, dry- cleaning solvents, or other flammable or explosive substances as they give off vapors that could ignite or explode. 4. Do not add gasoline, dry-cleaning solvents, or other flammable or explosive substances to the wash water. These substances give oFFvapors that could ignite or explode. 5. Under certain conditions, hydrogen gas may be produced in a hot water system that has not been used For two weeks or more. HYDROGEN GAS IS EXPLOSIVE. IF the hot water system has not been used For such a period, beFore using a washing machine or combination washer-dryer, turn on all hot water Faucets and let the water flow From each For several minutes. This will release any accumulated hydrogen gas. The gas is flammable, do not smoke or use an open flame during this time. 6. Do not allow children to play on or in the washer. Close supervision oFchildren is necessary when the washer is used near children. This is a saFety rule For all appliances. 7. BeFore the washer is removed fi'om service or discarded, remove the door to the washing compartment. 8. Do not reach into the washer iF the wash drum is moving. 9. Do not install or store the washer where it will be exposed to water and/or weather. 10. Do not tamper with the controls. ) Copyright, Alliance Laundry Systems LLC - DO NOT COPY or TRANSMIT F8138601 Safety Information 11. Do not repair or replace any part of the washer, or attempt any servicing unless specifically recommended in the user-maintenance instructions or in published user-repair instructions that the user understands and has the skills to carry out. 12. To reduce the risk of an electric shock or fire, DO NOT use an extension cord or an adapter to connect the washer to the electrical power source. 13. Use washer only for its intended purpose, washing textiles. 14. Never wash machine parts or automotive parts in the machine. This could result in serious damage to the basket. 15. ALWAYS disconnect the washer from electrical supply before attempting any service. Disconnect the power cord by grasping the plug, not the cord. 16. Install the washer according to the INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS. All connections for water, drain, electrical power and grounding must comply with local codes and be made by licensed personnel when required. 17. To reduce the risk of fire, textiles which have traces of any flammable substances such as vegetable oil, cooking oil, machine oil, flammable chemicals, thinner, etc., or anything containing wax or chemicals such as in mops and cleaning cloths, must not be put into the washer. These flammable substances may cause the Fabric to catch on fire by itselF. 18. Do not use Fabric softeners or products to eliminate static unless recommended by the manuFacturer of the Fabric softener or product. 19. Keep washer in good condition. Bumping or dropping the washer can damage saFety Features. IF this occurs, have washer checked by a qualified service person. 20. IF the supply cord is damaged, it must be replaced by a special cord or assembly available From the manuFacturer or its service agent. 21. Be sure water connections have a shut-oFF valve and that fill hose connections are tight. CLOSE the shut-off" valves at the end oF each wash day. 22. Loading door MUST BE CLOSED any time the washer is to fill, tumble or spin. DO NOT bypass the loading door switch by permitting the washer to operate with the loading door open. 23. Always read and Follow manuFacturer's instructions on packages oF laundry and cleaning aids. Heed all wamings or precautions. To reduce the risk oF poisoning or chemical bums, keep them out oF the reach oF children at all times (preFerably in a locked cabinet). 24. Always follow the fabric care instructions supplied by the textile manufacturer. 25. Never operate the washer with any guards and/or panels removed. 26. DO NOT operate the washer with missing or broken parts. 27. DO NOT bypass any safety devices. 28. Failure to install, maintain, and/or operate this washer according to the manuFacturer's instractions may result in conditions which can produce bodily injury and/or property damage. 29. Do not attempt to open the door until the washer has drained and all moving parts have stopped. 30. Do not climb onto or into the machine. 31. Be aware that hazardous chemicals may be present. 32. Be aware that hot water is used to flush the supply dispenser. 33. Wear hand and eye protection when adding detergents and chemicals. 34. Avoid opening the dispenser lid while the machine is running. 35. Do not attach anything to the supply dispenser's nozzles. The air gap must be maintained. 36. Use only low-sudsing, no-Foaming types oF commercial detergent. 37. Do not operate the machine without the water reuse plug or water reuse system in place. NOTE: The WARNINGS and IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS appearing in this manual are not meant to cover all possible conditions and situations that may occur. Common sense, caution and care must be exercised when installing, maintaining, or operating the washer. Any problems or conditions not understood should be reported to the dealer, distributor, service agent or the manuFacturer. F8138601 > Copyright, Alliance Laundry Systems LLC - DO NOT COPY orTF?ANSMIT Safety Information WARNING This machine must be installed, adjusted, and serviced by qualified electrical maintenance personnel familiar with the construction and operation of this type of machinery. They must also be familiar with the potential hazards involved. Failure to observe this warning may result in personal injury and/or equipment damage, and may void the warranty. IMPORTANT: Ensure that the recommended clearances for inspection and maintenance are provided. Never allow the inspection and maintenance space to be blocked. WARNING Install the machine on a level floor of sufficient strength. Failure to do so may result in conditions which can produce serious injury, death and/or property damage. CAUTION Be careful around the open door, particularly when loading from a level below the door. Impact with door edges can cause personal injury. WARNING Never touch internal or external steam pipes, connections, or components. These surfaces can be extremely hot and will cause severe burns. The steam must be turned off and the pipe, connections, and components allowed to cool before the pipe can be touched. Safety Decals Safety decals appear at crucial locations on the machine. Failure to maintain legible saFety decals could result in injury to the operator or service technician. To provide personal saFety and keep the machine in proper working order. Follow all maintenance and saFety procedures presented in this manual. IF questions regarding saFety arise, contact the manuFacturer immediately. Use manuFacturer-authorized spare parts to avoid saFety hazards. © Copyright, Alliance Laundry Systems LLC - DO NOT COPY or TRANSMIT F8138601 Safety Information Operator Safety Do not bypass any safety devices in the machine. A WARNING NEVER insert hands or objects into basket until it has completely stopped. Doing so could result in serious injury. To ensure the saFety oF machine operators, the Following maintenance checks must be perFormed daily: 1. Prior to operating the machine, verify that all waming signs are present and legible. Missing or illegible signs must be replaced immediately. Make certain that spares are available. 2. Check door interlock beFore starting operation oF the machine: a. Attempt to start the machine with the door open. The machine should not start with the door open. b. Close the door without locking it and attempt to start the machine. The machine should not start with the door unlocked. c. Close and lock the door and start a cycle. Attempt to open the door while the cycle is in progress. The door should not open. IF the door lock and interlock are not Functioning properly, call a service technician. 3. Do not attempt to operate the machine iF any oF the Following conditions are present: a. The door does not remain securely locked during the entire cycle. b. Excessively high water level is evident. c. Machine is not connected to a properly grounded circuit. A WARNING Never operate the machine with a bypassed or disconnected balance system. Operating the machine with severe out-of-balance loads could result in personal injury and serious equipment damage. F8138601 © Copyright, Alliance Laundry Systems LLC - DO NOT COPY or TRANSMIT Safety Information Safe Operating Environment Safe operation requires an appropriate operating environment for both the operator and the machine. If questions regarding safety arise, contact the manufacturer immediately. Environmental Conditions • Ambient Temperature. Water in the machine will freeze at temperatures of 32°F (0°C) or below. Temperatures above 104°F (40°C) will result in more Frequent motor overheating and, in some cases, malFunction or premature damage to solid state devices that are used in some models. Special cooling devices may be necessary. Water pressure switches are affected by increases and decreases in temperature. Every 25°F (10°C) change in temperature will have a 1 % eFFect on the water level. • Humidity. Relative humidity above 90% may cause the machine's electronics or motors to malFunction or may trip the ground Fault interrupter. Corrosion problems may occur on some metal components in the machine. IF the relative humidity is below 30%, belts and rubber hoses may eventually develop dry rot. This condition can result in hose leaks, which may cause saFety hazards external to the machine in conjunction with adjacent electrical equipment. • Ventilation. The need For make-up air openings For such laundry room accessories as dryers, ironers, water heaters, etc., must be evaluated periodically. Louvers, screens, or other separating devices may reduce the available air opening significantly. • Radio Frequency Emissions. A filter is available For machines in installations where floor space is shared with equipment sensitive to radio Frequency emissions. • Elevation. IF the machine is to be operated at elevations oF over 3280 Feet (1000 m) above sea level, pay special attention to water levels and electronic settings (particularly temperature) or desired results may not be achieved. • Chemicals. Keep stainless steel surFaces Free oF chemical residues. DANGER Do not place volatile or flammable fluids in any machine. Do not clean the machine with volatile or flammable fluids such as acetone, lacquer thinners, enamel reducers, carbon tetrachloride, gasoline, benzene, naptha, etc. Doing so could result in serious personal injury and/or damage to the machine. • Water Damage. Do not spray the machine with water. Short circuiting and serious damage may result. Repair immediately all seepage due to worn or damaged gaskets, etc. Machine Location • Foundation. The concrete floor must be oF sufficient strength and thickness to handle the floor loads generated by the high extract speeds oFthe machine. • Service/Maintenance Space. Provide sufficient space to allow comFortable perFormance oF service procedures and routine preventive maintenance. Consult installation instructions For specific details. CAUTION Replace all panels that are removed to perform service and maintenance procedures. Do not operate the machine with missing guards or with broken or missing parts. Do not bypass any safety devices. © Copyright, Alliance Laundry Systems LLC - DO NOT COPY or TRANSMIT F8138601 Safety Information Input and Output Services • Water Pressure. Best performance will be realized if water is provided at a pressure of 30 - 85 psi (2.0 - 5.7 bar). Although the machine will function properly at lower pressure, increased fill times will occur. Water pressure higher than 100 psi (6.7 bar) may result in damage to machine plumbing. Component failure(s) and personal injury could result. • Steam Heat (Optional) Pressure. Best performance will be realized if steam is provided at a pressure of 30 - 80 psi (2.0 - 5.4 bar). Steam pressure higher than 125 psi (8.5 bar) may result in damage to steam components and may cause personal injury. For machines equipped with optional steam heat, install piping in accordance with approved commercial steam practices. Failure to install the supplied steam filter may void the warranty. • Drainage System. Provide drain lines or troughs large enough to accommodate the total number of gallons that could be released if all machines on the site drained at the same time from the highest attainable level. If troughs are used, they should be covered to support light foot traffic. • Power. For personal safety and for proper operation, the machine must be grounded in accordance with state and local codes. The ground connection must be to a proven earth ground, not to conduit or water pipes. Do not use fuses. An easy-access cutoff switch should also be provided. AC Inverter Drive Machines equipped with the AC inverter drive require special attention with regard to the operating environment. • An especially dusty or linty environment will require more frequent cleaning of the AC inverter drive cooling fan filter and of the AC inverter drive itselF • Power line fluctuations from sources such as uninterraptible power supplies (UPS) can adversely affect machines equipped with the AC inverter drive. Proper suppression devices should be utilized on the incoming power to the machine to avoid problems. • A clean power supply free from voltage spikes and surges is absolutely essential for machines equipped with the AC inverter drive. Nonlinear inconsistencies (peaks and valleys) in the power supply can cause the AC inverter drive to generate nuisance errors. • The following conditions must be corrected: input voltage above 240V or 480V, phase to ground voltage exceeds 125% of normal line to line voltage, or 240V open delta configuration (stinger leg). Contact the distributor or the manufacturer for assistance. • Sufficient space to perform service procedures and routine preventive maintenance is especially important for machines equipped with the AC inverter drive. WARNING Ensure that a ground wire from a proven earth ground is connected to the ground lug near the input power block on this machine. Without proper grounding, personal injury from electric shock could occur and machine malfunctions may be evident. SW008 Always disconnect power and water supplies before a service technician performs any service procedure. Where applicable, steam and/or compressed air supplies should also be disconnected before service is performed. F8138601 ) Copyright, Alliance Laundry Systems LLC - DO NOT COPY or TF?ANSMIT Introduction Model Identification Information in this manual is applicable to these models: UW35TV UWL060K1L UWN035K1L UWNIOOKIM UWU060K1L UW60TV UWL060K1M UWN035K1M UWN100T3V UWU060K1M UW80TV UWL060T3L UWN035T3L UWN125K1M UWU060T3L UWIOOTV UWL060T3M UWN035T3M UWN125K1V UWU060T3M UW125TV UWL060T3V UWN035T3V UWN125T3V UWU060T3V UW150TV UWL080K1M UWN060K12 UWN150T3V UWU080K1M UWL035K12 UWL080T3V UWN060K1L UWU035K12 UWU080T3V UWL035K1L UWLIOOKIM UWN060K1M UWU035K1L UWUIOOKIM UWL035K1M UWL100T3V UWN060T3L UWU035K1M UWU100T3V UWL035T3L UWL125K1M UWN060T3M UWU035T3L UWU125K1M UWL035T3M UWL125T3V UWN060T3V UWU035T3M UWU125T3V UWL035T3V UWL150T3V UWN080K1M UWU035T3V UWU150T3V UWL060K12 UWN035K12 UWN080T3V UWU060K12 © Copyright, Alliance Laundry Systems LLC - DO NOT COPY or TRANSMIT F8138601 Introduction This manual is designed as a guide to the installation oFthe Pocket Hardmount washer-extractor. NOTE: All information, illustrations, and specifications contained in this manual are based on the latest product information available at the time of printing. We reserve the right to make changes at any time without notice. IMPORTANT: Warranty is void unless washer- extractor is installed according to instructions in this manual. Installation should comply with minimum specifications and requirements, and with applicable municipal building codes, water supply regulations, electrical wiring regulations and any other relevant statuary regulations. Due to varied requirements, applicable local codes should be thoroughly understood and all pre-installation work arranged for accordingly. Delivery Inspection Upon delivery, visually inspect crate, protective cover, and unit for any visible shipping damage. If the crate, protective cover, or unit is damaged or signs of possible damage are evident, have the carrier note the condition on the shipping papers before the shipping receipt is signed, or advise the carrier of the condition as soon as it is discovered. Remove the crate and protective cover as soon after delivery as possible. If any damage is discovered upon removal of the crate and/or protective cover, advise the carrier and file a written claim immediately. Name plate Location The nameplate is located on the back of the machine. Always provide the machine's serial number and model number when ordering parts or when seeking technical assistance. Refer to Figure 1 and Figure 2. Nameplate Location - UniLinc Models On UniLinc models, nameplate information is also programmed into the control. To access machine ID through the control: 1. Press and hold then then [Tl keypads at the same time. 2. Press the [—keypad until Diagnostic is highlighted. 3. Press the (SJ keypad. 4. Press the C""*] keypad until machine ID is highlighted. 5. Press the [ffSj keypad. Always provide the machine's serial number and model number when ordering parts or when seeking technical assistance. Refer to Figure 1. MODEL EXAMPLE OF NAMEPLATE LOCATION In Control (UniLinc Models) At Back of Machine Figure 1 Replacement Parts IF literature or replacement parts are required, contact the source From which the washer-extractor was purchased or contact Alliance Laundry Systems LLC at (920) 748-3950 For the name oFthe nearest authorized parts distributor. A parts manual may be ordered by retuming the reply card provided with each washer-extractor. Customer Service For technical assistance, contact your local distributor or call: (920) 748-3121 Ripon, Wisconsin A record oF each washer-extractor is on file with the manuFacturer. Always provide the machine's serial number and model number when ordering parts or when seeking technical assistance. ReFer to Figure 1 and Figure 2. F8138601 © Copyright, Alliance Laundry Systems LLC - DO NOT COPY or TRANSMIT Introduction Model Number Familiarization Guide - Models Through 3/31/09 Sample Model Number: UW60TVQU10001 UW Model Number Prefix 60 Washer-Extractor Capacity (60 pounds dry weight oF laundry) T Type of Electrical Control T = UniLinc Control V Washer-Extractor Speed Capabilities V = 8 Speeds Q Electrical Characteristics Referto Table 10. Ul Design Series 0001 Option Identification (varies from machine to machine) Model Number Familiarization Guide - Models Starting 4/1/09 Sample Model Number: UWN060T3VXU1001 UW Model Number Prefix N Market Approvals 060 Washer-Extractor Capacity (60 pounds dry weight of laundry) T Type of Electrical Control T = UniLinc Control 3 Spray/Dispenser Feature V Washer-Extractor Speed Capabilities V = 8 Speeds X Electrical Characteristics Referto Table 10. Ul Design Series 0 Heat Feature 01 Option Identification (varies from machine to machine) Mode!?vo. UWN060T3VXU1001 SeriaS Ho. OOOOOOOOOOO Vo^iage 200-240 Hz 50-60 Phase Numberof wires: 3 FLA: 19 amps Circuit Breaker Size: 30 amps Max. Load: 60 LB 27 KG iance Laundry Systems SUI ter: 30 - 85 psi, 2-5.7 EXAMPLE OF SERIAL PLATE Figure 2 10 © Copyright, Alliance Laundry Systems LLC - DO NOT COPY or TRANSMIT F8138601 Specifications and Dimensions UWTV Models Through 3/31/09 Specifications 35 60 80 100 125 150 Overall Dimensions Overall width, in (mm) 32.5 (826) 36.625 (930) 41.5(1054) 41.5(1054) 48(1219) 50.25(1277) Overall height, in (mm) 55.5(1410) 64.5(1638) 68.5(1740) 68.5(1740) 72(1829) 79(2007) Overall depth, in (mm) 43.625(1108) 45(1143) 51.5 (1308) 54.5(1384) 58(1473) 63(1600) Weight And Shipping Information Net weight, Ib (kg) 1030(468) 1300(590) 1730(785) 1770(805) 2420(1100) 2970(1347) Basket Weight, lb (kg) 150(68) 200(92) 330(150) 360(163) 550(250) 572 (260)* Domestic shipping weight, Ib (kg) 1085(493) 1340(608) 1795(814) 1835(832) 2525(1148) 3022(1371) Domestic shipping volume, (m') 66(1.9) 84 (2.4) 119(3.4) 119(3.4) 166 (4.7) 172(4.87) Domestic shipping dimensions, WxDxH, in (mm) 38x47x64 (970x1200x 1630) 40x49x74.5 (I0!6xl245x 1892) 44x60.5 X77.25 (1118xl537x 1962) 44x60.5x77.25 (1118xl537x 1962) 61.5x60x77.75 (I560xl520x 1980) 54.5x69x79 (139xl76x 201) Export shipping weight, lb (kg) 1150(522) 1464(664) 1990(903) 2030(921) 2800(1270) 3350(1520) Export shipping volume, ft^ (m-*) 78 (2.2) 96 (2.7) 134(3.8) 134 (3.8) 184 (5.3) 220 (6.3) Export shipping dimensions, WxDxH, in (mm) 41x50x65.5 (1050x1280x 1670) 43x52.125x74.5 (I092xl324x 1892) 47x63.5x77.25 (1194xl613x 1962) 47x63.5x77.25 (1194xl613x 1962) 63.5x63x80 (1620xl610x 2030) 61.5x71x87 (1562x1804x 2210) Wash Cylinder Information Cylinder diameter, in (mm) 26.25 (667) 32(813) 36(914) 36(914) 42(1067) 43(1093) Cylinder depth, in (mm) 18.375 (467) 20(508) 21 (533) 27(686) 24(610) 27.8125 (706) Cylinder volume, ft' (1) 5.76(163) 9.31 (264) 12.4(350) 15.9 (450) 19.2(544) 23.4 (662) Perforation size, in (mm) 0,1875 (4.8) 0.1875 (4.8) 0.1875 (4.8) 0,1875 (4.8) 0.1875 (4.8) 0.1875 (4.8) Perforation open area, % 18 22 23 23 24 21.5 Door Opening Information Door opening size, in (mm) 14.375(365) 17.5(445) 17.5 (445) 17.5 (445) 20(508) 24.75 (629) Height of door bwttom abiove floor, in (mm) 23.75 (603) 28.25 (718) 29(737) 29(737) 29 (737) 32(813) Drive Train Information Number of motors in drive train 1 1 1 I 1 1 Drive motor power, hp (kW) 5.0 (3.7) 5.0(3.7) 7.5(5.6) 7.5(5.6) 10(7.5) 10(7.5) * Basket Only F8138601 ) Copyright, Alliance Laundry Systems LLC - DO NOT COPY or TRANSMIT 11 Specifications and Dimensions UWTV Models Through 3/31/09 (Continued) Specifications 35 60 80 100 125 150 Cylinder Speeds / Centrifugal Force Data 1/2 Wash/reverse, rpm (g) 26 (.25) 26 (.31) 26 (.35) 26 (.35) 26 (.40) 23(31) Wash/reverse, rpm (g) 42 (.66) 40 (.73) 40(82) 40 (.82) 37 (.82) 36 (0.8) Distribution, rpm (g) 83 (2.57) 71 (2.29) 73 (2.57) 70 (2.50) 62 (2.29) 61 (2.29) Very Low extract, rpm (g) 401(60) 364(60) 343 (60) 343(60) 317(60) 314(60) Low extract rpm (g) 568(120) 514(120) 485(120) 485(120) 449(120) 444(120) Medium extract, rpm (g) 695(180) 630(180) 594(180) 594(180) 550(180) 543(180) High extract, rpm (g) 803(240) 727(240) 686(240) 686 (240) 565(190) 627(240) Very High extract, rpm (g) 898(300) 813(300) 766(300) 766(300) 579(200) 701(300) Balance Detection Vibration switch installed STD STD STD STD STD STD Direct Steam Heating (Optional) Steam inlet connection size, in (mm) 0.5(13) 0.5(13) 0.5(13) 0.5(13) 0.75 (19) 0.75(19) Number of steam inlets 1 1 1 1 1 1 Steam required to raise bath temperature 10°F, lb(10°C, kg) LOW 2.1 (1.5) 3.3 (2.4) 4.6 (3.3) 5.7(4.1) 6.7 (4.9) 8.3 (6.0) Steam required to raise bath temperature 10°F, lb(10°C, kg) MED 2.3(1.7) 3.7 (2.6) 5.2 (3.8) 6.5 (4.7) 7.8(5.6) 9.5 (6.9) Steam required to raise bath temperature 10°F, lb(10°C, kg) HIGH 2.7(1.9) 4.1 (2.9) 6.1 (4.4) 7.6(5.5) 9.1 (6.6) 11.1 (8.0) Average consumption per cycle, BHP (kg) 1.4 (21.4) 2.1 (33.4) 3.1 (48.4) 3.8 (60.4) 4.6 (72.0) 5.8(91.0) Electrical Heating (Optional) Total electrical heating capacity, kW 15.6 27.4 41.2 (Q-Volt) 27.4 (N-Volt) 41.2 (Q-Volt) 27.4 (N-Volt) N/A N/A Number of electrical heating elements 6 6 9 9 N/A N/A Electrical heating element size, kW 2.6 4.2 4,2 4.2 N/A N/A Time required to raise bath temperature 10°F, min (5°C, min) LOW 2.4(3,6) 2.4 (3.7) 2.2(3.4) 2.8 (4.2) N/A N/A Time required to raise bath temperature 10°F, min (5°C, min) MED 2.7 (4.1) 2.7(4.1) 2.5 (3.9) 3.2 (4.8) N/A N/A Time required to raise bath temperature 10°F, min (5°C, min) HIGH 3.1 (4.7) 3.0 (4.6) 3.0 (4.5) 3.7 (5.6) N/A N/A 12 © Copyright, Alliance Laundry Systems LLC - DO NOT COPY or TRANSMIT F8138601 Specifications and Dimensions UWL, UWN and UWU Models Starting 4/1/09 Specifications 35 60 80 100 125 150 Overall Dimensions Overall width, in. (mm) 32.37 (822) 36.07 (916) 41.06(1043) 41.06(1043) 47.91 (1217) 50.23(1256) Overall height, in. (mm) 54.45(1383) 64.5 (1638) 67.88(1724) 67.88(1724) 72.31 (1837) 78.9 (2004) Overall depth, in. (mm) 44.49(1130) 47.24(1200) 49.88(1267) 55.85 (1419) 56.54(1436) 62.43(1586) Weight And Shipping Information Net weight, lb. (kg) 925(420) 1270(576) 1750(793) 1800(816) 2190(993) 2890(1311) Basket Weight, lb. (kg) 147(67) 200(92) 330(150) 360(163) 550(250) 572 (260)* Domestic shipping weight, lb (kg) 944 (428) 1302(591) 1814(823) 1870(848) 2292(1040) 2944(1335) Domestic shipping volume, (m') 61.5(1.7) 83.25 (2.3) 111 (3,2) 111 (3.2) 135 (3.89) 171.5(4.94) Domestic shipping dimensions, WxDxH, in. (mm) 37.5x48x59 (952x1219x1498) 41.5x50.25x69 (1054x1276x1753) 44x60x72.75 (1118x1524x1848) 44x60x72.75 (1118x1524x1848) 50.5x60x77 (1283x1524x1956) 54.5x69x78.75 (1385x1753x2000) Export shipping weight, lb. (kg) 1050 (476.27) 1430 (648.63) 2010(911.72) 2060 (934.40) 2570(1165.73) 3270(1483,24) Export shipping volume, ft' (m') 79.5 (2,27) 99.25 (2.83) 152.5 (4.35) 152.5(4.35) 173 (4.93) 215(6.13) Export shipping dimensions, WxDxH, in. (mm) 42x51x64 (1067x1295x1626) 46x53.25x70 (1168x1353x1778) 48,5x63x86.25 (1232x1600x2191) 48.5x63x86.25 (1232x1600x2191) 55x63x86.25 (1397x1600x2191) 59x72x87.5 (1499x1829x2223) Wash Cylinder Information Cylinder diameter, in. (mm) 26.25 (667) 32(813) 36(914) 36(914) 42(1067) 43(1093) Cylinder depth, in. (mm) 18.375 (467) 20(508) 21(533) 27(686) 24(610) 27.8125 (706) Cylinder volume, ft' (1) 5.76(163) 9.31 (264) 12.4(350) 15,9(450) 19,2(544) 23.4 (662) Perforation size, in. (mm) 0.1875 (4.8) 0.1875 (4.8) 0.1875 (4.8) 0.1875 (4.8) 0.1875 (4,8) 0.1875 (4.8) Perforation open area, % 18 22 23 23 24 21,5 Door Opening Information Door opening size, in. (mm) 14,375 (365) 17.5 (445) 17.5(445) 17,5(445) 20(508) 24.75 (629) Height of door bottom above floor, in. (mm) 23,48 (596) 28.07(713) 29,46 (748) 29.46 (748) 28.5 (724) 31.41 (798) Drive Train Information Number of motors in drive train 1 1 1 1 1 1 Drive motor power, hp (kW) 2.0(1.3) (2-speed models) 5.0(3.7) (Variable-speed models) 3.0 (2.2) (2-speed models) 5.0(3.7) (Variable-speed models) 7.5 (5.6) 7.5(5,6) 10(7.5) 10(7.5) * Basket Only F8138601 © Copyright, Alliance Laundry Systems LLC - DO NOT COPY or TRANSMIT 13 Specifications and Dimensions UWL, UWN and UWU Models Starting 4/1/09 (Continued) Specifications 35 60 80 100 125 150 Cylinder Speeds / Centrifugal Force Data 1/2 Wash/reverse, rpm (g) (Variable-speed models only) 26 (.25) 26 (.31) 26 (.35) 26(35) 26 (.40) 23 (.32) Wash/reverse, rpm (g) 44 (.73) 42 (.66) 40 (0.8) 40(0.8) 37 (0.8) 36(0.8) Distribution, rpm (g) (Variable-speed models only) 83 (2.57) 74 (2) 70 (2.50) 70 (2.50) 62 (2.29) 61 (2.29) Very Low extract, rpm (g) (Variable-speed models only) 401 (60) 364(60) 343 (60) 343 (60) 317(60) 314(60) Low extract rpm (g) (Variable-speed models only) 568(120) 514(120) 485(120) 485(120) 449(120) 444(120) Medium extract, rpm (g) (Variable-speed models only) 695(180) 630(180) 594(180) 594(180) 550(180) 543(180) High extract, rpm (g) 803(240) (Variable-speed models) 492(90) (2-speed models) 727(240) (Variable-speed models) 482(106) (2-speed models) 686(240) 686(240) 565(190) 627(240) Very High extract, rpm (g) (Variable-speed models only) 898(300) 813(300) 766 (300) 766 (300) 579(200) 701(300) Balance Detection Vibration switch installed STD (Variable- speed models) N/A (2-speed models) STD (Variable- speed models) N/A (2-speed models) STD STD STD STD Direct Steam Heating (Optional) Steam inlet connection size, in. (mm) 0.5(13) 0.5(13) 0 5(13) 0.5(13) 0.75(19) 0.75(19) Number of steam inlets 1 1 1 1 1 1 Steam required to raise bath temperature 10°F, lb. (IO°C, kg) LOW 2.1 (1.5) 3.3 (2.4) 4.6 (3.3) 5.7(4.1) 6.7(4.9) 8.3 (6.0) Steam required to raise bath temperature 10°F, lb. (IO°C, kg) MED 2.3(1.7) 3.7 (2.6) 5.2 (3.8) 6.5(4.7) 7.8 (5.6) 9.5 (6.9) Steam required to raise bath temperature 10°F, lb. (IO°C, kg) HIGH 2.7(1,9) 4.1 (2.9) 6.1 (4.4) 7.6(5.5) 9.1 (6.6) 11.1 (8.0) Average consumption per cycle, BHP (kg) 1.4 (21.4) 2.1 (33.4) 3 1 (48.4) 3.8 (60.4) 4.6 (72.0) 5.8(91.0) Electrical Heating (Optional) Total electrical heating capacity, kW (N/A for 2 speed models) 200V 10.8 19.1 28.6 28.6 N/A N/A Total electrical heating capacity, kW (N/A for 2 speed models) 240V 15.6 27.4 41.2 41.2 N/A N/A Total electrical heating capacity, kW (N/A for 2 speed models) 380V 9.8 17,2 17.2 17.2 34.4 N/A Total electrical heating capacity, kW (N/A for 2 speed models) 415V 11.7 20.5 20.5 20.5 41.0 N/A Total electrical heating capacity, kW (N/A for 2 speed models) 480V 15.6 27.4 27.4 27.4 54.8 N/A Numtjer of electrical heating elements 6 6 9 9 12 N/A Electrical heating element size, kW 2.6 4.2 4.2 4.2 4.2 N/A 14 ) Copyright, Alliance Laundry Systems LLC - DO NOT COPY or TF?ANSMIT F8138601 Machine Dimensions Dimensional Clearances Allow a minimum of 24 inches (60 cm) at the rear and 6 inches (15.24 cm) at the sides for maintenance, inspection, and adjustment. Allow at least 6 inches (15.24 cm) between machines in multiple installations. Specifications and Dimensions NOTE: The dimensions shown here are for planning purposes only. They are approximate and subject to normal manufacturing tolerances. If exact dimensions are required for construction purposes, contact the distributor or the manufacturer. We reserve the right to make changes at any time without notice. WARNING Crush hazard. To avoid personal injury and/or property damage, do not tip the UW150 machine more than 25 degrees in any direction. UWTV Models Through 3/31/09 (Refer to Figure 3 and Figure 4) Dimension 35 60 80 100 125 150 Dimension in mm in mm in mm in mm in mm in mm A 30.125 765 35.625 905 41.125 1045 41.125 1045 48 1219 50.25 1277 B< 33.375 848 36.625 930 41.5 1054 41.5 1054 48 1219 50.25 1277 C 23.75 603 28.25 718 29 737 29 737 29 737 32 813 D 43.625 1108 45 1143 51.5 1308 54.5 1384 58 1473 63 1600 E2 .5 13 1 25 3 76 3 76 1.5 38 2.9 73 F 55.5 1410 64.5 1638 68.5 1740 68.5 1740 72 1829 79 2007 G2 36 914 36 914 43.75 llll 43.75 llll 48 1219 56 1422 H 8 203 15.5 394 16.875 429 16.875 429 11.375 289 15.75 400 J 43.14 1096 49.8 1265 53.54 1360 53:54 1360 56.4 1433 62.85 1596 K 46.64 1185 53.3 1354 57.04 1449 57.04 1449 59.9 1521 66.35 1685 L 5.12 130 5.12 130.05 7.12 181 7.12 181 7.12 181 7.12 181 M 2.62 66 2.62 66 3.62 92 3.62 92 3.62 92 3.62 92 N 1.37 35 1.37 35 2.25 57 2.25 57 2.25 57 2.25 57 O 3.87 98 3.87 98 5 127 5 127 5 127 5 127 P 2.5 64 2.5 64 2.75 70 2.75 70 2.75 70 2.75 70 Q 2.5 64 2.5 64 3.5 89 3.5 89 3.5 89 3.5 89 Overhang dimensions for the optional starch dispenser are as follows: UW35TV, 3.88 inches (9.86 cm); UW60TV, 1.75 inches (4.45 cm); UW80TV and UWIOOTV, 0.33 inch (0.83 cm). (The starch dispenser does not overhang the UW125TV) (No longer available.) The overhang dimension for the premium wet clean module option (compatible with wet-clean-capable washer-extractors only) adds 24 inches (60.96 cm) to combined machine dimensions E and G Table 1 F8138601 © Copyright, Alliance Laundry Systems LLC - DO NOT COPY or TRANSMIT 15 Specifications and Dimensions i B (OVERALL)- 511 A, — G (BASE) — -D(OVERALL)- UW35TV - UW125TV MODELS 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 External Supply Control Mounting Bracket (Models Through 6/30/08) Door Unlock Button Supply Valve Box Emergency Stop Button Supply Dispenser Door Handle Spray Rinse Nozzle Recirculation Inlet PHM735N 9 Water Inlet Valves 10 Steam Connection (Optional) 11 Shell Vent 12 Power Input (Electric Heat Models) 13 Power Input (Non-Electric Heat Models) 14 Drain (UW80TV, UWIOOTV and UW125TV models only) 15 Drain 16 Overflow Vent Figure 3 16 ) Copyright, Alliance Laundry Systems LLC - DO NOT COPY or TF?ANSM1T F8138601 Specifications and Dimensions 2 3 4 5 6 7 - B (OVERALL) UW150TV MODELS External Supply Control Mounting Bracket (Models Through 6/30/08) Door Unlock Button Emergency Stop Button Supply Valve Box Supply Dispenser Spray Rinse Nozzle Door Handle 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Basket Jog Buttons Recirculation Inlet Shell Vent Water Inlet Valves Steam Connection (Optional) Power Input Drain Overflow Vent Figure 4 F8138601 ) Copyright, Alliance Laundry Systems LLC - DO NOT COPY or TRANSMIT 17 Specifications and Dimensions UW Design 1 and Design 2 Models Starting 4/1/09 Through 10/3/10 (Refer to Figure 5 and Figure 6) Dimension 35 60 80 100 125 150 Dimension in. mm in. mm in. mm in. mm in. mm in. mm A 30.125 765 35.625 905 41.125 1045 41.125 1045 48 1219 50 1270 B' 32.37 822 36.07 916 41.06 1043 41.06 1043 47.91 1217 50.23 1276 C 23.48 596 28.07 713 29.46 748 29.46 748 28.5 723 31.41 798 D 44.49 1130 47.24 1200 49.88 1267 55.85 1418 56.54 1436 62.43 1586 E 54.45 1383 64.52 1639 67.88 1724 67.88 1724 72.31 1837 78.9 2004 F2 36.15 918 38.87 987 45.48 1155 47.70 1212 48.52 1232 56.32 1431 G 7.66 195 14.72 374 15.92 404 15.92 404 11.9 302 15.73 400 H 43.15 1096 49.81 1265 53.54 1359 53.54 1359 56.4 1432 62.91 1598 J 46.65 1185 53.31 1354 57.04 1449 57.04 1449 59.9 1521 66.41 1687 K 5.12 130 5.12 130.05 7.12 181 7.12 181 7.12 181 7.12 181 L 2.62 66 2.62 66 3.62 92 3.62 92 3.62 92 3.62 92 M 1.37 35 1.37 35 2.25 57 2.25 57 2.25 57 2.25 57 N 3.87 98 3.87 98 5 127 5 127 5 127 5 127 O 2.5 64 2.5 64 2.75 70 2.75 70 2.75 70 2.75 70 P 2.5 64 2.5 64 3.5 89 3.5 89 3.5 89 3.5 89 Overhang dimensions for the optional starch dispenser are as follows: 35, 3.88 inches (9.86 cm); 60, 1.75 inches (4.45 cm); 80 and 100, 0.33 inch (0.83 cm). (The starch dispenser does not overhang the 125.) (No longer available.) The overhang dimension for the premium wet clean module option (compatible with wet-clean-capable washer-extractors only) adds 24 inches (60.96 cm) to combined machine dimensions E and G Table 2 18 © Copyright, Alliance Laundry Systems LLC - DO NOT COPY or TRANSMIT F8138601 Specifications and Dimensions 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 CP- B (OVERALL)- A, — F (BASE) — -D(OVERALL)- 10 11 35-125 MODELS External Supply Control Mounting Bracket (Models Through 6/30/08) Door Unlock Button Supply Valve Box (optional) Emergency Stop Button Supply Dispenser Door Handle Spray Rinse Nozzle (optional) Recirculation Inlet 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Water Inlet Valves Steam Connection (Optional) Shell Vent Power Input (Electric Heat Models) Power Input (Non-Electric Heat Models) Drain (80, 100 and 125 models only) Drain Overflow Vent Figure 5 F8138601 > Copyright, Alliance Laundry Systems LLC - DO NOT COPY or TRANSMIT 19 Specifications and Dimensions 2 3 4 5 6 7 Extemal Supply Control Mounting Bracket (Models Through 6/30/08) Door Unlock Button Emergency Stop Button Supply Valve Box Supply Dispenser Spray Rinse Nozzle Door Handle 150 MODELS 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Basket Jog Buttons Recirculation Inlet Shell Vent Water Inlet Valves Steam Connection (Optional) Power Input Drain Overflow Vent Figure 6 20 © Copyright, Alliance Laundry Systems LLC - DO NOT COPY or TRANSMIT F8138601 Specifications and Dimensions UW Design 3 Models starting 10/4/10 (Refer to Figure 7 and Figure 8) Dimension 35 60 80 100 125 150 Dimension in. mm in. mm in. mm in. mm in. mm in. mm A 30.125 765 35.625 905 41.125 1045 41.125 1045 48 1219 50 1270 B 32.37 822 36.07 916 41.06 1043 41.06 1043 47.91 1217 50.23 1276 C 23.41 595 28.07 713 29.29 744 29.29 744 28.5 723 31.41 798 D 45.27 1150 46.81 1189 50 1270 56.03 1423 55.04 1398 62 1575 E 54.32 1380 64.40 1636 67.75 1721 67.75 1721 72.18 1833 78.77 2001 F' 36.18 919 38.87 987 45.56 1157 48.08 12.21 48.25 1226 56.26 1429 G 6.79 172 14.73 374 15.94 405 15.94 405 11.71 297 15.69 399 H 47.06 1195 53.71 1364 56.42 1433 56.42 1433 57.92 1471 64.36 1635 J 2.3 58 2.3 58 2.3 58 2.3 58 2.3 58 2.3 58 K 4.9 124 4.9 124 4.9 124 4.9 124 4.9 124 4.9 124 L 7.8 198 7.8 198 7.8 198 7.8 198 7.8 198 7.8 198 M 10.4 264 10.4 264 10.4 264 10.4 264 10.4 264 10.4 264 N 2.6 66 2.6 66 2.6 66 2.6 66 2.6 66 2.6 66 O 2.85 72 2.85 72 2.85 72 2.85 72 2.85 72 2.85 72 The overhang dimension for the premium wet clean module option (compatible with wet-clean-capable washer-extractors only) adds 24 inches (60.96 cm) to combined machine dimensions E and G Table 3 F8138601 ) Copyright, Alliance Laundry Systems LLC - DO NOT COPY or TRANSMIT 21 Specifications and Dimensions — A (BASE) - -B (OVERALL) M- L- K- J- .o" .o' 0 .O* A — F (BASE) — -D(OVERALL)- Door Unlock Button Emergency Stop Button Supply Dispenser Door Handle Spray Rinse Nozzle (optional) Water Inlet Valves Steam Connection (Optional) 35-125 MODELS 8 9 10 11 12 13 Shell Vent Power Input (Electric Heat Models) Power Input (Non-Electric Heat Models) Drain (80,100 and 125 models only) Drain Overflow Vent Figure 7 22 ) Copyright, Alliance Laundry Systems LLC - DO NOT COPY or TRANSMIT F8138601 Specifications and Dimensions • A (BASE) • - B (OVERALL)- N G (BASE) D (OVERALL) • M- L- 150 MODELS ] J 1 Door Unlock Button 2 Emergency Stop Button 8 Shell Vent 3 Supply Valve Box 9 Water Inlet Valves 4 Supply Dispenser 10 Steam Connection (Optional) 5 Spray Rinse Nozzle 11 Power Input 6 Door Handle 12 Drain 7 Basket Jog Buttons 13 Overflow Vent Figure 8 F8138601 © Copyright, Alliance Laundry Systems LLC - DO NOT COPY or TRANSMIT 23 Specifications and Dimensions Machine Foundation Requirements A 6 inch (153 mm) (For 35 and 60 2-speed, L-speed and M-speed models) or a 12 inch (305 mm) (For all other models) thickness oF3500 psi reinforced concrete Foundation is absolutely necessary because oF the high extract speed and the G-Forces exerted. When designing floors or Foundations, reFer to Table 3 For Floor Load Data For all model sizes. IF the Foundation requirements have been met, proceed to Mounting Bolt Installation Requirements section. NOTE: Do not mount on wooden floors, above ground level, or over basements. Installation must be "slab on grade" or equaL Thoroughness oF detail must be stressed with all Foundation work to ensure a stable unit installation, eliminating possibilities oFexcessive vibration during extract. For new Foundations a bolt-locator fixture or rebar Frame is available and a preFerred option. This rigid welded assembly made oF reinForcing rod and mounting bolts is designed to be embedded in concrete. ReFer to Figure 11. The washer-extractor must be anchored to a smooth level surFace so that the entire base oF the machine is supported and rests on the mounting surFace. (Do not support the washer-extractor on only Four points.) Make sure to grout machine. ReFer to Figure 10 and Figure 11. CAUTION Ensure that the machine is installed on a floor that is level to within 3/8 inch when the machine is grouted. Also ensure that the floor is of sufficient strength and that the recommended clearances for inspection and maintenance are provided. Never allow the inspection and maintenance space to be blocked. WARNING To reduce the risk of fire, this appliance must be bolted to an uncovered concrete floor. 24 ) Copyright, Alliance Laundry Systems LLC - DO NOT COPY or TRANSMIT F8138601 Concrete Foundation Pad Installation A concrete Foundation and pad may be constructed to elevate the machines. Care must be exercised in the design oF the Foundation pad due to the Force exerted by the machine during extract. This concrete base (recommended not to exceed 8 inches [20.32 cm]) (above existing floor) must be poured, reinForced with rebar and tied to the existing 6 inch (153 mm) (For 35 and 60 2-speed, L-speed and M-speed models) or 12 inch (305 mm) (For all other models) minimum floor. ReFer to Figure 9 and Table 3. IMPORTANT: Do NOT install a pad on top ofthe existing floor. The foundation and pad must be constructed and tied together as one piece. If the existing floor is not reinforced concrete at least 6 inch (153 mm) (for 35 and 60 2-speed, L-speed and M-speed models) or 12 inch (305 mm) (for all other models) thick over a solid foundation, the following steps must be performed (refer to Figure 9): 1. Cut a hole larger on all sides than the machine base through the existing floor. The foundation should extend a minimum of 9 inches (229 mm) for 35 models or 12 inches (305 mm) for 60 -150 models out from the machine on all sides. 2. Excavate to a depth of 18 inches (457 mm) from the top of the existing floor. 3. Produce a PYRAMID-SHAPED hole by excavating the bottom oF the hole to a width 6 inches wider on each side than the width oF the top oF the hole. 4. IF installing a Foundation and pad, prepare a Form For the above-ground portion oF the Foundation. Verify that the top oFthe Foundation is level. The height oF the Foundation pad must not exceed 8 inches (203 mm) above the existing floor. 5. Refill with compacted fill dirt, making sure to allow For correct concrete thickness. Specifications and Dimensions 6. Wet the hole around the cement Foundation well and brush the exposed Foundation with cement grout. 7. Completely fill with a minimum oF6 inch (153 mm) (For 35 and 60 2-speed, L-speed and M-speed models) or 12 inch (305 mm) (For all other models) oF3500 psi concrete up to the existing Foundation level plus any added level For the desired elevated pad. The concrete must be poured so that the entire Foundation and pad cures as one piece. 8. For new foundations only a bolt-locator fixture or a rebar Frame is available and a preFerred option. Embed the mounting bolts or rebar Frame as the concrete is poured. Ensure that the bolt threads extend 2 inches (51 mm) For 35 - 125 models and 3 inches (76 mm) For 150 models above floor level. 9. Allow concrete to dry. 10. Proceed to Machine Mounting and Grouting section. NOTE: If the washer-extractor installation will include the Premium Wet Clean Module, the elevated base must be designed to accommodate the additional depth of 24 inches (60.96 cm). For technical assistance, contact your local distributor or call Alliance Laundry Systems at (920) 748-3121. F8138601 ) Copyright, Alliance Laundry Systems LLC - DO NOT COPY or TRANSMIT 25 Specifications and Dimensions 1 A, Brush with Cement Grout I I I I I I H I I I I I I I I I I I I M I I I I I COMPACTED FILL DIRT 18 in. (457 mm) DEPTH- 111111II111II11II11 n [i 1111 fl I im ~1(r f 111 COMPACTED FIIX DIRT 18 in. (457 mm) DEPTH lllllilllllllMI IIII I Figure 9 35 60 80 100 125 150 1 2-Speed, L-Speed and M-Speed 6 in. (153 mm) 12 in. (305 mm) 12 in. (305 mm) 12 in. (305 mm) 12 in. (305 mm) 1 Variable-Speed 12 in. (305 mm) 12 in. (305 mm) 12 in. (305 mm) 12 in. (305 mm) 12 in. (305 mm) 2 6 in. (152 mm) minimum 6 in. (152 mm) minimum 6 in. (152 mm) minimum 6 in. (152 mm) minimum 6 in. (152 mm) minimum 6 in. (152 mm) minimum 3 9 in. (229 mm) 12 in. (305 mm) 12 in. (305 mm) 12 in. (305 mm) 12 in. (305 mm) 12 in. (305 mm) 4 36 in. (914 mm) 36 in. (914 mm) 43.75 in. (llll mm) 43.75 in. (llll mm) 48 in. (1219mm) 56 in. (1422 mm) 5 0 - 8 in. (0 - 203 mm) max. 0-8 in. (0 - 203 mm) max. 0 - 8 in. (0 - 203 mm) max. 0 - 8 in. (0 - 203 mm) max. 0 - 8 in. (0 - 203 mm) max. 0 - 8 in. (0 - 203 mm) max. 6 48.125 in. (1222 mm) 59.625 in. (1514 mm) 65.125 in. (1654 mm) 65.125 in. (1654 mm) 72 in. (1829 mm) 74.25 in. (1886 mm) 26 ) Copyright, Alliance Laundry Systems LLC - DO NOT COPY or TRANSMIT F8138601 Specifications and Dimensions Floor Load Data Static and dynamic loads on the floor or foundation are shown in Table 4 and Table 5. UWTV Pocket Hardmount Floor Load Data (Models Through 3/31/09) Specifications Design Series 35 60 80 100 125 150 Static floor load, lbs (kN) Ul and greater 1272 (5.66) 1677 (7.45) 2292(10.2) 2490(11.1) 3283 (14.6) 3936(17.5) Static pressure, lbs/ft^ Ul and greater 169(8.08) 187 (8.94) 184 (8.79) 199 (9.6) 205 (9.8) 202 (9.7) Dynamic floor load, Ibs (kN) Ul and greater 1648 (7.33) 2824(12.6) 3679(16.36) 3690(16.41) 5011 (22.29) 4358(19.4) Dynamic pressure, lbs/ft^ (kN/m^) Ul and greater 219(10.5) 317(15.2) 295 (14.2) 295(14.2) 312(15) 224(11) Dynamic load frequency, Hz Ul and greater 15 13.6 12.8 12.8 9.7 11.7 'Maximum vertical load, Ibs (kN) Ul and greater 2719(12.1) 4168(18.5) 5482 (24.38) 5561 (24.73) 7559 (33.62) 7508 (33.4) ^Minimum vertical load, lbs (kN) Ul and greater 576 (2.56) 1450 (6.45) 1852 (8.24) 1794 (8.0) 2434(10.8) 1208 (5.4) Base moment, lb/ft (kN/m) Ul and greater 4249 (5.8) 8895 (12.1) 11951 (16.2) 11984 (16.3) 16606 (22.5) 16707 (22.7) ' Acting in the downward direction against the floor. ^ Acting in the upward direction away from the floor. Table 4 F8138601 ) Copyright, Alliance Laundry Systems LLC - DO NOT COPY or TRANSMIT 27 Specifications and Dimensions UWL, UWN AND UWU Pocket Hardmount Floor Load Data (Models Starting 4/1/09) Specifications Design Series Speed 35 60 80 100 125 150 Static floor load, Ibs. (kN) Ul and greater Variable-speed 1272 (5.66) 1442 (6.42) 2292 (10.2) 2490 (11.1) 3283 (14.6) 3936 (17.5) 2-speed 1272 (5.66) 1442 (6.42) N/A N/A N/A N/A L-speed 1272 (5.7) 1442 (6.4) N/A N/A N/A N/A M-speed 1272 (5.7) 1442 (6.4) 2292 (10.2) 2490 (11) 3283 (14.6) N/A Static pressure, lbs/ft2 (kN/m^) Ul and greater Variable-speed 169 (8.08) 162 (7.7) 184 (8.79) 199 (9.6) 205 (9.8) 202 (9.7) 2-speed 169 (8.08) 162 (7.7) N/A N/A N/A N/A L-speed 169 (8) 162 (7.7) N/A N/A N/A N/A M-speed 169 (8) 162 (7.7) 184 (8.8) 199 (9.5) 205 (9.8) N/A Dynamic floor load, lbs. (kN) Ul and greater Variable-speed 1576 (7) 2704 (12) 3603 (16.36) 4504 (16.41) 3746 (22.29) 4501 (19.4) 2-speed 473 (2.1) 950 (4.23) N/A N/A N/A N/A L-speed 525 (2,3) 900 (4) N/A N/A N/A N/A M-speed 944 (4.2) 1624 (7.2) 2167 (9.6) 2708 (12) 3380 (15) N/A Dynamic pressure, lbs/ft^ (kN/m^) Ul and greater Variable-speed 380 (18.2) 466 (22.34) 472 (22.63) 559 (26.8) 439 (21) 433 (20.8) 2-speed 233 (11.2) 269 (6.3) N/A N/A N/A N/A L-speed 240 (11.5) 263 (12.59) N/A N/A N/A N/A M-speed 295 (14.1) 344 (16.5) 357 (17) 416 (19.9) 416 (19.9) N/A Dynamic load frequency, Hz Ul and greater Variable-speed 15 13.6 12.8 12.8 9.7 11.7 Dynamic load frequency, Hz Ul and greater 2-speed 8.2 8.0 N/A N/A N/A N/A L-speed 8.63 7.82 N/A N/A N/A N/A M-speed 11.58 10.5 9.9 9.9 9.2 N/A Table 5 (continued) 28 ) Copyright Alliance Laundry Systems LLC - DO NOT COPY or TF?ANSMIT F8138601 Specifications and Dimensions Table 5 (continued) UWL, UWN AND UWU Pocket Hardmount Floor Load Data (Models Starting 4/1/09) Specifications Design Series Speed 35 60 80 100 125 150 'Maximum vertical load, lbs. (kN) Ul and greater Variable-speed 2848 (12.7) 4146 (18.4) 5895 (26.2) 6994 (31.1) 7028 (31.3) 8437 (37.52) 2-speed 1745 (7.8) 2392 (.41) N/A N/A N/A N/A L-speed 1797 (8) 2342 (10.4) N/A N/A N/A N/A M-speed 2216 (9.9) 3066 (13.6) 4459 (19.8) 5198 (23) 6663 (29.6) N/A Base moment, lb/ft (kN/m) Ul and greater Variable-speed 4076 (5.54) 8492 (11.5) 11688 (15.9) 14611 (19.9) 12488 (17) 17231 (23.4) 2-speed 1224 (1.7) 2985 (4) N/A N/A N/A N/A L-speed 1356 (1.8) 2826 (3.8) N/A N/A N/A N/A M-speed 2442 (3.3) 5099 (6.9) 7029 (9.6) 8786 (11.9) 11268 (15.3) N/A N/A = Not Applicable ' Acting in the downward direction against the floor. Table 5 F8138601 © Copyright, Alliance Laundry Systems LLC - DO NOT COPY or TFJANSMIT 29 Specifications and Dimensions Mounting Bolt Installation Requirements Approved Foundations Only NOTE: If installing expansion bolts into an elevated concrete foundation pad, the concrete foundation pad should extend a minimum of 9 inches (229 mm) for 35 machines or 12 inches (305 mm) for 60-150 machines out from the machine base on all sides. Refer to Figure 9. A bolt kit consisting of eight bolts is available as an option. 35 machines use 5/8-11 x 8 inch bolts. 60- 125 machines use 3/4-10 x 8 inch bolts. 150 machines use 3/4-10 x 10 inch grade 5 bolts. The bolts should be embedded in a 3500 psi (241 bar) minimum reinforced concrete floor that is a minimum of 6 inches (153 mm) (for 35 and 60 2-speed, L-speed, and M-speed models) or a 12 inch (305 mm) (for all other models) thick. Use the mounting bolt layouts in Mounting Bolt Hole Locations section. On 35- 125 machines, the threaded end of the bolts should extend 2 inches (5.08 cm) above the mounting surFace. On 150 machines, the threaded end oFthe bolts should extend 3 inches above the mounting surFace. ReFer to Figure 10 For a typical installation oF individual mounting bolts. For new Foundations a bolt-locator fixture or rebar Frame is available and a preFerred option. This rigid welded assembly made oF reinForcing rod and mounting bolts is designed to be embedded in concrete. ReFer to Figure 11. Machine Frame Base Mounting Bolt Threads Grouting Reinforcing Rod Figure 11 1 Machine Frame Base 2 Mounting Bolt Threads 3 Grouting 4 Cement or Structural Epoxy Figure 10 30 ) Copyright, Alliance Laundry Systems LLC - DO NOT COPY or TRANSMIT F8138601 Machine Mounting and Grouting After the concrete has cured, proceed as Follows: 1. Place the washer-extractor adjacent to the Foundation. Do not attempt to move the machine by pushing on the sides. Always insert a pry bar or other device under the bottom Frame oF the machine to move it. 2. Remove the wood skid by unscrewing the carriage bolts holding the skid to the bottom Frame oF the washer-extractor. 3. Place the washer-extractor careFuUy over the anchor bolts. Never attempt to lift the machine by the door handle or by pushing on the cover panels. 4. Raise and level the washer-extractor 0.5 inch (1.27 cm) off the floor on three points, using spacers such as nut Fasteners. 5. Fill the space between the washer-extractor base and the floor with a good quality non-shrinking machinery precision grout to ensure a stable installation. Grout completely under all Frame members. (Remove Front panel and back panel to gain access to all Frame members.) ReFer to Figure 17. Force grout under machine base until all voids are filled. 6. Remove the spacers carefully, allowing the machine to settle into the wet grout. Specifications and Dimensions 7. Before grout sets completely, make a drain opening in the rear of the washer-extractor grouting with a stiff piece of wire; this opening should be approximately 1/2 inch (1.27 cm) wide to allow any surface water build-up under the base of the machine to drain away. Do not omit this step. 8. Position the mounting bolt lockwashers and locknuts on the anchor bolts and finger-tighten locknuts to machine base. 9. After the grout is completely dry, tighten the locknuts by even increments - one after the other - until all are tightened evenly and the washer- extractor is fastened securely to the floor. 10. After installing bolts using a rebar frame, torque 5/8 inch bolts (35 model) to 90 ft. lb. and torque 3/4 inch bolts (60-150 models) to 160 ft. lb. When using bolts not specified by Alliance Laundry Systems, refer to the specifications provided with the bolt. NOTE: Check and retighten the locknuts after flve to ten days of operation and every month thereafter. F8138601 © Copyright, Alliance Laundry Systems LLC - DO NOT COPY or TRANSMIT 31 Specifications and Dimensions Mounting Bolt Hole Locations 2 in. (51 mm) 2 in. (51 mm) 35 MODEL FRONT OF MACHINE Figure 12 NOTE: Mounting holes marked "A" are on V-speed Models only. 32 ) Copyright, Alliance Laundry Systems LLC - DO NOT COPY or TRANSMIT F8138601 Specifications and Dimensions 60 VARIABLE-SPEED MODEL FRONT OF MACHINE Figure 13 F8138601 ) Copyright, Alliance Laundry Systems LLC - DO NOT COPY or TRANSMIT 33 Specifications and Dimensions 0.75 in. (19 mm) 0.75 In. (19 mm) 39.625 In. (1008 mm) 6.75 in. (171 mm) 9 in. (229 mm) ^1 13.625 in. (346 mm) 13.625 in. (346 mm) 35.125 in. (892 mm) 3 in. (76 mm) 3 in. (76 mm)' 41.125 in. (1045 mm) 0.75 in. (19 mm) 80/100 MODELS FRONT OF MACHINE PHM632N Figure 14 34 © Copyright, Alliance Laundry Systems LLC - DO NOT COPY or TRANSMIT F8138601 Specifications and Dimensions 0.75 In. (19 mm) 0.75 in. (19 mm) 46.5 in. (1181 mm) 23.25 in. (591 mm) 23.25 in. (591 mm) 48 in. (1219 mm)' 7 in. (178 mm) 10 in. (254 mm) 15 in. (381 mm) 15.25 in. (387 mm) 0.75 in. (19 mm)" 125 MODEL FRONT OF MACHINE Figure 15 F8138601 © Copyright, Alliance Laundry Systems LLC - DO NOT COPY or TRANSMIT 35 specifications and Dimensions E c e .= E u> E 15 in. (381 mm) 4 in. (102 mm) 1.5 in. "(38.1 mm) 1.5 In. (38.1 mm)" 47 in. (1193 mm) ' 50 in. (1270 mm) 150 MODEL FRONT OF MACHINE Figure 16 36 © Copyright, Alliance Laundry Systems LLC - DO NOT COPY or TFfANSMIT F8138601 Specifications and Dimensions Grout Placement 36 in. (914 mm) 36 in. (914.4 mm) 4.0625 in. (103 mm) typical 27.875 in. (708.025 mm) W 22 In. ^•*"{559mm)" t 35 VARIABLE-SPEED MODEL PHM674N 35.625 in. (905 mm) .- 4.0625 in. (103 mm) typical 4.0625 in. (103 mm) typical ?913 mm,- Y^ZZZZZZZ^ r 11.9375 In. (303 mm) 12 in, 27.5 in. (305 mm) ••(699 mm) —\ 30.13 In. " (765 mm)' 35 2-SPEED MODEL 35.63 in. (905 mm) \_ 4.0625 In. (103 mm) typical 36 in. (914 mm) _L 4.0625 In. (103 mm) typical t 27.88 In. (708 mm) _^ 27.5 in. (699 mm) 4.0625 In. (103 mm) typical \ 4.0625 In. (103 mm) typical 60 VARIABLE-SPEED MODEL 41.125 in. (1044 mm) 43.75 in. (1111 mm) 14 in. (356 mm) 4.0625 in. (103 mm) typical lin 17.5 in. 33 .^ (445 mm) (838 mm 43.8125 in. {1113 mm) \_ 4.0625 In. (103 mm) typical 60 2-SPEED MODEL _ 41.125 in. _ (1044 mm) T 20.6875 in. (526 mm) _ 33 In " (838 mm) t 10.875 In. (276 mm) ^ 4.0625 In. (103 mm) typical —L 4.0625 in. —_ (103 mm) typical 80 MODEL 56 In. (1422 mm) 4.06 in. (103 mm) typical 125 MODEL 8 In. (203.2 mm) typical 100 MODEL 50 in. (1270 mm) 34 In. (863.6 mm) PHM192N 150 MODEL 8 In. - (203.2 mm) typical PHM60SN Figure 17 F8138601 © Copyright, Alliance Laundry Systems LLC - DO NOT COPY or TRANSMIT 37 Specifications and Dimensions Gap Setting for Vibration Switch After the machine has been properly installed, the vibration switch gap must be verified. To locate the vibration switch refer to Figures 18,19 and 20. For UniLinc models, while the control is displaying the Inputs Outputs Menu the alarm will sound when the Frame switch is activated. To verify and set the vibration switch gap use the Following procedures: WARNING Only trained personnel should perform this procedure. Use caution while servicing machines with covers removed and power applied. For UniLinc Models, Navigate to tfie Inputs Outputs Menu: 1. From the Cycle Menu press and hold the [ED' CT] keys to enter the System Menu. 2. Press the arrow keys to highlight the Diagnostic box. 3. Press the I^BJ key to enter the Diagnostic Menu. 4. Press the jrgj key to enter the Test Menu. 5. Press the arrow keys to highlight the Inputs Outputs box. 6. Press the l^rt key to enter the Inputs Outputs Menu. Verify Vibration Switcti Gap (for 35-125 Pound Models): 1. Insert 0.009 inch feeler gauge between the adjustment bolt and the vibration switch; the alarm must not activate. 2. Remove the feeler gauge 3. Insert 0.010 inch Feeler gauge (supplied with machine) between the adjustment bolt and the vibration switch; the alarm must activate. 4. Remove the Feeler gauge. 5. Adjust the vibration switch adjustment bolt iF necessary. Verify Vibration Switcfi Gap (For 150 Pound Design 1 Models): 1. Insert the 0.010 inch Feeler gauge (supplied with machine) between the adjustment bolt and the vibration switch. 2. IF alarm is active: Slowly loosen adjustment bolt until the alarm stops. 3. Very slowly tighten the adjustment bolt until the alarm activates. The adjustment bolt must be tightened very slowly to prevent over adjustment. 4. Remove the Feeler gauge. 5. VeriFy the Frame Switch setting. To adjust the vibration switch gap on the 150 models, move the vibration switch by adjusting the jam nuts on the vibration switch. For UniLinc models, to return to the Cycle Menu press BACK key several times until Cycle Menu is displayed. Verify Safety Switcti Operation (For 150 Pound Design 2 Models): 1. Place a large magnet above the normally-closed ball switch to verify switch operation. IMPORTANT: UWI50 Design 2 machines are manufactured with a normally-closed ball switch and should not require any adjustment. To avoid nuisance tripping, machine must be level with a summed value of 3/8 inch front to back and right to left to the earth. If switch is tripped, check if machine is level and then for pour grouting and broken anchor bolts. DO NOT BYPASS SAFETY SWITCH. Contact a qualifled service technician for further assistance. 38 ) Copyright, Alliance Laundry Systems LLC - DO NOT COPY or TFJANSMIT F8138601 Specifications and Dimensions 35 Pound Model ADJUSTMENT BOLT Figure 18 F8138601 ) Copyright, Alliance Laundry Systems LLC - DO NOT COPY or TRANSMIT 39 Specifications and Dimensions 60, 80, ^00 and 125 Pound Models ADJUSTMENT BOLT VIBRATION SWITCH Figure 19 40 ) Copyright, Alliance Laundry Systems LLC - DO NOT COPY or TRANSMIT F8138601 Specifications and Dimensions Design 1 150 Pound Model VIBRATION SWITCH Figure 20 F8138601 ) Copyright, Alliance Laundry Systems LLC - DO NOT COPY or TRANSMIT 41 Specifications and Dimensions Drain Connection Requirements A drain system of adequate capacity is essential to washer-extractor performance. The water can empty directly into a sump or floor drain. Figure 21 shows the drain line configuration and Figure 22 shows the drain trough configuration. DRAIN LINE CONFIGURATION A, 1 Overflow 2 Vent 3 Trap (As required by local codes) NOTE: If a flexible connection is made directly to a drain system, the drain system must be vented to prevent an air lock and siphoning. Figure 21 A flexible connection must be made to a vented drain system to prevent an air lock and to prevent siphoning. IMPORTANT: Washer-extractor must be instaiied in accordance with all local codes and ordinances. If proper drain size is not available or practical, a surge tank is required. A surge tank in conjunction with a sump pump should be used when gravity drainage is not possible, such as in below-ground-level installations. Before any deviation from specified installation procedures is attempted, the customer or installer should contact the distributor. Increasing the drain hose length, installing elbows, or causing bends will decrease drain flow rate and increase drain times, impairing washer-extractor performance. DRAIN TROUGH CONFIGURATION 11 1 2 3 4 5 Rear of Machine Drain Pipe 1 Inch Minimum Air Gap Steel Grate Drain Trough Strainer Waste Line Figure 22 Refer to Table 6 for capacity-specific drain information. Installation of additional washer-extractors will require proportionately larger drain connections. Refer to Table 7. 42 © Copyright, Alliance Laundry Systems LLC - DO NOT COPY or TRANSMIT F8138601 Specifications and Dimensions IMPORTANT: Do not block the overflow vent above the drain line. If water or suds flow from the overflow vent and the machine has been verified to be operating properly with proper water levels and correct amount of laundry chemicals, a drain line may be added to the vent and routed to a drain trough. 1. Remove the riveted bracket on the rear panel for access to the overflow vent pipe. 2. Route a drain pipe from the vent pipe to a drain trough. Drain pipe should be routed straight across or down and be suspended above drain trough by at least 3 inches (7.62 cm). IMPORTANT: Do not route the overflow vent pipe to a direct drain system. Drain Information Specifications 35 60 80 100 125 150 Drain connection size, O.D., in. (mm) with second drain: 2.375 (60) 3(76) 3(76) 3(76) 3(76) 3(77) Number of drain outlets 1 1 2 2 2 2 Drain flow capacity, gal/min. (l/min.) 35 (132) 64 (242) 120 (454) 120 (454) 140 (530) 140(530) Recommended drain pit size, ft^ (1) t 5 (142) 6(170) 9 (255) 11 (311) 13 (368) 13 (368) fSized for one machine using overflow level. Table 6 Drain Line Sizing Minimum Drain l.D., in. (mm) Model Number of Machines Model 1 2 3 4 35 3 (76.2) 3 (76.2) 3.5 (88.9) 4(102) 60 3 (76.2) 4(102) 6(152) 6(152) 80 4(102) 6(152) 6(152) 8 (203) 100 4(102) 6(152) 6(152) 8(203) 125 4(102) 6(152) 6(152) 8 (203) 150 4(102) 6(152) 6(152) 8(203) Table 7 F8138601 ) Copyright, Alliance Laundry Systems LLC - DO NOT COPY or TRANSMIT 43 Specifications and Dimensions Water Connection WARNING To prevent personal injury, avoid contact with inlet water temperatures higher than 125° Fahrenheit (51° Celsius) and hot surfaces. W748 Maximum water inlet temperature is 190° Fahrenheit (88° Celsius). Water Supply Information Specifications 35 60 80/100 125/150 Number of main fill water inlets 2 2 2 2 Main fill water inlet size, in. (mm) 3/4(19) 3/4(19) 3/4(19) 1 (25.4) Number of Spray Rinse water inlets 2 2 2 2 Spray rinse water inlet size, in. (mm) 3/4(19) 3/4(19) 3/4(19) 3/4(19) Recommended pressure, psi (bar) 30 - 85 (2 - 5.7) Inlet flow capacity (80 psi), gal/min. (i/min) 31 (117) 39(148) 41 (155) 48(182) Table 8 Connections should be supplied by hot and cold water lines of at least the sizes shown in the Water Supply Line Sizing table. Installation of additional machines will require proportionately larger water lines. Refer to Table 9. Flush the water lines before connecting them to the machine. 44 © Copyright, Alliance Laundry Systems LLC - DO NOT COPY or TRANSMIT F8138601 Specifications and Dimensions To connect water service to machine with rubber hoses, use the following procedure: 1. Before installing hoses, flush the water system for at least two minutes. 2. Check filters in the washer-extractor's inlet hoses for proper fit and cleanliness before connecting. 3. Hang the hoses in a large loop; do not allow them to kink. If additional hose lengths are needed, use flexible hoses with screen filters. Each hose should have a screen filter installed to keep mst and other foreign particles out of the water inlet valves. Pressure oF30 - 85 psi (2 - 5.7 bar) provides best perFormance. Although the washer-extractor will Function properly at lower pressures, increased fill times will occur. Suitable air cushions should be installed in supply lines to prevent "hammering." ReFer to Figure 23. For machines labeled with the CE mark, backsiphon protection devices must be installed previous oF all machine water inlet valves in accordance with accepted European standards. Air Cushions (Risers) Water Supply Faucets Water Supply Line Sizing 5 o Number Supply Line Size, in. (mm) Q. 2. of Machines Main Hot/Cold 1 1(25) 0.75(19) 35 2 1.5 (38) 1(25) 35 3 2(50) 1.25 (32) 4 2(50) 1.5 (38) 1 1.25 (32) 1 (25) 60 2 2(50) 1.25 (32) 60 3 2(50) 1.5 (38) 4 2.5 (64) 2(50) 1 1.25 (32) 1(25) 80 2 2(50) 1.25 (32) 80 3 2(50) 1.5 (38) 4 2.5 (64) 2(50) 1 1.5 (38) 1 (25) 100 2 2(50) 1.5 (38) 100 3 2(50) 1.5 (38) 4 2.5 (64) 2(50) 1 2(50) 1.25 (32) 125 2 2.5 (64) 2(50) 125 3 2.5 (64) 2(50) 4 2.5 (64) 2.5 (64) 1 2(50) 1.25 (32) 150 2 2.5 (64) 2(50) 150 3 2.5 (64) 2(50) 4 2.5 (64) 2.5 (64) Table 9 Figure 23 F8138601 ) Copyright, Alliance Laundry Systems LLC - DO NOT COPY or TRANSMIT 45 Specifications and Dimensions Electrical Installation Requirements IMPORTANT: Electrical ratings are subject to change. Refer to serial decal for electrical ratings information speciflc to your machine. WARNING This machine must be installed, adjusted, and serviced by qualified electrical maintenance personnel familiar with the construction and operation of this type of machinery. They must also be familiar with the potential hazards involved. Failure to observe this warning may result in personal injury and/or equipment damage, and may void the warranty. A WARNING Dangerous voltages are present in the electrical control box(es) and at the motor terminals. Only qualified personnel familiar with electrical test procedures, test equipment, and safety precautions should attempt adjustments and troubleshooting. Disconnect power from the machine and wait 3 minutes before removing the control box cover, and before attempting any service procedures. WARNING Ensure that a ground wire from a proven earth ground is connected to the ground lug near the input power block on this machine. Without proper grounding, personal injury from electric shock could occur and machine malfunctions may be evident. SW008 Electrical connections are made atthe rear ofthe machine. The machine must be connected to the proper electrical supply shown on the identification plate attached to the rear oF the machine, using copper conductors only. IMPORTANT: Alliance Laundry Systems warranty does not cover components that fail as a result of improper input voltage. Make sure the correct transformer jumper (208 Volt or 240 Volt) is in place. Refer to the "optional" Electrical Service Connection label located on the back of the machine near the electrical service input For machine electrical requirements. ReFer to Figure 24. 0PTi0iui.EUCTmc«iSERna CONKECnON BASED OM MtlLABUIT Thts unt nuy tio Kdd converted by a OUALIFIED Electiiciai to tt« loUoHing 20Q-?0a UolK and/ot 50 Hem PRIOn TO CONNECTING ELECTRICAL SEHVEE, COHPIEIE THE FOLLOWING 200-208VAC COMVEHSION '""I-IH VAC: 200-208 WIRES S GHOUNE): • 1 . ..vfcBBa^ PHASE:- RECO BREAKER:- orlanal«SDluJ 1 AMPS;- 1 1 SOfteCONVERSUH • 1. FMv to ti> CoiBDl Opkn Msnm 0PTi0iui.EUCTmc«iSERna CONKECnON BASED OM MtlLABUIT Thts unt nuy tio Kdd converted by a OUALIFIED Electiiciai to tt« loUoHing 20Q-?0a UolK and/ot 50 Hem PRIOn TO CONNECTING ELECTRICAL SEHVEE, COHPIEIE THE FOLLOWING huidn dbgnmpadt ^ U SOfteCONVERSUH • 1. FMv to ti> CoiBDl Opkn Msnm 0PTi0iui.EUCTmc«iSERna CONKECnON BASED OM MtlLABUIT Thts unt nuy tio Kdd converted by a OUALIFIED Electiiciai to tt« loUoHing 20Q-?0a UolK and/ot 50 Hem PRIOn TO CONNECTING ELECTRICAL SEHVEE, COHPIEIE THE FOLLOWING Ops--™ {SKM (EWE) O, Q, X AND Y - VOLTAGE MODELS QpnONiU. ELECTRICAL SERVICE COXNECnON BASED Qt* AVAILAUUTV iC CONVERSION SMtzCtmVERSKM N, P AND R - VOLTAGE MODELS ''^^^'^ Figure 24 On variable-speed models, the AC inverter drive requires a clean power supply Free From voltage spikes and surges. A voltage monitor should be used to check incoming power. The customer's local power company may provide such a monitor. The Following conditions require corrective action, contact the local utility to adjust the voltage. IF the local utility cannot adjust the input voltage, install a buckboost transFormer to lower the input voltage. Input voltage is above 240V or 480V, phase to ground voltage exceeds 125% oF normal line to line voltage, or 240V open delta configuration (stinger leg). Contact the distributor or the manuFacturer For assistance. 46 © Copyright, Alliance Laundry Systems LLC - DO NOT COPY or TRANSMIT F8138601 Specifications and Dimensions On variable-speed models, the AC drive provides thermal overload protection for the drive motor. However, a separate three-phase circuit breaker must be installed for complete electrical overload protection. This prevents damage to the motor by disconnecting all legs if one should be lost accidentally. Check the serial plate on the back of the washer-extractor for recommended circuit breaker requirements size. IMPORTANT: Do NOT use fuses in place ofa circuit breaker. CAUTION Do not use a phase adder on any variable- speed machine. The washer-extractor should be connected to an individual branch circuit not shared with lighting or other equipment. The connection should be shielded in a liquid-tight or approved flexible conduit with proper conductors of correct size installed in accordance with the National Electric Code or other applicable codes. The connection must be made by a qualified electrician using the wiring diagram provided with the washer- extractor, or according to accepted European standards for equipment labeled with the CE mark. Refer to serial plate for recommended circuit breaker size and determine wire size based on local code requirements. Refer to serial plate for recommended wire sizes for runs up to 50 feet (15.24 meters). Use next larger size for runs of 50 to 100 feet (15.24 to 30.48 meters). Use 2 sizes larger for runs greater than 100 feet (30.48 meters). For personal safety and for proper operation, the washer-extractor must be grounded in accordance with state and local codes. If such codes are not available, grounding must conform with the National Electric Code, article 250 (current edition) or accepted European standards for equipment labeled with the CE mark. The ground connection must be made to a proven earth ground, not to conduit or water pipes. Refer to Figure 25 and 26. WARNING Electrically heated machines DO NOT require dual power sources. Do not connect customer power or customer load to the Internal Load Distribution terminal block. Refer to the machine electrical schematic for details. L2 1\^L3 f SERVICE GROUND 3v. 0 o © ® s 0 0 0_ o o @ ® s o 0 0 o o © <D 0 o o CHASIS °] o a TBI MACHINES WITH ELECTRIC HEAT PHM700N Grounding Lug: Connect to proven earth ground Customer Input Power Terminals Internal Load Distribution - DO NOT connect customer power source or load. Figure 25 MACHINES WITHOUT ELECTRIC HEAT PHM721N 1 Grounding Lug: Connect to proven earth ground 2 Customer Input Power Terminals Figure 26 F8138601 ) Copyright, Alliance Laundry Systems LLC - DO NOT COPY orTF?ANSMIT 47 Specifications and Dimensions Machines can be converted for lower voltage operation and/or 50 Hz operation. Refer to conversion label by serial plate For details. After electrical installation is complete, run the machine through a test cycle and check For a clockwise basket rotation during the extract step. IF rotation is not clockwise, disconnect the power From the machine and have a qualified electrician reverse any 2 motor leads. 46 © Copyright, Alliance Laundry Systems LLC - DO NOT COPY or TRANSMIT F8138601 Specifications and Dimensions Table 5 (continued) Voltage Designation Non-Electric Heat Machines (Standard) Electric Heat Machines Model Code Voltage Cycle Phase Wire Full Load Amps Breaker *AWG 3 3 to Full Load Amps Breaker *AWG 3 3 to 35 X (Through 7/31/09) 200-240 50/60 1/3 2/3 12/8 15/15 14/14 2.5/2.5 NOT AVAILABLE 35 X (Starting 8/1/09) 200 - 240 50/60 1/3 2/3 15/8 20/15 12/14 4/2.5 NOT AVAILABLE 35 Q 200 - 240 50/60 3 3 8 15 14 2.5 42 50 6 16 35 Q** 208 - 240 60 3 3 7 20 12 4 38 50 6 16 35 R (Through 10/1/10) 380-480 50/60 3 3 6 15 14 2.5 23 30 10 6 35 N (Starting 10/4/10) 440 - 480 50/60 3 3 6 15 14 2.5 23 30 10 6 35 P (Starting 10/4/10) 380-415 50/60 3 3 6 15 14 2.5 23 30 10 6 60 X 200 - 240 50/60 1/3 2/3 15/9 20/15 12/14 4/2.5 NOT AVAILABLE 60 Q 200 - 240 50/60 3 3 9 15 14 2.5 71 80 3 25 60 o** 208 - 240 60 3 3 11 30 10 6 66 80 3 30 60 R (Through 10/1/10) 380-480 50/60 3 3 7 15 14 2.5 37 40 8 10 60 N (Starting 10/4/10) 440 - 480 50/60 3 3 7 15 14 2.5 37 40 8 10 60 P (Starting 10/4/10) 380-415 50/60 3 3 7 15 14 2.5 37 40 8 10 80 Q (Through 4/13/10) 200 - 240 50/60 3 3 9 15 14 2.5 105 110 1 50 80 Q (Starting 4/14/10) 200 - 240 50/60 3 3 14 20 14 2.5 105 no 1 50 80 R (Through 10/1/10) 380-480 50/60 3 3 10 15 14 2.5 39 40 8 10 80 N (Starting 10/4/10) 440 - 480 50/60 3 3 10 15 14 2.5 39 40 8 10 80 P (Starting 10/4/10) 380-415 50/60 3 3 10 15 14 2.5 39 40 8 10 Table 10 (continued) F8138601 ) Copyright, Alliance Laundry Systems LLC - DO NOT COPY or TFJANSMIT 49 Specifications and Dimensions Voltage Designation Non-Electric Heat Machines (Standard) Electric Heat Machines Model O o a (0 sr ca (D O «< o (D TJ IT B> W (D (D Full Load Amps W <D Bl 3r (D * 1 a 3 3 to Full Load Amps CO (D B> « -1 i o * 3 3 to Q (Through 4/13/10) 200-240 50/60 3 3 10 15 14 2.5 108 110 1 50 Q (Starting 4/14/10) 200 - 240 50/60 3 3 14 20 14 2.5 108 110 1 50 100 R (Through 10/1/10) 380-480 50/60 3 3 10 15 14 2.5 40 50 6 16 N (Starting 10/4/10) 440 - 480 50/60 3 3 10 15 14 2.5 40 50 6 16 P (Starting 10/4/10) 380-415 50/60 3 3 10 15 14 2.5 40 50 6 16 Q 200-240 50/60 3 3 9 15 14 2.5 R (Through 10/1/10) 380 - 480 50/60 3 3 8 15 14 2.5 NOT AVAILABLE 125 N (Starting 10/4/10) 440-480 50/60 3 3 8 15 14 2.5 74 80 4 25 P (Starting 10/4/10) 380-415 50/60 3 3 8 15 14 2.5 65 70 4 25 Q 200-240 50/60 3 3 16 20 12 4 R (Through 10/1/10) 380 - 480 50/60 3 3 11 15 14 2.5 150 N (Starting 10/4/10) 440 - 480 50/60 3 3 11 15 14 2.5 NOT AVAILABLE P (Starting 10/4/10) 380-415 50/60 3 3 11 15 14 2.5 * NOTE: Wire sizing listed in this table is based on Article 310, Table 310.16 ofthe NEC; at 104°F (40°C) ambient temperature. Follow your local electrical codes. Use only copper conductors, rated for 194°F (90°C) or higher, type THHN or better. No more than three current carrying conductors per raceway. Contact your local Authority having jurisdiction if you have questions. Circuit breakers should be UL 489 listed or better. Single phase circuit breakers for single phase machines only; three phase circuit breakers for all others. ** M30 Control Models only. Table 10 50 ) Copyright, Alliance Laundry Systems LLC - DO NOT COPY or TRANSMIT F8138601 steam Requirements (Steam Heat Option Only) WARNING Never touch internal or external steam pipes, connections, or components. These surfaces can be extremely hot and will cause severe burns. The steam must be turned off and the pipe, connections, and components allowed to cool before the pipe can be touched. Specifications and Dimensions For washer-extractors equipped with optional steam heat, install piping in accordance with approved commercial steam practices. Steam requirements are shown in Table 11. NOTE: Failure to install the supplied steam filter may void the warranty. Steam Supply Information 35 60 80 100 125/150 Steam inlet connection, in. (mm) 1/2 (DN13) 1/2 (DNI3) 1/2 (DN13) 1/2 (DNI3) 3/4 (DN19) Number of steam inlets 1 1 1 1 1 Recommended pressure, psi (bar) 30-85 (2.0-5.9) 30-85 (2.0 - 5.9) 30-85 (2.0 - 5.9) 30-85 (2.0-5.9) 30-85 (2.0 - 5.9) Maximum pressure, psi (bar) 85 (5.9) 85 (5.9) 85 (5.9) 85 (5.9) 85 (5.9) Table 11 F8138601 © Copyright, Alliance Laundry Systems LLC - DO NOT COPY or TF?ANSMIT 51 Specifications and Dimensions Chemical Injection Supply System WARNING Wear eye and hand protection when handling chemicals; always avoid direct contact with raw chemicals. Read the manufacturer's directions for accidental contact before handling chemicals. Ensure an eye-rinse facility and an emergency shower are within easy reach. Check at regular intervals for chemical leaks. Undiluted chemical dripping can damage the washer- extractor. Therefore, all chemical supply dispenser pumps should be mounted below the washer's injection point. All dispenser tubing should also run below the injection point. Loops do not prevent drips if these instructions are not followed. Failure to follow these instructions could damage the machine and void the warranty. Figure 27 shows a typical Chemical Injection Supply System. Injection Point Loops 3 Chemical Dispenser Pump Outlet 4 PVC Pipe Figure 27 52 © Copyright, Alliance Laundry Systems LLC - DO NOT COPY or TRANSMIT F8138601 Specifications and Dimensions 1 Tubing from Pump 2 Seal Nut 3 Tubing Ring 4 Base 5 Lid 6 Nut Figure 28 Connecting External Liquid Supplies to tfie V\/asher-Extractor 1. Remove knockout from supply dispenser. ReFer to Figure 28. Plugs are assembled inside the tubing ring. 2. Install PG connector in hole with strain relieFs, included in the seal nut. 3. Insert tubes through PG base. Do not remove cups. Tube should extend into the plastic cup, with the exception oF the softener tube, which should be routed to the outside oF the cup. 4. Tighten the seal nut to prevent tubing From escaping the assembly. 5. BeFore operating machine, confirm lid is completely closed. Do not attempt to make chemical injection electrical connections to points other than those provided specifically For that purpose by the Factory. Chemical Injection Supply System Number of dry supply compartments 5 Number of extemal liquid supply connections 8 Liquid supply connection size, in. (mm) 0.625 (15.9) A bracket, which is located on the left side of the control module, has been provided for mounting the external supply controls. This bracket is present only on models made through 6/30/08. Refer to Figures 5 through 10. F8138601 ) Copyright, Alliance Laundry Systems LLC - DO NOT COPY or TFIANSMIT 53 Specifications and Dimensions 1 Strain Relief for Liquid Chemical Supply Lines 4 Dry Supply Cups 2 Supply Dispenser Lid 5 Dry Supply Insert 3 Nozzles 6 Polypropylene Supply Dispenser IMPORTANT: Do not attach anything to nozzles. Air gap must be maintained. Figure 29 54 © Copyright Alliance Laundry Systems LLC - DO NOT COPY or TRANSMIT F8138601 Specifications and Dimensions External Supplies For proper communication between the washer- extractor and an extemal chemical supply system, it is important for the signal power to be connected properly. The included wiring diagram (FSI33502) shows several different options For saFe and correct wiring oF this interFace. The preFerred method For connecting the wiring From the external chemical supply system to the washer- extractor is to use the 300mA power oF the washer- extractor's 24VAC control transFormer, which is intended strictly For this purpose. Other voltage and current options are available, but require some wiring changes and must be provided with an extemal power source. Under no circumstances should the high- voltage machine supply connections or source be used For the communication wiring. Communication wiring connections, which include a single row oF identified terminal blocks, can be Found under a service panel at the upper back oFthe machine. ReFer to Figure 30. j n BID aia BID DBI BID DBI BID DBI BJO D|g| BID Dia BID DB BID DBI E -HD DBI j BID D|a Bl Bl ] BID oBI Bl Bl BID D@ P BID Dia Bio Dia I BID Dia BID DBI BD OBI P BID ojgl Bio oBl BID DB) BID DBI P BID DS EXTERNAL MVENSER CQMNECTiaHS EXAMKE FOR EXTERNAL DISPENSER CONNECTION -|[-ESt -|f-ES2 -||-ES3 -][-ES4 -(1-ES5 -j|-ES6 "il"^^^ JUMPER FOR IHTERMAL -||-ES8 SUPPLV 1 I 24 VAC ExtamI HtiMiciag Sfstan Figure 30 F8138601 © Copyright, Alliance Laundry Systems LLC - DO NOT COPY or TRANSMIT 55 Specifications and Dimensions Chemical Injection Using Internal 24VAC Control Transformer NOTE: Using the Internal 24VAC 300 Milliamp Control Transformer is recommended by Alliance Laundry Systems. IMPORTANT: DO NOT remove the red jumper wire from the terminal strip. There are 3 terminals necessary for this connection option. • Terminal "24VAC COM" is used to connect one side of the intemal control transformer to the extemal dispenser input signals common. • The second terminal is used to connect the other side of the control transFormer to the washer- extractor output signals common through a red jumper wire between "24VAC" and "RELAY COM". ReFer to Figure 31. IMPORTANT: Do not use the transformer terminals if an external power supply is used. I. EXTERNAL DISPENSER SUPPLY CONNECTION 1. 24 VAC INTERNAL SUPPLY CONNECTION 1 2 3 4 External Supply Power Intemal Control Transfonner RELAY COM Tenninai Extemal Supply Common 5 Red Jumper Wire 6 24VAC Tenninai 7 24VAC COM Tenninai Figure 31 56 ) Copyright, Alliance Laundry Systems LLC - DO NOT COPY or TRANSMIT F8138601 Specifications and Dimensions Chemical injection Using External AC Power Source NOTE: An External AC Power Source is NOT provided by Alliance Laundry Systems. NOTE: Power for external supplies must not be derived from the high-voltage main power connection point. IMPORTANT: The external power must supply power of 240VAC or less and be protected at 3 Amps or less. 1. Remove the red jumper wire installed by the factory between "24VAC": and "RELAY COM' 2. Connect one side of the external power to the "RELAY COM" and the other to the extemal dispenser input signals common. Refer to Figure 32. I. EXTERNAL DISPENSER SUPPLY CONNECTION 2. EXTERNAL AC CONNECTION External Supply Power Red Jumper Wire External Supply Common 4 VAC Power Terminal 5 VAC RETURN Terminal Figure 32 CAUTION Do not attempt to increase fuse rating or alter wiring of external chemical supply terminal strip in such as way that may conflict with the suggested methods provided on the Optional External Supply Wiring Diagram. F8138601 ) Copyright, Alliance Laundry Systems LLC - DO NOT COPY or TRANSMIT 57 Specifications and Dimensions External Supply Signals Wash-cycle signals are provided to the extemal chemical supply equipment and a "wait for the next step" signal can be received From the supply equipment. For example, iFESl is selected the Kl contact will close and power will be supplied to Supply 1 Signal. The contact will remain closed For the amount oF time programmed in control. ReFer to Figure 33 For Intemal Supply Connection or Figure 34 For Extemal AC Connection. EXTERNAL DISPENSER SUPPLY CONNECTION 1. 2^ VAC INTERNAL SUPPLY CONNECTION 1 JUMPER WRE CHLMICAL COMPANY MACHINE iNTtRFACE BOARD/SY^Fi " - NEUTRAL ^' = POWER 1 ESI Power supply 2 Kl Contact Supply 1 Signal Figure 33 58 > Copyright, Alliance Laundry Systems LLC - DO NOT COPY orTF?ANSMIT F8138601 Specifications and Dimensions I. EXTERNAL DISPENSER SUPPLY CONNECTION 2. EXTERNAL AC CONNECTION ESI Power supply Kl Contact Supply 1 Signal Figure 34 F8138601 © Copyright, Alliance Laundry Systems LLC - DO NOT COPY or TRANSMIT 59 PureFlow Water Systems viega n. ir • Installation Manual 0 May 2011 PureFlow is a registered trademark of Viega LLC MAN/VBLOC is a registered lrademarl< of Viega LLC ViegaPEX is a trademarl( of Viega LLC FostaPEX is a registered trademark of Viega GmbH & Co. KG Copyright April 2009 Viega LLC, All rights reserved. Viega IM-PF 0411 Working with Viega is the perfect solution. Viega researches, develops and produces complete system solutions for contractors. The components are produced at our plants or are supplied exclusively by the finest quality manufacturers. Each of our systems Is developed in-house and tested under stringent quality control conditions to guarantee safety and efficient operation. An international company with a national commitment. Viega PureFlow plumbing combines technology from both sides of the Atlantic into the very best PEX plumbing systems for our customers. Viega's reach extends throughout North America with distribution across the U.S., Canada and Mexico. Our network of sales experts and wholesale distributors can meet your needs whether you are in Boston or Berkeley. The products we deliver are the finest quality offered at a highly competitive price. Our goal is to remain on the forefront of the plumbing industry well into the new century, and with our advanced products and a determination to remain the quality leader, we are convinced this accomplishment is well within our reach. Call 800-976-9819 for your local representative and wholesale location. IMPORTANT NOTICE This installation guide is intended for traditional (branch and main) plumbing systems and hybrid plumbing systems using termination manifolds, MANABLOC® and MINIBLOC parallel / manifold plumbing system. NOTE: References to ViegaPEX™ tubing made throughout this publication include the entire line of Viega cross- linked polyethylene products. NOTE: References to ZERO LEAD throughout this publication identifies meeting the lead free requirements of Califomia and Vermont law effective January 1, 2010, as tested and listed against NSF-61, Annex G. 2 Why you can depend on Viega PureFlow. • A safe system • Competitively priced • Leakproof fitting connection • Highly flexible and kink resistant • Lightweight and easy to handle • Fast and solder-free installation • No open flame during installation • Reduced number of fittings used in wall • Long life expectancy • Non-corroding • Reduced flow noises • In coils or straight lengths • FostaPEX form stable tubing ideal for exposed runs • Listed by NSF to meet the requirements of ANS114 and 61 and PEX5006 (CLS). • Listed to ASTM F876 and F877 IN THE EVENT OF CONFLICT OR INCONSISTENCY BETWEEN THESE INSTALLATION GUIDELINES AND LOCAL BUILDING OR PLUMBING CODES, LOCAL CODES SHOULD TAKE PRECEDENCE. NOTE: Failure to follow the installation instructions will void the Viega Plumbing Warranty. Nothing in this publication is intended to create any wan-anty beyond Viega's applicable warranty. For additional information, contact Viega at 800-976-9819. CONTENTS viega 1 Irrtroduction 1.1 Viega 5 1.2 PureFlow System Concepts 6 2 Green Building 2.1 General 7 2.2 Structured Plumbing 7 2.2.1 Parallel Systems 7 2.2.2 Branch and Main Systems 8 2.2.3 Combination Systems 9 2.2.4 Domestic Hot Water Circulating Systems 9 3 ViegaPEX Tubing 3.1 General 10 3.2 PEX - the superior tubing 10 3.3 Colors 10 3.4 ViegaPEX Properties and Perfonmance 10 3.5 Tubing Markings 10 3.6 ViegaPEX Tubing Dimensions 10 3.7 ViegaPEX Sizes 10 4 ViegaPEX Ultra Tubing 4.1 General 11 4.2 PEX — the superior tubing 11 4.3 Colors 11 4.4 ViegaPEX Ultra Properties and Performance 11 4.5 Tubing Markings 11 4.6 ViegaPEX Ultra Tubing Dimensions 11 4.7 ViegaPEX Ultra Sizes 11 5 FostaPEX Tubing 5.1 General 12 5.2 Advantages of FostaPEX 12 5.3 Colors 12 5.4 FostaPEX Properties and Performance 12 5.5 Tubing Mari<ings 12 5.6 FostaPEX Tubing Dimensions 12 5.7 FostaPEX Sizes 12 6 PureFlow PEX Press Fittings 6.1 Bronze PEX Press with Attached Sleeve 13 6.1.1 Bronze PEX Press Fittings, Manifolds and Sleeves 13 6.1.2 Bronze PEX Press Fitting Markings 13 6.2 PEX Press Connection with Attached Sleeve 14 6.2.1 The PureFlow PEX Press Hand Tool 14 6.2.2 The PureFlow PEX Press Power Tool 14 6.2.3 The PureFlow PEX Press Fitting 14 6.2.4 Making a PureFlow PEX Press Hand Tool Connection (Attached Sleeves) 15 6.2.5 Making a PureFlow PEX Press Power Tool Connection (Attached Sleeves) 16 7 PureFlow PEX Crimp Fittings 7.1 Brass PEX Crimp 17 7.1.1 Brass PEX Crimp Fittings, Manifolds and Crimp Rings... 17 7.1.2 Brass PEX Crimp Fitting Markings 17 7.2 PolyAlloy™ PEX Crimp 18 7.2.1 PolyAlloy PEX Crimp Fittings and Crimp Rings 18 7.2.2 PolyAlloy PEX Crimp Fitting Markings 18 7.3 PEX Crimp Connections 19 7.3.1 The PureFlow PEX Crimp Hand Tool 19 7.3.2 The PureFlow PEX Crimp Fitting 19 7.3.3 Making a PureFlow PEX Crimp Connection 20 8 TheMANABLOC 8.1 The MANABLOC 21 8.1.1 MANABLOC PEX Connections 21 8.1.2 MANABLOC Markings 21 9 System Sizing and Calculations 9.1 System Sizing and Calculations 22 10 Installing the PureFlow PEX Tubing System 10.1 Handling PureFlow Tubing 24 10.2 Uncoiling PureFlow Tubing 24 10.3 Bending PureFlow Tubing 24 10.4 Installation Temperature Range 25 10.5 Removing PureFlow PEX Connections 25 10.6 Repairs 25 10.7 Tubing Expansion 26 10.8 Freezing 26 10.9 Water Heaters 27 10.10 Heaters, Flues, Vents and Recessed Lights 27 10.11 Continuously Recirculating Hot Water Plumbing Loops 27 10.12 Noise and Water Hammer in PEX Systems 28 10.13 Shower Valves 28 10.14 Electrical Grounding 28 10.15 Pressure Testing 28 11 Fastening the PureFlow System 11.1 Wood Frame Construction 29 11.2 Supporting PureFlow Tubing 29 11.3 Steel Construction 30 11.4 Concrete 30 11.5 Installing Under the Slab 30 11.6 Below Grade and Service Line 31 11.7 Foundation Penetration 31 11.8 Direct Burial of PureFlow Fittings 31 11.9 Protecting PEX Tubing 32 12 Installing Manifolds and Fittings 12.1 General 33 12.2 PureFlow PEX Press Brazed Copper Manifolds 33 12.3 PEX Press ProPress Manifolds 33 12.4 PureFlow PEX Crimp Brazed Copper Manifolds 33 12.5 PureFlow MANABLOC Homerun Manifold Plumbing System.. 33 12.6 Stub Out Options 34 12.7 Copper Connections 34 12.8 Threaded Connections 35 12.9 Valves 35 13 PureFlow MANABLOC System Design and Sizing 13.1 General 37 13.2 Supply and Distribution Line Sizing 37 13.3 Plumbing Code Compliance (Parallel Systems) 37 13.4 Valve Requirements for Parallel Systems 37 14 Installing the MANABLOC 14.1 General 38 14.2 Overview and Carton Contents 38 14.3 Location 38 14.4 Valve Operation 40 14.5 Domestic Hot Water Circulation Systems 40 14.6 Multiple MANABLOC Installations 40 14.7 ViegaPEX General Design/Installation Practices 40 Viega IM-PF 0511 520709 f CONTENTS 15 Mounting the MANABLOC 15.1 Mounting the MANABLOC Between Studs 42 15.2 Mounting the MANABLOC Between Studs Without Use of 45716 Straps 43 15.3 Mounting the MANABLOC Without Studs, Surface Mount.... 44 16 Installing MANABLOC Distribution Lines 16.1 Installing MANABLOC Distribution Unes 46 16.2 Connecting Distribution Lines to the MANABLOC 46 16.2.1 Compression Connections (3/8" & 1/2" ports) 47 16.2.2 PEX Press Connections (1/2" ports) 47 16.2.3 PEX Crimp Connection (1/2" ports) 48 16.3 Connecting Distribution Lines to Fixtures 49 16.4 Water Supply Connections 49 16.5 Filling and Testing the MANABLOC 50 16.6 Draining the MANABLOC System 50 16.7 To Completely Drain the System 50 17 Pressure Testing PureFlow Systems 17.1 General 51 17.2 Leak Detection 52 18 System Disinfection 18.1 General 53 19 Codes, Standards and Approvals 19.1 Codes 54 19.2 Standards 54 19.3 Listings and Certifications 54 PureHow Warranty 55 Terms Used in This Guide: PEX ViegaPEX cross-linked polyethylene tubing AHJ ; Authority Having Jurisdiction PPM Parts Per Million NSF NSF International, Inc. (formerly National Sanitation Foundation) CAtsl/CSA Canadian Standards Association "shall" Required; a mandatory procedure Viega IM-PF 0511 520709 T J 1. INTRODUCTION viega 1.1 Viega For over 100 years, Viega has been a trusted name in the plumbing business globally. Through innovative techniques, sophisticated technologies and acquisition of the top PEX plumbing products in the U.S. Viega has become the industry leader for PEX plumbing. Viega produces a comprehensive range of plumbing and heating equipment. Anywhere that water flows in a building Viega manufactures a system to fit. The company's expenence with press fitting technology in bronze, stainless steel and copper led to the development of the PureFlow water distribution system. Viega is positioned as the number-one supplier of PEX plumbing systems in North America. Today Viega engineers and manufactures more than 12,000 system components at six state-of- the-art factories including our PEX tubing facility located in the heart of the U.S. Viega quality has proven itself in millions of systems installed each year around the world. Viega has a history in North America of technological innovation and customer service that is second to none. The Viega product line now is composed of multiple brands including ProPress® flameless copper and ProPress® stainless steel joining technology, PureFlow*' flexible PEX tubing plumbing technology, ProRadiant" comfortable efficient heating technology and S-no- Ice® snow and ice melting technology, to name a few. Each line is selected so that components work together to create a complete system concept. PureFlow plumbing provides complete PEX systems for potable water distribution, including manifolds, PEX and multilayer tubing, fittings and valves. PureFlow fire sprinkler provides a PEX system for multipurpose one and two family residential fire sprinkler systems, per NFPA 13D, including fittings and ViegaPEX Ultra Black PEX tubing in sizes 3/4" to 2". The ProRadiant program includes a wide range of hydronic radiant systems and controls as well as thermostats and setpoint controls. In addition, the Viega S-no-lce line includes snow and ice detection controls, heat exchangers and snow melting systems. As the pioneer in combining technology and engineering expertise from both sides of the Atlantic into the very best systems for our customers in North America, we are proud to present you the world's finest potable water distribution systems: PureFlow. The name says it all. We look forward to sharing our history in the making with you. Viega IM-PF 0511 520709 1.2 PureFlow System Concepts ViegaPEX PureFlow is a high-quality flexible PEiX system for hot and cold potable water distribution. The PureFlow plumbing system offers maximum security thanks to cold press and full circle crimp fitting techniques. These fittings guarantee the plumber quick installation, suitability for use in all types of applications at the construction site and vast reductions in the required number of fittings and necessary installation time. Top quality materials such as brass, bronze, stainless steel and durable, environmentally compatible plastics provide the basis for the very highest standards of quality at Viega. Viega offers a full line of Zero Lead products that meet the requirements of California AB 1953, Vermont ACT 193, and NSF 61 Annex G, which require less than 0.25% lead in all plumbing fittings used in cooking and drinking water systems. All Viega plastic and copper articles are naturally lead free and comply with the new legislation. ZERO LEAD identifies Viega products meeting the lead free requirements of California and Vermont law, effective January , 2010, as tested and listed against NSF-61, Annex G. PEX tubing offers outstanding versatility. More than 930 million feet of Viega PEX Tubing has been manufactured since 2006. This is conclusive evidence of this product's considerable importance in plumbing installation, in both quality and quantity. This is clearly the result of excellent workmanship, fast and simple installation and the reliability and safety which are characteristic of the Viega system concept. The efficiency of the integrated system concept for Viega branded products is confirmed by: • Perfectly coordinated components • Quick delivery at short notice • Time-saving installation • Complete installation of an entire system from one supplier Viega's comprehensive services include technical support and warranty coverage, subject to the exclusive use of PureFlow system components. PureFlow is a high-quality plumbing system. It is able to withstand high levels of thermal and mechanical stress (180°F at 100 psi, 73.4°Fat160 psi). The systems incorporate: • ViegaPEX tubing: red, white and blue cross-linked polyethylene tubing designed with superior chlorine resistance • ViegaPEX Ultra tubing: red, white, blue, and black cross-linked polyethylene tubing with added resistance to UV • ViegaPEX Ultra black tubing: UL 1821 listed for use in multipurpose one and two family fire sprinkler systems per NFPA 13D. • Viega FostaPEX tubing: cross-linked polyethylene with additional aluminum and polyethylene layers to provide rigidity and form stability, available in red or silver to differentiate hot water lines • A range of standard and zero lead bronze, brass or plastic fittings for PEX Press and PEX Crimp fitting systems • PureFlow MANABLOC distribution system for use with Viega PEX tubing • A range of inline, manifold and stop valves for ViegaPEX fitting systems • Viega PureFlow press tools and jaws for the PEX Press fitting systems • Viega PureFlow crimp tools for the PEX Crimp fitting systems Viega IM-PF 0511 520709 2. GREEN BUILDING viega 2.1 General Green Building incorporates environmental considerations into every phase of the home building process. Multiple factors are considered during construction as well as its operation and its impact on the environment. LEED® (Leadership in Energy and Environmental Design) was established by the U.S. Green Building Council (USGBC) as a system to define and measure "green building." This voluntary market- driven rating system is based on existing, proven technology, and awards credits for different aspects of environmental design. There are four levels of performance that can be achieved per these resource categories: Certified, Silver, Gold and Platinum. Viega's PureFlow plumbing systems can be incorporated to improve both water and energy efficiency, earning your home credits toward a LEED certification level (when following LEED installation criteria). To obtain more information conceming LEED certification for your home, contact the USGBC. 2.2 Structured Plumbing Structured plumbing is the practice of installing and/or designing a plumbing system in a manner that enhances the system's performance by reducing water waste and hot water delivery times. This plumbing strategy is becoming important for home builders in markets where water conservation is prevalent. Viega, being the leader in innovation and technology for the plumbing and heating systems, has embraced this philosophy with its plumbing products. 2.2.1 Parallel Systems Using home run manifolds (see illustration below), the installer can potentially plumb a house without fittings hidden inside walls. By installing a manifold system near the hot water source, tubing can be run directly to each fixture without using additional fittings. This system provides the lowest pressure losses, as well as eliminates interference between fixtures. Often each fixture can be fed with smaller diameter tubing such as 3/8" diameter, which is easier and faster to install. Parallel Method The MANABLOC Manifold is a unique plumbing system that not only provides a superior plumbing system for homeowners but can also be incorporated to provide water and energy savings. It's a simple concept that provides extraordinary performance. Each fixture is fed by its own flexible water distribution line, which runs from a central manifold. By providing each fixture with its own distribution line, the line can be sized appropriately so hot water can be delivered rapidly. Since the line is dedicated to a single hot or cold fixture, less water is required to purge the line. This saves time, energy and can reduce water waste by up to 40%. Clean System and Clean Installation The MANABLOC is preferred by many installers thanks to its fast and safe installation. There are no fumes from solvents to contend with and no torches required on site for installation. Installation time is significantly less than that of a rigid plumbing system due to the flexibility of ViegaPEX tubing and the simplicity of the PureFlow fitting systems. Viega tubing is color coded to make installation easier and the connection of fixtures to the proper distribution line faster and more foolproof. Homeowners can be assured of the purity of the system due to the third party NSF 61 certification carried by both the MANABLOC and ViegaPEX tubing. Homeowners also benefit from the corrosion resistance of ViegaPEX, which helps prevent contamination of drinking water. Fewer Fittings Behind the Wall The MANABLOC requires fewer fittings than branch and main plumbing systems. This means very few are needed behind the wall. The MANABLOC is installed using flexible ViegaPEX tubing that can be bent around obstacles without the need for fittings. In most cases, each dedicated line has a fitting at the MANABLOC and one at the fixture connection with no fittings located behind the walls. Rich in Homeowner Benefits Home builders enjoy the many features the MANABLOC system offers their customers over branch and main plumbing systems including: • Faster Hot Water Delivery - properly sized lines deliver hot water up to four times faster • Better Control of the Plumbing System - individual shutoff valves provide a simple way of servicing a fixture or adding on to the system Viega IM-PF 0511 520709 Quiet Operation - Flexible ViegaPEX tubing reduces water hammer noise and provides quiet operation Balanced Water Delivery - multiple fixtures can be used simultaneously without noticeable pressure or temperature changes. Design Factors for Installing a Parallel System Water Heater Placement The MANABLOC should be as close as possible to the water heater to minimize extra water from being stored in the larger hot water supply lines between the MANABLOC and water heater. The longer the hot water supply line is, the greater the volume of water requiring purging through the faucet before hot water is available. This creates water waste and longer hot water delivery times. Proper Water Distribution Line Sizing to Each Fixture This is crucial for overall system performance. If you oversize a distribution line to a fixture (1/2" PEX line supplying a sink instead of a 3/8" PEX line) you are essentially doubling the volume of water being stored in that line. It can take roughly twice as long to purge an oversized line compared to a properly sized line. The fixture is what dictates water flow (federally mandated, govemed by code). The tubing applies a friction loss dictated by its size and length. Therefore, as long as you do not undersize a distribution line or njn it excessive distances (60 feet or greater), the system will perform properiy, maintaining sufficient pressure and flow. The Length of a Distribution Line Run to Each Fixture This is just as important as properiy sizing each distribution line. Length of a distribution line run can drastically affect the performance of a MANABLOC system. The longer the line is, the more water being stored within it. Therefore, it will take longer to purge it out before hot water can reach the fixture. The MANABLOC should be located somewhat central to your fixture groups, keeping within 60 feet or less of each fixture for maximum performance. If this cannot be accomplished with one MANABLOC, multiple MANABLOCs may be required. Place one at each end of the home to split the distribution line distance between them (see section 14.6 for use of multiple MANABLOCs). 2.2.2 Branch and Main Systems This method of plumbing is commonly referred to as a conventional plumbing system or branch and tee systems. This system uses a large diameter "main" supply line (minimum 3/4") for both hot and cold water supplies that runs throughout a structure to or near each fixture group with smaller "branch" lines teeing off the main to supply each fixture. While this system can reduce the amount of tubing used, it requires more fittings, which can increase installation time and cost. Design Factors for Installing Branch and Main Systems Design the layout as condensed as possible Keep the main hot supply line close to the fixture groups with the branch lines shorter than 6 feet. This will help provide hot water in a reasonable amount of time with less wasted water. The limiting factor for installers to accomplish an optimal design is how spread out the fixture groups are within the structure. If the fixture groups are not condensed, a branch and main system will have slow hot water delivery times and substantial water waste. If there is a floor plan that incorporates stacked or back-to- back fixture groups, then a branch and main system can be an effective alternative to a parallel system. One disadvantage to these systems is they store excess amounts of water in the large main lines. Therefore the farther away the fixture is, the longer the main supply line must be to reach it, and the longer it takes to purge all stored water out before hot water reaches the fixture. Another problem these systems suffer from is noticeable pressure drop during multiple fixture use. When multiple fixtures are used it increases the water flow (load) within the main line, causing higher friction loss equal to pressure loss at the point of use. This causes a drop in pressure (and potentially a temperature change) in your shower when a toilet is flushed. Branch Installation Viega IM-PF 0511 520709 viega 2.2.3 Combination Systems A combination system uses multiple manifolds combined with a branch and main type supply system. These systems use small manifolds located throughout a structure placed near each main fixture group and are supplied by the main hot and cold supply lines similar to the branch and main system. The manifolds branch multiple lines from a common location in lieu of multiple tee fittings spread throughout. This takes advantage of benefits from both types of systems and helps keep hidden fittings to a minimum. Combination Installation Design Factors for Installing Combination Systems Just like the branch and main system, condensed floor plan layouts are preferable to minimize the length and the amount of water stored in the main supply line, minimizing the amount of water purged before hot water reaches the fixtures. These systems can also suffer from fluctuating pressure during multiple fixture use. 2.2.4 Domestic Hot Water Circulating Systems A hot water circulation system can be incorporated into most plumbing systems and works by constantly (or periodically throughout the day on a timer) circulating hot water through the main hot supply line of your plumbing system. This is done by using a return line at the end of the main hot supply line, and a low-flow pump (usually near the hot water tank). The circulating system keeps hot water readily available throughout the entire main hot water supply line, eliminating the need to purge the entire line before hot water is present at the fixture. There are a number of hot water circulation systems available in the marketplace that offer a variety of options. These systems are ideal for branch and main, or combination systems with spread-out fixture groups/floor plans, as well as for larger homes using multiple MANABLOCs in a parallel type system. Design Factors for Hot Water Circulation Systems Installing a hot water circulation system A tanked water heater shall be used for this type of system. A tankless or instantaneous type water heater will drastically increase the operating cost of the system. There are many types of these systems available on the market today. Research which type is best for the particular application. Ensure all the components being used within the circulation system are rated and/or approved for a hot water circulation system. The chosen system may require maintenance and/or repairs over time, which could include complete pump replacement. Note: Utility costs are associated with running these systems due to the electricity required to operate the pump. Costs will vary depending on the frequency of operation and size of the pump. Viega IM-PF 0511 520709 3. VIEGAPEX TUBING 3.1 General ViegaPEX PureFlow tubing is a high- density cross-linked polyethylene tubing (PEX). Cross-linking produces a strong, durable tubing ideal for both hot and cold potable water systems. 3.2 PEX - the superior tubing Cross-linked polyethylene is the ideal tubing choice for potable water systems. Compared to ordinary polyethylene tubing (PE), cross- linked tubing has higher temperature resistance and higher burst pressure. ViegaPEX tubing is manufactured to ASTM F876/F877 standards and listed to ANSI/NSF Standards 14 and 61. It is chlorine resistance rated for both traditional and continuous recirculation PEX 5006 (GLS) applications. ViegaPEX tubing is rated at 100 psi at 180°F and 160 psi at 73°F. In addition, the smooth walls of ViegaPEX tubing are resistant to corrosion and scaling. 3.3 Colors ViegaPEX is available in red, white and blue for easy identification of hot and cold lines. 3.4 ViegaPEX Properties and Performance Linear Expansion Coefficient: • 1.1 inch per 100 feet per 10°F Temperature and Pressure Ratings: • 200°F at 80 psi • 180°F at 100 psi • 73.4T at 160 psi UV Resistance: • maximum exposure 60 days Flexibility: • ViegaPEX can be easily bent by hand, or with the use of Viega approved bend supports to a radius as small as 5 times tubing outer diameter. 3.5 Tubing Markings ViegaPEX tubing is marked every 5 feet with the following representative information: Length Marker 000 Feet Company Viega Product Name ViegaPEX™ Nominal Tubing Size 1/2" Standard Dimension Ratio Tube Size SDR 9 CTS (copper tube size) Material Designation Code PEX5006 Temperature & Pressure Rating 100 PSI @ 180F/ 160 PSI @ 73F NSF Listing (Potable) cNSF®us-pw NSF Chlorine Listing CLS ASTM Tubing Standards Certif icaition F876/F877 Candlan Standard Assoc CSA B137.5 Fittings System Compatibility PureFlow - ASTM F877/F1807/F2159 lAPMO Listing UPC® Plenum Rating* FS/SD 25/50 ASTM E84 ICC Listing ES-PMGTi«-1038 HUD Listing MR 1276 Manufacturer's Date Code 1/1/2010 Material Code B2X14.2 Country of Manufacture Made in the USA * 3/4" and smaller tube sizes only 3.6 ViegaPEX Tubing Dimensions Nominal Size Inner Diameter Outer Diameter Wall Thickness 3/8" .350 .500 .075 1/2" .475 .625 .075 3/4" .671 .875 .102 1" .863 1.125 .131 3.7 ViegaPEX Sizes Nominal Size Available Coil Lengths Available Straight Lengths 3/8" 100, 500,1000 feet 1/2" 100, 300, 500,1000 feet 20-foot lengths in bundles of 50 3/4" 100, 300, 500,1000 feet 20-foot lengths in bundles of 25 1" 100, 500 feet 20-foot lengths in bundles of 5 Viega IM-PF 0511 520709 10 viega 4. VIEGAPEX ULTRA TUBING 4.1 General ViegaPEX Ultra tubing is a high- density cross-linked polyethylene tubing (PEX). Cross-linking produces a strong, durable tubing ideal for both hot and cold potable water systems. 4.2 PEX - the superior tubing Cross-linked polyethylene is the ideal tubing choice for potable water systems. Compared to ordinary polyethylene tubing (PE), cross linked tubing has higher temperature resistance and higher burst pressure. ViegaPEX Ultra tubing is manufactured to ASTM F876/F877 standards and listed to ANSI/NSF Standards 14 and 61. It is chlorine resistance rated for both traditional and continuous recirculation PEX 5006 (CL5) applications. ViegaPEX Ultra tubing is rated at 100 psi at 180°F and 160 psi at 73T. In addition, the smooth walls of ViegaPEX Ultra tubing are resistant to corrosion and scaling. 4.3 Colors ViegaPEX Ultra, available in red, white, blue and black, is multilayered (2 layers) with a black core that increases the UV resistance of the tubing, enabling exposure of up to 6 months. It also blocks transmission of visible light, preventing most types of algae growth from occurnng. 4.4 ViegaPEX Ultra Properties and Performance Linear Expansion Coefficient: • 1.1 inch per 100 feet per 10°F Temperature and Pressure Ratings: • 200°F at 80 psi • 180°F at 100 psi • 73.4°F at 160 psi UV Resistance: • maximum exposure 6 months Flexibility: • ViegaPEX Ultra can be easily bent by hand, or with use of Viega approved bend supports to a radius as small as 5 times tubing outer diameter. 4.5 Tubing Markings ViegaPEX Ultra tubing is marked every 5 feet with the following representative information: Length Marker 000 Feet Company Viega Product Name ViegaPEX™ Ultra Nominal Tubing Size 1/2" Standard Dimension Ratio Tube Size SDR 9 CTS (copper tube size) Material Designation Code PEX5006 Temperature & Pressure Rating 100 PSI @ 180F/ 160 PSI @ 73F NSF Listing (Potable) cNSF®us-pw NSF Chlorine Listing CL5 NSF Uniform Plumbing Code Listing NSF U.R Code ASTM Tubing Standards Certificaition F876/F877 Candian Standard Assoc CSA B137.5 Fittings System Compatibility PureFlow - ASTM F877/F1807/F2159 UL Listing Rating* cULus 3SAV ULl 821 130 PSI @ 120 F Plenum Rating** FS/SD 25/50 ASTM E84 ICC Listing ES-PMG™ - 1038 AWWA Listing C904 HUD Listing MR 1276 Manufacturer's Date Code 1/1/2010 Material Code B2X14.2 Country of Manufacture MADE IN THE USA * 3/4" through 2" ViegaPEX Ultra only " 3/4" and smaller tulje sizes only 4.6 ViegaPEX Ultra Tubing Dimensions Nominal Size Inner Diameter Outer Diameter Wall Thickness 3/8" .350 .500 .075 1/2" .475 .625 .075 3/4" .671 .875 .102 1" .862 1.125 .131 1-1/4" 1.054 1.375 .160 1-1/2" 1.244 1.625 .190 2" 1.629 2.125 .248 4.7 ViegaPEX Ultra Sizes Nominal Size Available Coil Lengths Available Straight Lengths 3/8" 100, 500,1000 feet 1/2" 100, 300,500,1000 feet 20-foot lengths in bundles of 50 3/4" 100, 500 feet 20-foot lengths in bundles of 25 1" 100, 500 feet 20-foot lengths in bundles of 5 1-1/4" 100,300 feet 20-foot lengths in bundles of 5 1-1/2" 100 feet 20-foot lengths in bundles of 5 2" 100 feet 20-foot lengths in bundles of 5 11 Viega IM-PF 0511 520709 5. FOSTAPEX TUBING 5.1 General FostaPEX tubing is the perfect companion for the PureFlow plumbing system. This tubing can be easily bent by hand like the ViegaPEX tubing, but holds its shape after bending (combining the benefits of both rigid and flexible tubing). The result is fewer f ittings and bend supports, and less \abor. FostaPEX can be purchased in straight lengths or coils. A unique feature of FostaPEX is that the inner layer is fully dimensioned ViegaPEX tubing. The aluminum and outer PE layers sun-ound the inner PEX tubing. This constmction allovre the inner layer alone to meet all temperature and pressure requirements of the system. Using the prep tool to remove the outer layers allows the use of the standard PureFlow PEX Press fitting system, which reduces tooling costs for the contractor and simplifies connections. 5.2 Advantages of FostaPEX FostaPEX retains many of the features of ViegaPEX tubing while increasing strength and ease of installation. FostaPEX shares the same PEX Press fitting system as the ViegaPEX tubing, reducing inventory and tooling costs. In addition, the aluminum layer within FostaPEX tubing minimizes expansion during temperature changes. The expansion rate of FostaPEX is similar to that of copper tubing, reducing the necessity for expansion bops and offsets. FostaPEX is ideal for exposed tubing runs, where it can be straightened to present a clean and traditional appearance. A bending tool is also available to assist in making smooth, tight bends in FostaPEX. FostaPEX tubing is manufactured to ASTM F876/F877 standards and listed to ANSI/NSF Standards 14 and 61. It is chlorine resistance rated for both traditional and continuous recirculation PEX 5006 (CL5) applications. FostaPEX tubing is rated at 100 psi at 180°F and 160psiat73'"F 5.3 Colors FostaPEX, available in red and silver, is constmcted of a black PEX core, with aluminum and PE outer layers. It also blocks transmission of visible light, preventing most types of algae growth from occurring. In addition, the smooth walls of FostaPEX tubing are resistant to corrosion and scaling. 5.4 FostaPEX Properties and Performance Linear Expansion Coefficient: • 0.16 inch per 100 feet per 10° F Temperature and Pressure Ratings: • 200°F at 80 psi • 180°F at 100 psi • 73.4°F at 160 psi UV Resistance: • Extended (fully dimensioned PEX core is protected by outer AL/PE layers) Not for use with PEX Crimp fittings. Flexibility: • FostaPEX tubing can be bent to a radius of 3.5 x tubing O.D. with the use of a Viega tubing bender. 5.5 Tubing Markings FostaPEX tubing is marked every 5 feet with the following representative information: Length Marker 000 Feet Company Viega Product Name FostaPEX® Nominal Tubing Size 1/2" Standard Dimension Ratio Tube Size SDR 9 CTS (copper tube size) Material Designation Code PEX5006 Temperature & Pressure Rating 100 PSI @ 180F/ 160 PSI @ 73F NSF Listing (Potable / Heating) cNSF®us-pw-rfh NSF Chlorine Listing CL5 ASTM Tubing Standards Certificaition F876/F877 Candian Standard Assoc CSA Bl 37.5 Fittings System Compatibility PureFlow - ASTM F877 lAPMO Listing UPC® ICC Listing ES-PMG™1015,1038 AWWA Listing C904 HUD Listing MR 1276 Manufacturer's Date Code 1/1/2010 Material Code B2X18.1 Country of Manufacture Made in the USA 5.6 FostaPEX Tubing Dimensions Nominal Size Inner Diameter Outer Diameter* Wall Thickness* 1/2" .475 .625 .075 3/4" .671 .875 .102 1" .863 1.125 .103 'Dimensions do not reflect outer aluminum and PE layers 5.7 FostaPEX Sizes Nominal Size Available Coil Lengths Available Straight Lengths 1/2" 150, 400 feet 20-foot lengths in bundles of 25 3/4" 150 feet 20-foot lengths in bundles of 25 1" 150 feet 20-foot lengths in bundles of 10 Viega IM-PF 0511 520709 12 6. PUREFLOW PEX PRESS FITTINGS Viega 6.1 Bronze PEX Press with Attached Sleeve PureFlow Bronze PEX Press fittings are cast and machined from a solid bronze alloy available in both zero lead and Viega's standard bronze material that incorporates an attached stainless steel press sleeve with three view holes and a tool locator ring. This gives the fittings high corrosion and stress cracking resistance while simplifying the connection for installation. These bronze alloys have been specially developed to resist dezincification, a process that can weaken ordinary brass fittings over time. The following design criteria make PureFlow PEX Press fittings perfect for use in potable water applications. • attached sleeve • high corrosion resistance • excellent strength properties • resistant to stress corrosion • superior wear properties • compatible with all materials • color coded tool locator ring matches PEX Press hand tool color All PureFlow tubing, fittings and manifolds are NSF certified for use in potable water systems. NOTE: Some fittings/adaptors are still sold requiring a separate press sleeve. 6.1.1 Bronze PEX Press Fittings, Manifolds and Sleeves PureFlow Bronze PEX Press fittings are produced for all connections necessary in a potable water system. PEX to PEX fittings are available as straight couplings, elbows and tees (both single size and reducing). Adapters mate PureFlow tubing to NPT threads, copper tubing and copper fittings. A full manifold offering is available. PEX Press copper manifolds are available from 2 to 12 outlets and may be installed in concealed locations. The MANABLOC and Minibloc manifold systems are also available with zero lead bronze PEX Press connections. The stainless steel press sleeves used in the PureFlow PEX Press system ensure the integrity of each connection. The strength of this material guarantees a leak-free connection every time, while the view holes allow both the installer and inspector to easily verify full insertion of the tubing. The tool locator ring ensures a consistent press every time. The stainless steel will not corrode, maintaining a clean appearance for the lifetime of the system. 6.1.2 Bronze Press Fitting Markings Each PureFlow Bronze PEX Press fitting is marked where space permits with the following infonnation: Manufacturer VIEGA ASTM standard ASTM F877 Temperature Rating 180''F Certifications cNSF®ijs pw-G, UPC® cULus® CSA Bl 37.5 Note: All fittings may not be listed with each organization shown. Use only Viega Stainless Steel Press Sleeves and Press tools with PureRow PEX Press fittings 13 Viega IM-PF 0511 520709 6.2 PEX Press Connection with Attached Sleeve The PureFlow PEX Press connection with attached sleeve provides a simple and safe connection between the ViegaPEX or FostaPEX tubing and PureFlow system components. The ratchet system in the press tool, simple connection process, three view holes in the press sleeve and color-coded locator rings all ensure a consistent, worry-free press connection. The difference between a finished and unfinished press fitting is also easily visible, making inspection simple. 6.2.1 The PureFlow PEX Press Hand Tool The PureFlow PEX Press connection must always be carried out with the aid of a PureFlow PEX Press tool. The hand tool incorporates a forced compression mechanism to ensure a complete and secure connection each time. A ratchet inside the tool prevents the tool from being opened until the proper force has been applied to the press sleeve. (A safety release screw allows the tool to be opened at any time, but any connection made without full tool compression must be redone.) The high mechanical advantage provided by the PureFlow PEX Press tool permits one-handed operation, making the PureFlow PEX Press system perfect for tight spaces and awkward locations. The PureFlow PEX Press hand tool is available for 3/8", 1/2", 3/4" and 1" PureFlow PEX Press connections. Each tool has a color-coded handle that matches the PEX Press fitting locator ring for easy identification on the job site and they are available individually or in convenient sets. See the Viega product catalog for details. 6.2.2 The PureFlow PEX Press Power Tool The PureFlow PEX Press connection may also be carried out with one of the PureFlow power tools. These tools are designed to make the same consistent press as the PureFlow PEX Press hand tools. In addition, these tools have an integrated diagnostic system that monitors tool performance and battery life. The tools have interchangeable jaw sets for 3/8", 1/2", 3/4", 1", 1-1/4", 1-1/2" and 2". PureFlow PEX Press connections and are also compatible with the ProPress copper press system jaw sets. See the Viega product catalog for details. 6.2.3 The PureFlow PEX Press Fitting The PureFlow PEX Press tool compresses the stainless steel sleeve around the tubing and fitting in two places, permanently securing them together — no O-rings. This connection exceeds the requirements of the ASTM F877 standard. The compression of the tool also allows press connections to be made in temperatures as low as -4°F (23°F for power tools). Cross-section ofa completed PureFlow PEX Press fitting Three view holes in the sleeve allow installers to check for proper tubing insertion. PureFlow Press Hand Tools Viega IM-PF 0511 520709 14 viega 6.2.4 Making a PureFlow PEX Press Hand Tool Connection (Attached Sleeves) 1. Square off tubing to proper length. Uneven, jagged or irregular cuts will produce unsatisfactory connections. 2. If using FostaPEX tubing, insert into prep tool, push and turn until no resistance is felt. If using ViegaPEX, continue to step 3. 3. Insert PEX Press fitting with attached sleeve into tubing and engage fully. Ensure full tubing insertion at view holes in attached press sleeve. Full insertion means tubing must be completely visible in at least two view holes and partially visible in the one. 5. Position press tool perpendicular over Press Sleeve resting it against the tool locator ring. Note: The tool locator ring must be in the factory installed position while making a press to ensure a consistent leakproof connection. It may be necessary to rotate the tool locator ring to avoid interference between the ring and tool. 6. Close handles, using trigger to reduce grip span if desired. 7. Extend handle and continue ratcheting until automatic tool release occurs at proper compression force. Turn screw for emergency release 8. Warning: The connection is not leakproof when the tool has been opened by emergency release. The tool locator ring must be present to ensure a proper PEX Press connection. 15 Viega IM-PF 0511 520709 6.2.5 Making a PureFlow PEX Press Power Tool Connection (Attached Sleeves) 1. Square off tubing to proper length. Uneven, jagged or in-egular cuts will produce unsatisfactory connections. , If using FostaPEX tubing, insert into prep tool, push and turn until no resistance is felt. If using ViegaPEX, continue to step 3. 3. Insert PEX Press fitting with attached sleeve into tubing and engage fully. Ensure full tubing insertion at view holes in attached press sleeve. Full insertion means tubing must be completely visible in at least two view holes and partially visible in the one. 5. Insert the appropriate PureFlow Press Jaw into the press tool and push in the holding pin until it locks. 7. Start pressing process; hold the trigger until the jaw has automatically released. 8. When press connection is complete, open and remove jaw. Warning: The tool locator ring must be present to ensure a proper PEX Press connection. . Open jaw and position perpendicular over press sleeve resting it against the tool locator ring. Note: The tool locator ring must be in the factory installed position while making a press to ensure a consistent leakprciof connection. It may be necessary to rotate the tool locator ring to avoid interference between the ring and tool. Viega IM-PF 0511 520709 16 7. PUREFLOW PEX CRIMP FITTINGS viega 7.1 Brass PEX Crimp PureFlow Brass PEX Crimp fittings are machined from a zero lead EGO Brass*. The following design criteria make PureFlow PEX Crimp fittings perfect for use in potable water applications. • Cost Effective • Excellent Strength Properties • Excellent corrosion resistance • Fast Installation All PureFlow tubing, fittings and manifolds are NSF certified for use in potable water systems. 7.1.1 Brass PEX Crimp Fittings, Manifolds and Crimp Rings PureFlow Brass PEX Crimp fittings are produced for all connections necessary in a potable water system. PEX to PEX fittings are available as straight couplings, elbows and tees (both single size and reducing). Adapters mate PureFlow tubing to NPT threads, copper tubing and copper fittings. PEX Crimp copper manifolds are available from 4 to 10 outlets and may be installed in concealed locations. The MANABLOC and Minibloc manifold systems are also available with zero lead brass PEX Crimp connections. PEX Crimp Fittings are widely accepted with over 50% of the industry offering this system. 7.1.2 Brass PEX Crimp Fitting Markings Each PureFlow Brass PEX Crimp fitting is marked where space pennits with the following information: Manufacturer VIEGA ASTM standand ASTM, F1807 Certifications UPC®, or U.P. Code, NSF-pw, CSA B137.5, cNSF®us pw-G Note: All fittings may not be listed with every organization shown. Use only F1807 copper crimp rings and full circle crimp tools with PureFlow PEX Crimp fittings. NOT for use with FostaPEX tubing 17 Viega IM-PF 0511 520709 7.2 PolyAlloyTM PEX Crimp PureFlow PolyAlloy PEX Crimp fittings are molded from Acudel®. The following design criteria make PureFlow PolyAlloy PEX Crimp fittings perfect for use in potable water applications. • Cost Effective • Superior Wear Properties • Fast Installation • High Corrosion Resistance All PureFlow tubing, fittings and manifolds are NSF certified for use in potable water systems. PureFlow PolyAlloy PEX Crimp fittings must be protected from UV exposure and petroleum products, which can damage them. In the event of incidental UV exposure during storage, installation and handling, combined exposure of PolyAlloy PEX fittings shall not exceed 15 days. 7.2.1 PolyAlloy PEX Crimp Fittings and Crimp Rings PureFlow PolyAlloy PEX Crimp fittings are produced for many connections necessary in a potable water system. PEX to PEX fittings are available as straight couplings, elbows and tees (both singie size and reducing). Adapters mate PureFlow tubing to fixture connections. The M/\NABLOC homerun manifold system is available with PolyAlloy PEX Crimp connections. PolyAlloy PEX Crimp manifolds are available from 2 to 8 outlets and may be installed in concealed locations. The MANABLOC and Minibloc manifold systems are also available with PolyAlloy PEX Crimp connections. The material choice and fitting design used in the PureFlow PolyAlloy PEX Crimp system ensure the integrity of each connection. 7.2.2 PolyAlloy PEX Crimp Fitting Markings Each PureFlow PolyAlloy PEX Crimp fitting is marked where space permits with the following information: Manufacturer VIEGA ASTM standard ASTM, F2159 Certifications NSF U.P. Code, cNSF®us-pw, CSA B137.5 Use only F1807 copper crimp rings and full circle crimp tools with PureFlow PEX Crimp fittings. NOT for use with FostaPEX tubing Viega IM-PF 0511 520709 18 viega 7.3 PEX Crimp Connections The PureFlow PEX Crimp connection provides a simple and safe connection between ViegaPEX and PureFlow PEX Crimp system components. The full circle crimp tool and simple connection process ensure a consistent, worry-free crimp connection every time. 7.3.1 The PureFlow PEX Crimp Hand Tool The PureFlow PEX Crimp connection must always be carried out with the aid of a PureFlow PEX Crimp tool. There are multiple configurations of PureFlow PEX Crimp tools perfect for tight spaces and awkward locations. The PureFlow PEX Crimp hand tool is available for 3/8", 1/2", 3/4" and 1" PureFlow PEX Crimp connections. Some tools are available with color-coded handles for easy identification on the job site. See the Viega product catalog for details. A Go/No Go Gauge is provided to check ttie crimp tool calit)ration 7.3.2 The PureFlow PEX Crimp Fitting The PureFlow PEX Crimp tool compresses the crimp ring around the tubing and fitting in a full circle, permanently securing them together — no O-rings required. This connection meets the requirements of the ASTM F1807 or F2159 standard. The compression of the tool also allows crimp connections to be made in temperatures as low as -30°F. Cross-section ofa completed PureFlow PEX Crimp fitting Crimp tools A GO/NO GO gauge is provided to check the calibration of the crimp tool. A crimp is good if the GO gauge fits over the ring, and the NO GO gauge does not. At least one connection should be checked at the beginning and end of each day to ensure proper crimps have been made. Most crimp tools can be recalibrated. Please refer to tool instructions. 19 Viega IM-PF 0511 520709 I I 7.3.3 Making a PureFlow PEX Crimp Connection 1. Square off tubing to proper length. Uneven, jagged or in-egular cuts will produce unsatisfactory connections. 2. Slide the correct size crimp ring over end of the tubing. 3. Insert the fitting into the pipe to the shoulder or tube stop. Position the ring 1/8" to 1/4" from the end of the tubing. 4. Center the crimping tool jaws exactly over the ring. Keep the tool at 90° and close the handles completely. DO NOT CRIMP TWICE. 5. When checking crimps with a GO/NO GO gauge, push the gauge STRAIGHT DOWN over the crimped ring. NEVER slide the gauge in from the side. Do not attempt to gauge the crimp at the jaw overlap area. The overiap area is indicated by a slight removal of the blackening treatment. 6. A crimp connection is considered good if the GO gauge fits the ring and the NO GO does not. A crimp connection is considered bad if the GO gauge does not fit the ring or the NO GO gauge does fit. Bad crimps must be cut out of the tubing and replaced. Viega IM-PF 0511 520709 20 8. THE MANABLOC Viega 8.1 The MANABLOC The MANABLOC control unit is molded from PLS (Polysulfone) plastic and tested to the requirements of ASTM F877 and certified by NSF International. The following design criteria make the MANABLOC distribution system perfect for potable water applications: • Fast Installation • Fewer Fittings • Excellent Resistance to Chlorine • Fast Hot Water Delivery The MANABLOC supply inlet connections use a special 1" MANABLOC swivel adapter that is not included in the MANABLOC package and must be purchased separately. Transition fittings also avaiiabie in zero lead materials and include bronze insert (PEX Press), brass insert (PEX Crimp), PolyAlloy insert (PEX Crimp), Male NPT male thread and compression. These transition adapters are available in sizes ranging from 3/4" to 1-1/4" depending on the connection type (see product catalog for a list of sizes). The MANABLOC incorporates color-coded valves for hot and cold water supplies. 8.1.1 MANABLOC PEX Connections Connections for the individual PEX distribution lines are a mechanical- type fitting and will not work with standard pipe fittings. Use only fittings supplied with the MANABLOC or other fittings designed for special port transitions available from Viega, listed in the Product catalog. Refer to Section 16, Installing MANABLOC Distribution Lines, for detailed information. Warranty coverage applies ONLY when the MANABLOC is installed with ViegaPEX tubing and in accordance with the Installation Instructions, local code and good plumbing practices. MANABLOC port connections are available in zero lead Bronze Press, zero lead Brass Crimp, Poly Crimp and Compression available in all 3/8", 1/2" or a combination of both for all connection types. 8.1.2 MANABLOC Markings Each PureFlow MANABLOC is marked where space permits with the following information: Manufacturer VIEGA ASTM standard ASTM, F877 Certifications UPC® cNSF®us-pw, CSA B137.5 Use only Viega approved fittings to connect ViegaPEX tubing to the MANABLOC ' •1:.;'.*..i-n--'.'"'.i"i;,:j- •-"is-'='".>/'.- 21 Viega IM-PF 0511 520709 9. SYSTEM SIZING AND CALCULATIONS 9.1 System Sizing and Calculations PureFlow systems should be designed following standard plumbing engineering practice. Follow local codes to detennine minimum tubing size and required fixture pressures. Pressure drop through fittings can be estimated from the charts at right. Values are expressed in equivalent length of PEX, so add the values for the relevant fittings to the length of tubing in the run, and then determine the total pressure drop from the charts on the following page. To determine the pressure drop through runs of ViegaPEX and FostaPEX tubing, refer to the pressure drop chart on the following page. For a known flow rate, tubing size and tubing length, the pressure drop through the run can be easily determined. PureHow PEX Press Fittings Friction Loss - Equivalent Feet of SDR9 PEX Tubing Size Coupling Elbow Tee Run Tee Branch 3/8" 2.9 9.2 2.9 9.4 1/2" 2 9.4 2.2 10.4 3/4" 1 8 1 9 1" 1 10 2 10 1-1/4" 2 11 2 11 1-1/2" 2 13 2 12 2" 1 19 2 18 PureFlow PEX Crimp Fittings Friction Loss - Equivalent Feet of SDR9 PEX Tubing Size Coupling Elbow Tee Run Tee Branch 3/8" 2.9 9.2 2.9 9.4 1/2" 2.0 9.4 2.2 10.4 3/4" 0.6 9.4 1.9 8.9 1" 1.3 10.0 2.3 11.0 PureRow PolyAlloy PEX Crimp Fittings Friction Loss - Equivalent Feet of SDR9 PEX Tubing Size Coupling Elbow Tee Run Tee Branch 1/2" 7.1 16.5 7.2 17.9 3/4" 4.8 17.4 6.6 17.7 1" 4.5 18.0 6.0 17.0 -*&©&— Viega IM-PF 0511 520709 Tl n n n iTl TT MJ\ Nl —^ Brandling installation 22 viega Pressure Drop (psi per foot of PEX tubing) gpm 3/8" 1/2" 3/4" 1" 1-1/4" 1-1/2" 2" 1 0.070 0.016 1.5 0.149 0.034 2.2 0.303 0.069 2.5 0.385 0.087 3 0.539 0.122 0.023 3.5 0.717 0.162 0.030 4 0.208 0.039 5 0.314 0.059 6 0.440 0.082 0.024 7 0.586 0.109 0.032 8 0.140 0.041 9 0.174 0.051 10 0.211 0.062 0.024 11 0.252 0.074 0.028 12 0.296 0.087 0.033 13 0.343 0.101 0.038 14 0.116 0.044 16 0.148 0.056 0.025 18 0.184 0.070 0.031 20 0.224 0.085 0.038 22 0.267 0.102 0.045 24 0.119 0.053 26 0.138 0.062 28 0.159 0.071 30 0.180 0.080 32 0.203 0.091 .024 34 0.101 .027 36 0.113 .030 38 0.125 .033 40 0.137 .037 45 .046 50 .056 55 .066 60 .078 65 .090 70 .104 75 .118 = 8 fps per size tubing NOTE: Maximum flow for each size based on 12 FPS velocity. PSI x 2.307 = head loss. 23 Viega IM-PF 0511 520709 10. INSTALLING THE PUREFLOW PEX TUBING SYSTEM 10.1 Handling PureFlow Tubing The properties of PureFlow tubing make it very easy to work with and install in most types of construction. Some care must be taken to prevent damage to the tubing before and during installation: • Use care to protect both ViegaPEX and FostaPEX tubing from physical damage during storage and installation. Keep the tubing away from sharp objects, open flames, etc., and do not place heavy objects on the tubing. • Damaged sections of tubing should be cut out and discarded. • Do not expose ViegaPEX tubing to sunlight or any UV source for extended periods of time (less than 60 days for standard ViegaPEX or less than 6 months for ViegaPEX Ultra). • FostaPEX, with its aluminum layer, is resistant to UV light, but long-term exposure should still be avoided. • Do not store ViegaPEX or FostaPEX tubing outdoors where it may be exposed to UV light. 10.2 Uncoiling PureFlow Tubing An uncoiler should be used to prevent twisting when removing tubing from 3/8" to 1" coils. Roll coils out and use care to avoid twisting 1-1/4", 1-1/2" and 2" coils or when a uncoiler is unavailable. 10.3 Bending PureFlow Tubing ViegaPEX tubing can be free bent (unsupported bend) to a minimum radius of 8 times the tubing O.D. and 5 times the tubing O.D. with the use of a Viega approved bend support. FostaPEX tubing can be free bent to a minimum radius of 8 times the tubing O.D. and 3.5 times the tubing O.D. with the use of a Viega tubing bender. For situations requiring tighter bends, use elbow fittings. If bending against a PEX coil bend direction, the bending radius is 24 times the tubing O.D. To reduce damaging stress on PureFlow fittings, bend supports or tubing fasteners must be used to anchor all bends made close to fittings. Support must be provided for tubing bends located closer to fittings than distance "L" in table below See the diagrams to the right for typical installation examples. Since FostaPEX will maintain its shape once bent, these requirements do not apply. Tubing size Distance from fitting to bend 3/8" PEX L = 6 inches 1/2" PEX L = 8 inches 3/4" PEX L = 10 inches 1" PEX L = 12 inches 1-1/4" PEX L = 14 inches 1-1/2" PEX L = 16 inches 2" PEX L = 18 inches Minimum bending radius for PureFlow tubing Using a bend support near a PureFlow connection to reduce stress on fitting Using a tubing fastener near a connection to support bend and reduce stress on fitting A FostaPEX Tubing bender is available to assist with making accurate, tight bends in all sizes of FostaPEX tubing. Tufa/ng Bender, stock code 56015 Viega IM-PF 0511 520709 24 viega 10.4 Installation Temperature Range The flexibility of PureFlow tubing and the strength of the PureFlow PEX connections combine to provide a system that can be installed during any weather. The positive compression provided by the PureFlow PEX Press hand tools allow installation in temperatures down to -4''F (23°F for power tools), and -30°F for PEX Crimp hand tools. 10.5 Removing PureFlow PEX Connections Should a mistake be made, simply cut out the PEX fitting and replace with a new one. Do not reuse PureFlow PEX fittings. Do not reuse PureFlow PEX fittings that incorporate an attached press sleeve or copper crimp rings. 10.6 Repairs Sections of kinked tubing should be repaired by cutting out the damaged section and installing a repair coupling. Inserting a coupling to repmr kinked tubing 25 Viega IM-PF 0511 520709 10.7 Tubing Expansion When installing PureFlow tubing, expansion and contraction of the material must be considered ViegaPEX tubing should not be pulled tight when installed, as cold water will cause tubing to shrink slightly as the system is filled. A slight amount of slack should be left in each run to allow for this contraction without stressing the fittings. Expansion of the tubing in hot water lines should be accommodated by using expansion loops or offsets. Fasteners should not grip tubing tightly so that it can move slightly as expansion takes place. Expansion loops or offsets will give tubing a place to grow without stressing fittings. Using suspension clip fasteners at all penetrations will allow tubing to move without creating noise. ViegaPEX expands or contracts 1.1 inches in length per 100 feet of tubing for every 10° F change in temperature. Tubing expansion is less critical with FostaPEX, though still present. The aluminum layer in this tubing limits expansion to 0.16 inches per 100 feet of tubing for every 10°F rise in temperature, similar to copper. This makes FostaPEX ideal for use where expansion is a concern. 10.8 Freezing The flexibility of PureFlow tubing makes it resistant to damage from freezing, but precautions to prevent freezing should be taken when low temperatures might be encountered. Insulating each PEX tube individually or as a group is not generally necessary if the PEX tubing is installed within the insulation envelope of the structure, i.e. the heated area. For example, the tubing may be installed under the insulation in the attic or within an interior wall of a heated space. Si ifi Using a loop to accommodate tutting expansKMi Offsets also ptovide room for tubing expansion 1/8" to 3/16" slack per foot. Allow some slack in all runs to prevent damage from tubing contraction. PEX tubing systems should not be intentionally subjected to freezing. Do not use open torch or excessive heat to thaw PEX tubing. Tubing failure or damage can result. Heat (DO NOT USE A TORCH) must be applied directly to the frozen tubing section. Temperature on tubing shall not exceed 180°F. Several suitable methods exist to thaw PEX tubing. They include: • Hot water • Wet hot towels • Handheld hair dryer > Low wattage electrical heating tape (self limiting) > A commercial system that pumps heated water through a tube to the ice blockage, and returns the cooled water for reheating. Viega IM-PF 0511 520709 26 viega 10.9 Water Heaters PureFlow tubing should not be connected directly to gas-fired water heaters. The high temperatures of these appliances can damage the tubing. When connecting a PureFlow system to a gas-fired water heater, install a minimum of 18" of metallic piping beween the water heater and tubing, keeping tubing more than 6" away from the vent pipe. Where local code allows, PureFlow tubing may be connected directly to electric water heaters and used for hot water recirculation lines which do not come within 6" of the gas heater vent. ViegaPEX may be used to connect to instantaneous / tankless water heaters or other hot water producing devices. However, consult manufacturer's recommendations for use with plastic tubing and ensure temperature and pressure do not exceed the maximum ratings of the tubing. ft = 18" A minimum of 18" of metallic piping is required behveen a gas fired water heater and PEX tubing. 10.10 Heaters, Flues, Vents and Recessed Lights Keep PureFlow PEX tubing a MINIMUM of 12" vertically and 6" horizontally from sources of high heat such as gas flue vents, heating appliances or electric motors. Conceming recessed lighting (including low voltage types) and proper installation clearance, Viega recognizes the following types of lighting fixtures: "Type IC" or Maintain a minimum 12" of vertical and 6° of horizontal clearance from recessed lights and appliance or heater vents. "Inherently Protected," which allow direct contact with thermal insulation and other combustible materials, and "Type Non-IC," which require a minimum clearance of 3" to thermal insulation. If room does not allow for the minimum clearance spacing specified by Viega, then the PEX tubing must be insulated with a . suitable pipe insulation capable of withstanding the specific maximum temperatures generated by the fixture. Minimum clearance between any pipe insulation and fixture shall be per the requirements of the fixture type and local building codes. Forced air heating ducts and PVC power vent flues are not generally considered sources of high heat. These areas of installation should be rechecked after further constmction and other mechanical systems have been installed. In cases where light leakage (direct beam) from a UV generating light source (special lighting or heating type lamps) is possible, tubing must be adequately protected with light blocking insulation. 27 10.11 Continuously Recirculating Hot Water Plumbing Loops ViegaPEX can be used in continuously recirculating domestic hot water plumbing loops, provided: 1. The plumbing loops shall operate with water temperatures of 140°F or lower, as required by most model plumbing codes. 2. The recirculating loop is for supplying hot water more quickly to the fixture. 3. The tubing is marked as rated for "continuous recirculation" as evidenced by the ASTM F876 certification marking PEX5006 (CL5) Ul m Q. O. 2 X u. o a. o o _j c o PEX 3 o o 0) tr Hot Cold Check Valve Pump L. Typical domestic hot water circulation piping Viega IM-PF 0511 520709 10.12 Noise and Water Hammer in PEX Systems fis with all plumbing materials under some operating conditions, water hammer can occur in PEX plumbing systems. The inherent flexibility of ViegaPEX drastically reduces the magnitude of pressure surges compared with metallic plumbing materials. Damage to plumbing components in a PEX system due to these pressure surges is highly unlikely, although noise can sometimes result. Fortunately, there are solutions to minimize or eliminate water hammer noise. • Install fixtures that are not water hammer prone. As a general rule, two-handle fixtures are less likely to cause hammer than single-handle fixtures. Single-handle shower valves, which rotate to close and therefore are difficult to close quickly, might be good choices. • Clamping or strapping more frequently may help prevent tubing noise. It is very important that the tubing not be in contact with wallboard, forced air ducts or other high resonance articles. Insufficiently or improperly clamped or strapped tubing may move during fixture operation and hit against these surfaces. • Install a water hammer arrester at fixtures where noise is a problem. A water hammer arrester {AA sized) installed as close as possible to the fixture on the cold water side only will eliminate the source of the noise (the pressure wave). It should be noted that even with an arrester, tubing that is clamped or strapped insufficiently may still hit against something as it moves slightly when the water flow is stopped. • Avoid operating fixtures in such a way that causes near instantaneous shutoff. Simply closing fixtures in a less abrupt manner can eliminate hammer noise. 10.13 Shower Valves PEX lines should only be run to the inlet connections of tub / shower valves unless specifically approved by the valve manufacturer for other connections. 10.14 Electrical Grounding Neither ViegaPEX nor FostaPEX tubing may be used as an electrical ground. Consult the NEC for recommended grounding method when plastic pipe is used. 10.15 Pressure Testing /Ml PureFlow systems must be pressure tested in accordance with local code after installation, or to at least the system working pressure. Connections may be pressure tested immediately after completion. Refer to section 17.1: Pressure Testing PureFlow Systems for specific testing requirements. Viega IM-PF 0511 520709 28 11. FASTENING THE PUREFLOW SYSTEM Viega 11.1 Wood Frame Construction ViegaPEX and FostaPEX tubing are ideal for use in wood frame construction. The ability to bend the tubing around corners and obstacles greatly simplifies installation. This system eliminates the expensive and time-consuming use of fittings where tubing turns within a wall, and eliminates the potential fire hazard of soldering close to exposed framing members. A few rules should be followed when running PureFlow tubing in wood frame construction: • Use nailing plates to protect the tubing from nails and screws where it passes through studs • Suspension clips are optional but can reduce the potential for noise • When turning tubing sharply to exit from a wall, a bend support must be provided. Either use a drop ear bend support, drop ear elbow or a stub out. Neglecting to use a support will place excessive stress on the fitting, and the tubing will not exit perpendicular to the wall (except FostaPEX). fialling plates protect tutting passing through studs and joists from nails 11.2 Supporting PureFlow Tubing Use only plastic tubing supports. Metal supports may damage tubing. When running tubing, leave a small amount of slack between fasteners to account for tubing contraction. Note that ViegaPEX tubing will expand or contract 1.1 inches per 100 feet for every 10° F of temperature change. In long straight runs allow adequate clearance for this (see section 10.7). The aluminum layer in FostaPEX reduces expansion and contraction, so that it expands only 0.16 inches per 100 feet for every 10° F of temperature change. This makes it ideal for locations where expansion must be minimized. Tubing should be allowed freedom to move slightly as it expands. Do not clip it tightly into place or locate it where it will be tightly constrained. Use suspension clips or an approved plastic insulator where tubing passes through studs or joists where abrasion and noise is a concern (see below). Suspension clips support tubing in joist penetrations or anywhere abrasion is a concern. ViegaPEX tubing must be fastened at 32" inten/als in horizontal runs (see below), and 32-48" for FostaPEX. In risers or vertical runs, ViegaPEX and FostaPEX tubing should be attached with suspension clips or an approved plastic insulator at each floor or ceiling penetration, and every 4 feet in between (see below). Tubing su/iportexl with U-clip orlockdifii^tenerson horizontal runs Suspension clip fasteners used at floor plate maximum 48" J-clamp or lock clip fasteners used to support tubing in vertical runs between floors 29 Viega IM-PF 0511 520709 11.3 Steel Construction The PureFlow system works as well in steel frame constmction as it does in wood. Where tubing mns through metal studs, suspension clip fasteners must be used to protect tubing from sharp stud edges (see illustration to the right). Follow the same guidelines for fastening and supporting the tubing as for wood frame constmction. 11.4 Concrete ViegaPEX and FostaPEX tubing may be run within concrete slabs. All penetration points must be sleeved to prevent tubing damage (entry/ exit points, expansion joints, etc.). Penetrations in walls, etc. may be sealed with silicone caulk. Do not use oil-based caulk. Every effort should be made to use only continuous lengths of tubing within a slab. If the use of fittings buried in concrete is necessary for repairs, all such fittings must be wrapped with insulation, noncorrosive tape (no adhesives) or sleeved to prevent corrosion. When running tubing within a concrete slab, the tubing must be fastened to the reinforcing mesh or rebar every 2 to 3 feet to prevent it from floating up while concrete is curing. See section 11.8 for additional information regarding use of PEX tubing in direct burial applications. 11.5 Installing Under the Slab When installing ViegaPEX or FostaPEX tubing in the ground under the slab, the tubing should be snaked from side to side in the prepared trench. The trench bottom should be smooth and free of rocks and debris. Lay the tubing directly on the trench bottom. Tubing must be continuously supported by the trench bottom. Use only continuous lengths of tubing in or under-slab. Any connections shall be outside the ' slab or in an access box. Suspenston dip fesfeners used to proted tubing from abrasion when passing Hirojgh sted studs Elbow sleeves protect tubing at concrete slab penetrations Tubing must be^teried to the reinfaving mesh on rebar Allow sufftient slack when tubing is laid in trench PEX tutting must be sleeved eit all expansion joints and every point where it enters, exits or penefrates t/ie s/ab. For expansion Joints that are to tx cut, the tubing must be dipped bdow the dab to:prwent damage. 'i'l SLEEVE PEX TUBING AT ALL EXPANSION JOINTS FOR CUT EXPANSION JOINTS, DIP THE TUBING BELOW THE SLAB TO A SAFE DISTANCE AT THE GUT LINES Viega IM-PF 0511 520709 30 viega 11.6 Below Grade and Service Lines ViegaPEX and FostaPEX tubing may both be used underground and for water service piping. When running lines underground, it is important to provide a stable, continuous trench base to support the tubing. Do not use blocking to support tubing. PEX tubing can be damaged by contact with sharp objects. Ensure that trench bottom and fill do not contain sharp rocks or other items. In good soil conditions tubing may be placed directly on trench bottom. In poor soil conditions (rocky, loose, etc.) the trench should be excavated at least 6 inches below the tubing level and backfilled with appropriate material to provide a stable base (coarse sand, pea gravel or similar). Always allow sufficient slack when tubing is laid in trenches. Snake the tubing slightly side-to-side to provide for contraction due to temperature change. ViegaPEX tubing changes length by 1.1 inches per 100 feet for every 10°F temperature change. FostaPEX tubing changes length by 0.16 inches per 100 feet for every 10°F temperature change. Concrete^ i6" min. Compact I Initial IVlaunching Backfill Bedrling Backfill material must be free of large rocks, glass or other sharp objects. Provide sufficient coverage over tubing so that expected traffic loads will not deform tubing (consult local codes). Compact this material to at least 6" above the tube. Do not install PureFlow tubing where soil is or may become contaminated with solvents, fuels or similar Trench in good soil chemicals. Also do not install tubing above or below septic tanks, leach fields, pits or cesspools. Always follow local codes when installing PureFlow tubing. Consult standards such as ASTM D2774: Standard Recommended Practice for Underground Installation of Thermoplastic Pressure Piping for further information. 11.7 Foundation Penetration Where service lines penetrate foundation or basement walls, to prevent shearing or pinching off of the tube when backfill below the tubing settles, plastic tubing must be properly sleeved. If there is an area of over-excavation through which the tubing must pass, it shall be sleeved with a larger rigid Sleeve to undisturbed earth with rigid pipe. '-xjij Trench in poor soil pipe (Schedule 40 PVC or equivalent) to undisturbed earth. The foundation end of the rigid pipe must also be supported by the foundation wall. Slight over-excavations (12" or less) do not require rigid sleeving when the area below the tubing is back- filled and well compacted to the level of penetration. Always sleeve plastic tubing where it passes through concrete. Do not use oil-based caulks or sealants in contact with PureFlow tubing. 11.8 Direct Burial of PureFlow Fittings When direct burying PureFlow fittings, PEX Press fittings do not need to be wrapped; however, Brass PEX Crimp fittings do. When Brass PEX Crimp fittings are put in contact with ground soil by direct burial, it is the position of Viega, that these brass fittings and copper crimp rings be securely wrapped using self-fusing, fully cured silicone rubberiike tape with a minimum 0.020" thickness. Contact a Viega representative for additional information on approved wrapping materials. 31 Viega IM-PF 0511 520709 11.9 Protecting PEX Tubing Protect tubing and fittings from UV exposure. Due to the nature of slab-on-grade installation, tubing and fittings may be exposed to UV light for unspecified periods of time. To prevent damage from UV exposure, all tubing and PolyAlloy fittings shall be protected with an opaque covering (black plastic polyethylene bag or sheeting) immediately after they have been installed. PEX tubing shall be stored under cover, shielded from direct and indirect sunlight when the material is stored for any length of time. Short exposure times of ViegaPEX, FostaPEX and PolyAlloy fittings not exceeding the total accumulated recommended exposure time are permissible. PEX tubing should always be shidded from dired and indirect sunlight J\ Inform the other trades / i\ working on the same structure of the plumbing lines. Common damage to PEX during construction is from staples, nails, screws or other sharp fasteners. Informing the other trades of the presence of the lines may help prevent damage. When the tubing penetrates at an angle in relation to the hole, it may be subject to a sharp edge that can damage the pipe. Acceptable sleeving materials include flexible plastic tubing, foam pipe insulation or an approved plastic insulator. It is not necessary to sleeve PEX when penetrating wooden framing members or non-metallic finished or unfinished walls. However, if there is a doubt, sleeve the pipe or install an insulator. Sleeve all penetrations of metal, metal studs and masonry or concrete. Protect dl exposed tubing with an opaque covering When penetrations must be sealed for air infiltration purposes, there are several options available. Use a good grade of silicone, acrylic or siliconized acrylic caulking. DO NOT use oil-based caulks. Most canned expanding foams and open- or closed-cell pipe insulation are good sealing materials and may be used in direct contact with PEX tubing. Other materials may be used provided they do not cause short- or long-term damage to the PEX tubing. /\ When using expanding spray / ;\ foam to insulate walls in a stmcture, there are several options available. Viega suggest using water based or urethane based open-cell insulation only. DO NOT use closed-cell type spray foams. Closed-cell spray foams have the potential to generate high temperatures during their expansion process, especially when not applied properiy, which can damage PEX tubing. Always follow the spray foam manufacturer's installation instmctions and warnings. If there is no information available on the compatibility of the proposed sealing material, wrap the tubing with several layers of aluminum foil in the area of contact and extending a few inches on both sides before applying the sealing material. Most building codes require the use of a fire-stopping compound when tubing penetrates a fire-rated wall. There are a number of fire-stopping compounds available that have been listed for use with PEX tubing. These compounds come in standard caulking tubes and are identified as water based, acrylic or latex. Consult the compound manufacturers' instructions for proper application. DO NOT APPLY CHEMICALS TO VIEGAPEX TUBING! Viega IM-PF 0511 520709 32 12. INSTALLING MANIFOLDS AND FITTINGS viega 12.1 General The use of manifolds can simplify installation of the plumbing system, as well as eliminate hidden fittings in walls and ceilings. Viega offers several different manifolds to meet a variety of applications, whether it is a homerun or a combination installation. 12.2 PureFlow PEX Press Brazed Copper Manifolds PureFlow PEX Press Brazed Copper Manifolds are available for use where permanent connections must be used (concealed locations). These are offered in 3, 4, 5, 6, 8,10 or 12 outlets. Manifolds are 1" copper with male or female solder inlets and 1/2" PEX Press outlets. The end of each manifold is closed, but can be cut off for through mns or joining to make larger manifolds. The manifolds can be fastened using any standard fasteners for 1" tubing such as Viega Lock Clips. Copper Manifold Dimensions Number of Outiets Manifold Length (L) 3 8" 4 10" 5 12" 6 14" 8 18" 10 22" 12 26" 12.3 PEX Press ProPress Manifolds PEX Press ProPress manifolds are modular in design to allow for easy assembly and flexibility on the job site. They may be used where permanent connections are necessary (concealed locations). These manifolds have a 3/4" or 1" ProPress inlet with 1/2" or 3/4" PEX outlets. The open ends, one straight and one with a ProPress connection, enable the manifolds to be connected together on the job site to create as many outlets as needed. In addition, these manifolds are available with 1" ProPress inlet and 1/2" ProPress outlets that may be assembled with 1/2" ProPress Manifold Valves or the Press Copper Fitting Adapter, to create as many valved outlets as needed. The ProPress Tool is required for connections. PEX Press ProPress Manifold Dimensions Number of Outiets Manifold Length (L) 1 3-3/8" 3 7-5/16" ProPress Manifold Dimensions Number of Outiets Manifold Length (L) 1 3-11/16" 3 7-5/16" PEX Press Brazed Copper Manifold PEX Press ProPress Manifdd 12.4 PureFlow PEX Crimp Brazed Copper Manifolds PureFlow PEX Crimp Brazed Copper Manifolds are available for use where permanent connections must be used (concealed locations.) These are offered in 4, 6, 8 or 10 outlets. Manifolds are 1" copper with 1" or 3/4" crimp inlets and 1/2" PEX crimp outlets PEX Crimp Manifold Dimensions Number of Outlets Manifold Length (L) 4 10-11/16" 6 14-11/16" 8 18-11/16" 10 20-11/16" 12.5 PureFlow MANABLOC® Homerun Manifold Plumbing System Viega offers the industry's leading homerun manifold solution: MANABLOC. MANABLOC has been in use for more than 20 years with exceptional performance and added value to end users. It provides faster hot water delivery times, balanced water delivery and less pressure drop during multiple fixture use. MANABLOC is compatible with all PureFlow fitting systems. Please refer to section 14. MANABLOC Homerun Manifold Plumbing System 33 Viega IM-PF 0511 520709 12.6 Stub Out Options The PureFlow system includes fittings to accommodate most plumbing needs. Stub outs are available for a variety of fixture situations, as well as fittings and valves to connect to other plumbing materials and fixtures. Copper Stub Out Copper Strdght Stub Out Standard stub outs with 90-degree bends and a closed end to facilitate pressure testing are available in either 3/8" or 1/2" PEX x 1/2" Copper. Also, PEX Press Copper tub els and PEX Crimp shower valve adapters are available for easy connections to tub and shower valves. CopperTubEl Shower Vah/e Adapter Drop ear elbows provide a 1/2" or 3/4" F NPT threaded connection at a wall or floor penetration, as well as a flange for securing the fitting. Drop ear bend supports allow ViegaPEX tubing to be directly stubbed out of a wall. These supports allow the tubing to make the tight bend necessary to exit the wall at a 90-degree angle, as well as providing a flange for securing the support. The exposed tubing can then be connected to a valve, using an optional chrome sleeve to cover the tubing if desired. Drop Ear Elbow Drop Ear Bend Support 1/2" snap-in bend supports are also available with a metal mounting bracket (sold separately) for quick and easy stub outs with 1/2" ViegaPEX tubing. Seven stub out locations and numerous nail holes make this a versatile option for stubbing out any number of lines, or supporting tubing near manifolds. 12.7 Copper Connections Fittings are available to adapt PureFlow tubing to both copper tubing and copper fittings. Copper tubing adapters slip over copper tubing to provide a sweat or ProPress connection. Always make the sweat connection to the fitting before connecting PEX to avoid heat damage to the tubing. Copper fitting adapters fit into copper fittings to mate PEX to standard sweat or ProPress fittings. As with copper tubing adapters, always make sweat connections prior to PEX connection to avoid tubing damage. CopperTutMng Adapters Press ProPress Adapter Copper Fitting Adapters Snap-in Bend Supports with Bracket Viega IM-PF 0511 520709 34 viega 12.8 Threaded Connections The PureFlow system also provides a number of fittings to adapt ViegaPEX and FostaPEX tubing to NPT threads. In addition to the NPT drop ear elbows already mentioned, male and female adapters and male NPT elbows provide threaded connections. The threaded connection should always be made before the PEX connection to avoid twisting the PEX connection. 12.9 Valves In-line ball valves are available for use with PureFlow tubing. These brass finish valves may be used anywhere an in-line valve is needed. Stop valves have 3/8" or 1/2" PEX inlets and 1/4" CTS (3/8" O.D.) riser outlets. Both straight and angled versions are available depending on installation requirements. Compression stop valves provide a compression fit over ViegaPEX tubing and a connection to a 3/8" O.D. riser. Use of included insert stiffener and plastic fenule are required when connecting ViegaPEX tubing to the supply side of a compression stop valve. After installation, retighten all compression fittings after 30 minutes to ensure a watertight seal. (Compression valves are not designed to work with FostaPEX.) Male Adapters 1/4 Tum Straight Stop Valve PEX Press to 3/8" O.D. Riser Femde Adapters 114 Tum Strdght Stop Valve PEX Crimp to 3/8' O.D. Riser 1/4 Tum Angle Stop Valve PEX Press to 3/8" O.D. Riser 1/4 Tum Angle Stop Valve PEX Crimp to 3/8" O.D. Riser PureHow NPT Bbows In-line Bdl Valve (Press) In-line Bdl \^dve (Crimp) 35 Viega IM-PF 0511 520709 WATER CLOSET CONNECTIONS RISER CONNECTIONS ^ • Tighten fixture nut hand tight plus an addrtional 1/4 tum. Check all connections for leaks. DO NOT OVERTIGHTEN. Fixture Shank Hir-ai Corm Fixluro Nut Thread fixture nut onto fixture shank. Tighten fixture nut hand tight plus an additional 1/2 turn. Slide compression nut and supplied plastic ferrule over tube as shown. The long taper of the ferrule goes toward valve. Tighten compression nut according to valve manufacturer's recommendations. HOSE BIBB CONNECTIONS Hose bibbs supported by the structure can be connected directly. Freestanding hose bibbs shall not be supported by ViegaPEX. Well-anchored dropear fittings or metal pipe shall be used to install hose bibbs. CD FAUCET CONNECTIONS LAV or KITCHEN CD Tighten fixture nut hand tight plus an additional 1/4 turn. Check all connections for leaks. DO NOT OVERTIGHTEN. Viega IM-PF 0511 520709 36 viega 13. PUREFLOW MANABLOC SYSTEM DESIGN AND SIZING 13.1 General The general sizing infonnation shown may be appropriate for many MANABLOC installations. These recommendations are based on flow rates of typical fixtures that require 8 psi residual pressure. The length of distribution tubing run between the MANABLOC and each fixture shall be 60 feet or less to ensure optimal performance of the MANABLOC system. Exceeding this recommended distance affects the system's ability to efficiently deliver hot water, lengthening the time it takes for hot water to reach the fixture as well as increasing water waste. 13.2 Supply and Distribution Line Sizing The service line needs to be sized appropriately for the additional water demand. A typical residential plumbing system cannot be plumbed with all 3/8" distribution lines. It is the decision of the user to choose a combination of both 3/8" and 1/2" lines or to upsize the entire system to 1/2". However, supplying fixtures with 1/2" lines when it is unnecessary for the fixture demand, will increase the wait time for hot water delivery to those fixtures. The best water and energy savings of a MANABLOC system are realized when distribution lines are sized according to the fixture demand and the length of the individual line. Typical supply line size: 3/4" up to 2-1/2 baths 1" up to 4-1/2 baths Typical distribution line size: 3/8" up to 2-1/2 GPM ixture flow requirement (lavs, toilets, bidets, bar sinks, kitchen sinks, dishwashers, some showers (no tub fill)* and some washing machines)** 1/2" up to 4 GPM fixture flow requirement (hose bibbs, tubs, showers, washing machines, whiripool baths, soaking tubs, etc.) * Due to the many types of shower valves, it is recommended that you consult the valve manufacturer's literature to detennine the actual flow rate and required residual pressure demands of the fixture. Use the MANABLOC Tube Size Guide to detennine distribution line size and length limitations. **Some washing machines use a timer instead of a water-level sensor to determine when the machine has been filled with the proper amount of water. There are cases in which low supply pressure or excessive distribution line length may cause some machines to fill to a level less than designed. Consult the washing machine manufacturer's literature to detennine the actual fill rate and residual pressure requirements for distribution line size. Hose Bibb Note: If a hose bibb is primarily for irrigation purposes, it should be supplied from the main sen/ice line prior to the MANABLOC. A PEX Press and PEX Crimp MANABLOC comes with 1/2" ports that are designed to fit both 3/8" and 1/2" PEX port adapters. The adapters are available to purchase separately (bags of 6) and adapt to these different PEX tube sizes. Note: Each port converted to a larger or smaller size requires one adapter and one PEX Crimp ring or PEX Press sleeve (sold separately). 13.3 Plumbing Code Compliance (Paraiiel Systems) The MANABLOC parallel water distribution system meets the ASTM F877, standard specification for cross- linked polyethylene (PEX) plastic hot and cold water distribution system utilizing ViegaPEX tubing meeting the requirements of the ASTM F876, standard specification for cross-linked polyethylene tubing. 37 The International Plumbing Code® (IPC) and the Unifonn Plumbing Code™ (UPC) recognize and list these ASTM standards within their respective mandatory standards and/or approved material sections. The MANABLOC is lAPMO listed to the UPC utilizing both 3/8" and 1/2" PEX tubing sizes for distribution. Sizing of Parallel Water Distribution Systems (MANABLOC) are addressed in both the IPC and UPC plumbing codes. In the IPC, section 604.5 Size of fixture supply states, "The minimum size of individual distribution line utilized in gridded or parallel water distribution systems shall be as shown in Table 604.5." This table includes 3/8", 1/2" and 3/4" size tubing. In the UPC, section 610.4 it states, "Listed parallel water distribution systems shall be installed in accordance with their listing, but at no time shall any portion of the system exceed the maximum velocities allowed by the code." The MANABLOCs lAPMO UPC listing says to install per the manufacturer's current installation instmctions. Therefore, these instructions shall be used to size and install these types of systems. 13.4 Valve Requirements for Parallel Systems The IPC and UPC codes address valves in sections 604.10.3 Valves, and 605.5 respectively, which allow the use of manifold valves in parallel systems in lieu of valves at the fixture, as long as they are installed at the manifold and are identified with the fixture being supplied. Viega IM-PF 0511 520709 14. INSTALLING THE MANABLOC Hot Water Supply Inlet Y-Block Cold Port(s) Hot Port(s) Valve Key Cold Water Supply Inlet or Outlet Port Valve Cold Water Supply Inlet or Outlet Cold Port(s) Plastic Mounting Bracket 14.1 General Use the same precautions outlined in section 10 of this guide for proper handling of the PureFlow tubing when installing the MANABLOC. Components utilized in the MANABLOC plumbing system consist of ViegaPEX, ViegaPEX Ultra, and FostaPEX cross-linked polyethylene tubing, fixture transition fittings, water service swivel connections, compression port connections and the MANABLOC control unit. The MANABLOC and ViegaPEX tubing are manufactured to national and international standards and are listed by recognized third- party agencies. 14.2 Overview and Carton Contents Additional package contents include: • Valve T-Handle • Instruction Packet — to be left at installation site • Port Labels 14.3 Location Before installing the MANABLOC, review the following instmctions. NOTE: The MANABLOC is much like an electrical breaker box. When a fixture needs repair, the line to that fixture may be shut off at the MANABLOC, eliminating the need to shut down the water supply for the entire house. This feature requires that the MANABLOC be accessible after installation. 1. Under no circumstances shall the MANABLOC be located in a permanently covered area (behind sheetrock, plywood, paneling), or where freezing temperatures may occur. Do not install in direct sunlight. THE MANABLOC MUST BE ACCESSIBLE and there shall be sufficient clear area in front of the MANABLOC to provide access. 2. When local code allows, mount the MANABLOC unit in a fire rated wall, provided an access door meeting the same rating requirements as the wall is installed over the access opening. Viega IM-PF 0511 520709 38 viega 3. When installing the MANABLOC in a location other than between studs, provisions must be made to support the tubing mns as they exit the MANABLOC. (See section 15.3). 4. Any installed cover panel shall allow access to the MANABLOC and its mounting screws, the port valves, distribution line connections and supply line connections. 5. To maximize potential water and energy savings, the MANABLOC should be mounted as close as is practical to the hot water source, taking the following into consideration: a. When the MANABLOC is mounted above the water heater, there shall be a minimum of 36" of connecting tubing between the water heater and the MANABLOC to reduce the chance of heat stacking. b. When the MANABLOC is mounted beside the water heater and is connected with tubing incorporating a horizontal flow, there shall be at least 18" of developed tube length. Mounting MANABLOC Location m am m m ass mi 18" to 8' developed tube length 36" minimum connecting tube vertically to water the MANABLOC within 8 feet of developed tube length of the water heater will minimize delivery time of hot water to individual fixtures. The MANABLOC may be mounted closer than 12" to the hot water source (tank) if it does not exceed the minimum allowable vertical and horizontal spacing outlined in this section. c. Install the unit in an area that is centrally located to the most dense concentration of served fixtures. Some applications will require that the MANABLOC be mounted farther than eight (8) feet from the hot water source. See design factors for installing a parallel system on page 8 for suggestions on reducing hot water delivery times in these instances. 6. DO NOT install the MANABLOC within a continuously recirculating hot water plumbing loop. The MANABLOC, however, may be supplied from a recirculating hot water loop. (See figure below.) 7. Position the MANABLOC so that it can be securely fastened through the holes provided in the mounting brackets. The mounting surface should be as flat as possible so as not to induce any twisting or bending forces on the unit. The 45716 Mounting Straps simplify mounting between studs on 16" centers. -r n" 1 DSfl eat m em Continuously Recirculating Hot Water Plumbing Loops PEX • Hot Supply PEX IB PEX Cold Supply If ttie MANABLOC must be mounted farther than 8' from the hot water source, the MANABLOC may be supplied from a recirculating hot water loop with ViegaPEX PEX5006 (CL5) listed PEX tubing. Hot Cold Supply Hot Return Circ Pump Check Valve =lOr: 3old Water Heater 39 Viega IM-PF 0511 520709 14.4 Valve Operation A MANABLOC system, which has valves on all of the outiet ports, does not require stop valves at the fixtures. However, the Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ) may require stop valves at some fixtures. Use the included red key handle to turn each port ON or OFR Valves are marked with arrows indicating their ON/OFF positions: Left Port- An-ow Up for OFF Arrow Left for ON Right Port — Arrow Down for OFF Arrow Right for ON Note: these valves are field-repairable. Contact Viega Customer Service for more information on this procedure. If a main inlet/outlet will not be used, it must be capped (use Stock Code 53601). The main service line to the MANABLOC may include a main shutoff valve, as required by local code. Although a shutoff valve for the main service line at the MANABLOC itself is not required, it can be a beneficial option for a homeowner and is recommended. Optional MANABLOC SHUTOFF Local code may also require the installation of a check valve, PRV (pressure reducing valve), back flow preventer, etc. To prevent debris and other particles from entering the system, a strainer may be installed in the service line. 14.5 Domestic Hot Water Circulation Systems ViegaPEX and the MANABLOC can be used in continuously recirculating domestic hot water plumbing loops, provided: • The plumbing loops operate with water temperatures of 140°F or lower, as required by most model plumbing codes • The recirculating loop is for supplying hot water more quickly to the MANABLOC, not to circulate through the MANABLOC or the distribution lines DO NOT include the MANABLOC within a continuously recirculating loop. 14.6 Multiple MANABLOC Installations If a home requires multiple MANABLOCs to sen/ice the number of fixtures in the home, these guidelines should be followed if the MANABLOCs are closely located to each other. • Consider dividing high demand fixtures between the units • Consider a reasonable division, i.e. upstairs/downstairs, east/west or front/back Locating a Remote MANABLOC A remote MANABLOC is sometimes recommended to achieve maximum efficiency from your MANABLOC system. Advantageous when the line lengths are excessive from one centralized MANABLOC unit. When the home requires more than one unit due to the number of fixtures or size of the home, consider locating a remote unit near an outlying group of fixtures. 14.7 ViegaPEX General Design/Installation Practices The foilowing are general guidelines to consider when installing ViegaPEX tubing with a MANABLOC system. Please refer to section 10 of this installation guide for more detail on PEX tubing installations: 1. Insulating each PEX tube individually or as a group is not necessary if the PEX tubing is installed within the insulation envelope of the structure, i.e. the heated area. For example, the tubing may be installed under the insulation in the attic or within an interior wall of a heated space. 2. Install a minimum 18" of metallic or other piping between the water heater and PEX. For electric water heaters, it is pennissible to connect directly to the inlets and outlets with a brass swivel elbow or straight brass swivel fitting. 3. Protect the PEX tubing with non-metallic sleeving material where it enters and/or exits a slab or at mass penetrations. PEX need not be sleeved its entire length within the slab. However, full-length sleeving is allowed. Viega IM-PF 0511 520709 40 viega Penetrations through concrete walls may be sleeved with a larger size metal or plastic tube. Protect the tubing from any sharp edges where it enters and exits larger sleeving material. A COLD WEATHER CAUTIONI /|\ The thermoplastic components of the MANABLOC, like all thermoplastics, have decreased resistance to impact under freezing conditions and can be damaged. Care must be exercised when installation occurs in freezing conditions. BEFORE INSTALLING THE MANABLOC, MAKE SURE THE LOCATION REQUIREMENTS HAVE BEEN MET. Take extra caution when handling the MANABLOC in temperatures that are below freezing. Tubing penetrations may require sleeving or the installation of an insulator. When the tubing penetrates at an angle in relation to the hole, it may be subject to a sharp edge that can damage the pipe. Acceptable sleeving materials include flexible plasfic tubing, foam pipe insulation or an approved plastic insulator. It is not necessary to sleeve PEX when penetrating wooden framing members or non-metallic finished or unfinished walls. However, if there is a doubt, sleeve the pipe or install an insulator. Sleeve all penetrations of metal, metal studs and masonry or concrete. When penetrations must be sealed for air infiltration purposes, there are several options available. Use a good grade of silicone, acrylic or siliconized acrylic caulking. DO NOT use oil-based caulks. Most canned expanding foams and open- or closed-cell pipe insulation are good sealing materials and may be used in direct contact with PEX tubing. Other materials may be used provided they do not cause short- or long-tenn damage to the PEX tubing. A. When using expanding spray /t\ foam to insulate walls in a stmcture, there are several options available. Viega suggest using water based or urethane based open- cell insulation only DO NOT use closed-cell type spray foams. Closed- cell spray foams have the potential to generate high temperatures during their expansion process, especially when not applied properiy, which can damage PEX tubing. Always follow the spray foam manufacturer's installation instmctions and warnings. If there is no information available on the compatibility of the proposed sealing material, wrap the tubing with several layers of aluminum foil in the area of contact and extending a few inches on both sides before applying the sealing material. Most building codes require the use of a fire-stopping compound when tubing penetrates a fire-rated wall. There are a number of fire-stopping compounds available that have been listed for use with PEX tubing. These compounds come in standard caulking tubes and are identified as water based, acrylic or latex. Consult the compound manufacturers' instructions for proper application. DO NOT APPLY CHEMICALS TO THE MANABLOC PureFlow MANABLOC must be protected from UV exposure and petroleum products which can damage them. In the event of incidental UV exposure during storage, installation and handling, combined exposure shall not exceed 15 days. PEX tubing should always be shielded fronn direct or indirect sunlight. PEX tubing shall be stored under cover, shielded from direct and indirect sunlight when the material is stored for any length of time. Short exposure times, of ViegaPEX, FostaPEX and PolyAlloy fittings, not exceeding the total accumulated recommended exposure time are permissible. 41 Viega IM-PF 0511 520709 15. MOUNTING THE MANABLOC 15.1 Mounting the MANABLOC Between Studs NOTICE! Please leave this installation guide for the homeowner's reference. Local code may also require additional labeling directly adjacent to the MANABLOC or on the inside of any cover panel. Dimensions in these instructions are for 16" stud centers, and must be adjusted for other stud spacing. Once the general location of the MANABLOC has been determined (see section 14.3 for guidelines), the MANABLOC may be mounted to a suitable surface between a pair of adjacent studs. For 16" stud spacing, the 45716 Mounting Straps can simplify installation. Tools Required • Electric Drill • Pencil or Pen • Framing Square • Tape Measure • 3/4" and 1-1/4" Wood Drill Bits • #2 Phillips Head Screwdriver • Pemnanent Marking Pen* • Tubing Cutter - Stock Gode 21304 or 21307 • PEX Press/Crimp Tool(s)* • MANABLOC Wrench* - Stock Code 50631 (Compression Blocs only) Addttional Materials • Wood or Drywall Screws - 1/2" or longer • 1/2" or 3/4" Plywood - only required when not mounting between studs • Nylon Ties - Stock Code 43714 • PEX Distribution Line Tubing • Supply Line Tubing • MANABLOC 1" Swivel Supply Fittings • Fixture Transition Fittings • Tubing Clamps and Hangers • MANAPANEL Access Panel* • Tubing Uncoiler* • Tube Turnouts (recommended) • Optional or may not be required for some installations 1. Lay the MANABLOC, plastic brackets down, on a suitable flat surface that is large enough to accommodate the full length ofthe MANABLOC. Place a 45716 Mounting Strap under each plastic mounting bracket (located at the top and bottom ends of the MANABLOC). Attach the plastic mounting bracket at one end of the MANABLOC to the two outer center holes of a Mounting Strap using the provided self-tapping pan-head screws. The screw heads must be on the accessible side of the mounting strap. Repeat at the other end of the MANABLOC. Tighten screws securely. 2. Standing behind the studwall, measure up from the floor and make a mark on the back of one of the studs to represent the top of the MANABLOC. (See illustration.) 4' to 6' frcim floor Measure up from the floor while standing behind the studwall. Mark a location for the top of the MANABLOC. Viega IM-PF 0511 520709 This mark should be between 4 feet and 6 feet from the floor but may be at any height, provided the height will allow all valves on the MANABLOC to be accessible. With a framing square or level, transfer and mark the noted height on the other stud. NOTE: A residence intended for disabled persons may require that the MANABLOC be mounted lower in the wall to provide access. 42 3. Standing behind the stud wall, hold the MANABLOC facing away from you and align the top of the UPPER 45716 Mounting Strap to the line on the stud that you made in Step 2. Loosely attach this Mounting Strap flush to the back outer edge of one stud using a 3/4" or longer drywall or other suitable wood screw (A). See illustration. 1 I (View from back of wall) Line up the LOWER Mounting Strap with the back outer edge of the stud and attach it in the same manner (B). Attach the remaining strap ends (C & D) to the other stud, and tighten all screws. . Standing in front of the wall, using a framing square or straight edge, mark the center line position of the top and bottom ports onto both studs (see illustration). Mark the centers of the top and tiottom MANABLOC ports (A, B) viega . Detach the MANABLOC from its Mounting Straps (or 1 x 4s) and remove it from the installation area to prevent wood chips or other debris from falling into the unit. . Transfer the port location marks made in step 5 to the insides of the stud cavity using a square and pencil. . Measure 1-5/8" from the mounting surface. Draw a vertical line on the studs that passes through each of the horizontal port center lines marked in step 7 (see illustration below). Be sure to mark the inside of both studs. 9. Push a small nail through the printed center line at one end of the Drill Guide (A). Push the nail into the cross formed where the top port mark intersects with the 1-5/8" mark. Tap the nail into the stud to hold the Drill Guide in place. 10. Push a small nail through the printed center line on the lower end of Drill Guide with the center line of the port. (B). Tap the nail into the stud to hold the Drill Guide in place. 11. Using an awl, nail or other pointed tool (C), mark the stud by tapping through the Drill Guide at each printed center line between the two nails. 12. Carefully remove the Drill Guide and repeat the mari<ing procedure on the adjacent stud. 13. Drill 3/4" holes through both studs at each marked location. Be sure to hold the drill level perpendicular to the stud to prevent drilling holes at an angle. Remove any splinters or burrs made during drilling. 14. Mark and drill any holes for main water supply and hot water supply/return lines at this time. A 1-1/4" bit will provide adequate clearance for 3/4" or 1" tubing. The tubing shall enter and/or exit the MANABLOC in a straight line so as not to induce bending stress on the MANABLOC. Necessary elbows, couplings and tees are allowed in the main water supply lines. 15. Reattach the MANABLOC to the mounting straps. When the MANABLOC is installed prior to wall finishing operations, the unit MUST be protected from paint, texture compounds and drywall dust. NOTE: The wall in which the MANABLOC is mounted must be accessible from both sides during installation to use the 45716 Mounting Straps. 15.2 Mounting the MANABLOC Between Studs Without Use of 45716 Straps Ifnot using the 45716 Mounting Straps, this procedure applies: 1. Cut two pieces of lumber (1 x 4 - or 3/4" plywood - about 3-1/2" wide) to a length that provides a snug fit BETWEEN two studs. 1x4 m "^^^ m (TOP VIEW) 1 x4s attach at the back, inside the studs, and the MANABLOC is centered between the studs. 43 Viega IM-PF 0511 520709 2. The top of the MANABLOC should be between 4' and 6' from the floor (but may be at any height provided that it maintains accessibility to all of the ports on the MANABLOC). Make a mark near the back of the inside of one stud that would represent the top of the MANABLOC. With a framing square or level, mirror the mark on the inside back of the other stud. 3. ATTACHING THE MANABLOC BETWEEN THE STUDS: a. Measure the total length of the MANABLOC. b. Attach the first (UPPER) 1 x 4 inside and fiush to the back of the studs (see TOP VIEW on previous page) at a height where the center of its width is centered on the marks from step 2. c. Attach the remaining (LOWER) 1x4 inside and flush to the back of the studs at a distance below the upper 1x4 that is equal to the length of the MANABLOC (step 3a) when measured from the top of the upper 1 X 4 to the bottom of the lower 1 X 4. See FRONT VIEW illustration. step 3C: Distance between lop and iKltom of 1X 4's is equal lo fengil) of MANABLOC (FRONT VIEW) 4. CENTER THE MANABLOC IN THE STUD CAVITY: Attach the MANABLOC to the 1 x 4s with four 1/2" - 3/4" drywall screws (DO NOT OVERTIGHTEN). 5. Continue to section 15.1 step 5 to finish installafion. 15.3 Mounting the MANABLOC Without Studs, Surface Mount 1. A suitable base for the MANABLOC can be constructed from a section of 1/2" or thicker plywood that is a minimum 22-1/2" wide and slightly longer than the overall length of the MANABLOC. 2. Securely attach a length of 2 x 4, or other suitable framing material with a thickness of 1-1/2" and about 3-1/2" wide on the left and right sides of the mounting base running the full-length of the MANABLOC (see illustration below). The 2 x 4s will be used to secure the distribution lines at the con-ect height as they exit the MANABLOC. (Support clamps not to exceed 6" spacing from end of ports.) Longer trun mmjK 3. Attach the mounting base to the stmcture in a suitable location (see Section 14.3). The base should be mounted so the top of the MANABLOC is between 4 feet and 6 feet from the floor but may be at any height provided that the height maintains accessibility to all the ports on the MANABLOC. 4. The mounting base must be firmly attached to a structure solid enough to support, at a minimum, the weight of the MANABLOC filled with water. The base should be square and level. 5. Center the MANABLOC on the base both vertically and horizontally as shown here. Attach the MANABLOC to the mounting base with four 1/2" or longer drywall or wood screws through the holes in the plastic brackets on the MANABLOC. (DO NOT OVERTIGHTEN) , As the distribution lines are connected to the MANABLOC (see section 16.2), ensure that the tubing exits the unit at a 90-degree angle to the center line of the MANABLOC so as not to induce bending stress on the MANABLOC. viega IM-PF 0511 520709 44 viega 7. When attaching the distribution line tubing to the 2 x 4 supports, be sure to use appropriately sized Viega tubing clamps (For example, use stock code 52 000 for 3/8" tubing and stock code 52 020 for 1/2" tubing). Use one clamp per tube to ensure that the tubing is held securely. Position clamps NO FARTHER than six (6) inches from the end of the port. DO NOT pull tubing tight. Leave at least 7" of slack per 50' of tubing run. This is to accommodate for any expansion and/or contraction of the tubing caused by ambient air or water temperature changes. 45 Viega IM-PF 0511 520709 16. INSTALLING MANABLOC DISTRIBUTION LINES 16.1 Installing MANABLOC Distribution Lines Run distribution lines continuously in the most direct route from the MANABLOC to the fixtures. A distribution line may contain a coupling or other fitting for purposes such as repairing a damaged section of tubing, handling a change of direction that cannot be made within the minimum bend radius guidelines, accommodating a fixture location change that requires a longer line, or to supply a low-demand accessory (i.e., ice maker). However, several pieces of shorter tubing should not be connected with fittings for the purpose of using up leftover lengths of tubing. NOTE: It is the responsibility of the installer to ensure that further consti-uction, finishing and other mechanical system installations do not compromise the MANABLOC plumbing system as installed according to these instructions. 1. Tubing coils are usually placed at the MANABLOC location and tubing is pulled to the fixture through stud cavities, holes drilled overhead in floor joists, etc. Several tubes may be pulled at one time. Viega's color-coded ViegaPEX tubing helps prevent cross-connections. 2. Do not pull tubing tightly. Some slack (7" per 50') is necessary to accommodate expansion and contraction. Leave enough excess tubing at the beginning and end of runs to make connections without putting strain on the tubing. 3. Exercise care when pulling PEX tubing to prevent cutting or abrading. Take care to prevent kinking of the coiled tubing. If kinking or cutting occurs, cut out the damaged section and install a coupling. 4. For the best results, connect the distribution lines to fixtures and the MANABLOC immediately upon installation. Label the end- use fixture on the MANABLOC cover plate next to the port. Viega IM-PF 0511 520709 Self-adhesive labels are supplied with the MANABLOC. Mark tubes pulled as a bundle or those not connected immediately at both ends with a pemnanent marker to designate the fixture supplied. 5. Since plumbing fixtures are generally located in groups, and there may be several ViegaPEX distribution lines running to approximately the same location, it is easiest to run these distribution lines bundled together. Hot and cold lines may be run in the same bundle. For a neat appearance, tie bundles with nylon ties (Stock Code 43714 or 43701 or plastic strapping at regular intervals. NOTE: Bundles shall be sufficiently tied for tubing support but shall NOT restrict tubing expansion and contraction caused by temperature variations. /V CAUTION: DO NOT /|\ USE DUCT TAPE FOR BUNDLING. Duct tape will not permit tubing movemenL 6. Bundles can be supported with hangers designed for larger tubing sizes. 46 7. The 43714 or 43701 can be used to support PEX lines directly from wooden framing members. Any plastic cable ties capable of supporting the weight of the tube or bundle when filled with water can be used. 8. Holes drilled through studs, joists, plates, headers, etc. must be large enough to accommodate tubing bundles without binding to allow free movement. Several smaller holes (accommodating a few lines each) may be preferable to drilling a bundle-size hole. In no case should the hole size exceed building code guidelines, as this could weaken the structural support members. For more detailed instructions, refer to section 10 of this guide. 16.2 Connecting Distribution Lines to the MANABLOC PEX Press, PEX Crimp and Compression connection models are available and included with each MANABLOC model. Supply connections are not included and must be ordered separately. If there are unused ports Viega recommends to cap them, to protect from the home owner opening the wrong valve. Use Stock Code 36203 (1/2" ports) or 36202 (3/8" ports). UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES shall any form of thread sealant (Teflon® paste, pipe dope) be used on distribution line connections. The carriers present in these compounds can crack the plastic port connections, resulting in leaks and water damage. viega 16.2.1 Compression Connections (3/8" & 1/2" ports) THE WATER SUPPLY TO THE MANABLOC AND THE PORT VALVES SHALL BE TURNED OFF BEFORE ATTEMPTING INSTALLATION OF PEX COMPRESSION CONNECTIONS. •\ NOT FOR USE WITH ^ FOSTAPEX NOTE: The red MANABLOC valves designate hot ports, the blue valves designate cold ports. Make sure the distribution lines are connected to the correct ports (hot or cold). The use of color-coded ViegaPEX tubing reduces the possibility of cross connections. 1. For each distribution line, slide the Lock-In compression nut (A), Lock-In insert (B) and the plastic ferrule (C) onto the tubing in that order. See illustration below. ED C B The long taper of a 3/8" ferrule (C) must be TOWARD THE END OF THE TUBE; a 1/2" ferrule is symmetrical and may be installed facing either direction. Insert the stainless steel stiffener (D) COMPLETELY into the end of the tubing. . WARNING: DO NOT attempt to •\ install the Lock-In insert backwards as it may break. ALWAYS insert the long portion of the insert sleeve over the tube first. DO NOT attempt to use or reuse inserts that are defective, cracked, broken or othenwise damaged, as connection failure will result. 2. Push the tubing into the port socket (E) until it bottoms out. Holding the tube so that it does not back out of the port socket, slide the white Lock-In insert and ferrule snugly against the chamfer inside the port socket. While holding the tube against the bottom of the socket, thread the Lock-In compression nut onto the port and tighten hand-tight. 3. While holding the tube securely to prevent turning, finish tightening the nut with the MANABLOC Wrench (Stock Code 50631) until the white Lock-In insert appears between the lugs and becomes fiush with the ends of the lugs, plus 1/4 to 1/2 turn. ^LUG Complete the connection as soon as each distribution line is connected to the MANABLOC. Each valve should be turned counter clockwise a quarter turn to the open position after completing each connection, as shown above. WARNING: DO NOT use / f\ slip-joint pliers to tighten the Lock-In nuts. Use the 50631 MANABLOC Wrench to tighten the compression connections. 4. After all connections are complete, recheck that all of the Lock-In inserts are visible between the lugs and are flush or protruding slightiy beyond the lugs. 5. /\s the distribution lines are connected to the MANABLOC, they should immediately be labeled on the cover plate as to which fixture that line supplies. Fixture labels are included with each MAN/\BLOC. Affix the appropriate label to the cover plate next to the port. 47 A. COMPRESSION /?\ CONNECTION CAUTION ' * ' This plumbing system relies upon the proper tightening of distribution line compression connections. Failure to properly complete ALL connections may result in system failure. Incomplete or improper connections can hold pressure during a system test but may fail at a later date, resulting in water damage. DO NOT OVERTIGHTEN compression fi'ttings. Overtightening of the Lock-In compression nuts may cause damage to the tubing, nut, valve or fitting body. DO NOT tighten Lock-In nuts beyond the recommendation of these instmctions (Step 3). 16.2.2 PEX Press Connections (1/2" ports) THE WATER SUPPLY TO THE MANABLOC AND THE PORT VALVES SHALL BE TURNED OFF BEFORE ATTEMPTING INSTALUTION OF PEX PRESS ADAPTERS. CAUTION t\ Use only sealing elements supplied with the adapters. 1. Ensure sealing element (A) is in place and the tool locator ring (B) is present in its factory installed position. o 2. Square off tubing to proper length and insert the fitting fully into the end of the tubing as shown. a -2 Viega IM-PF 0511 520709 3. Placing the PEX Press tool jaw over the attached press sleeve resting it against the tooi locator ring, check for full tubing insertion at the view holes then press the sleeve with an appropriately sized press jaw. DO NOT PRESS TWICE. 4. Remove tool locator ring (B) and slide swivel nut (C) over tubing as shown. B 5. Ensure sealing element (A) is in place and clean of any dirt or debris, wet sealing element with tap water. Insert the fitting into the desired port until the fitting flange sets flush with the end of the port. 6. Thread the swivel nut (C) onto the MANABLOC port. Hand tighten only. Open the port valve(s) before turning on the main water supply. 16.2.3 PEX Crimp Connection (1/2" ports) THE WATER SUPPLY TO THE MANABLOC AND THE PORT VALVES SHALL BE TURNED OFF BEFORE ATTEMPTING INSTALLATION OF PEX CRIMP ADAPTERS. CAUTION: Use only sealing elements supplied with the adapters. NOT FOR USE WITH FOSTAPEX 1. Slide the supplied swivel nut (D) and a crimp ring (C) 43600 for 3/8" tubing 43620 for 1/2" onto the tubing (threads of the nut toward the end of the tubing). A B CD Insert the barbed end of the fitting (B) fully into the end of the tubing as shown. Viega IM-PF 0511 520709 2. Ensure sealing element (A) is in place, then insert the fitting into the desired port until the fitting flange sets flush with the end of the port. 48 . Slide the crimp ring (C) within 1/8" to 1/4" from the end of tube. Crimp the ring with an appropriately sized full-circle crimp tool. 1/8" to 1/4" from the end of tube i See section 7 of this guide for crimping instmctions. DO NOT CRIMP TWICE. 4. Slide the swivel nut (D) over the crimped ring (C) and thread the nut onto the MANABLOC port. Hand tighten only! '—1 '—1 — D |r J r ^ 5. Each valve should be turned clockwise a quarter turn to the open position before tubing on the main water supply. viega 16.3 Connecting Distribution Lines to Fixtures There are a variety of male and female adapters, sweat adapters, tum out supports and stub out adapters to assist in terminating at the fixture. Refer to section 12.6 though 12.9 of this guide or the Viega product catalog. 16.4 Water Supply Connections The main water supply shall be turned off before making water supply connections. The MANABLOC water supply connection uses a special 1" swivel MANABLOC transition fitting that seals with a sealing element. MANABLOC Supply Adapter (PEX Press shown) This connection is used on the cold water supply and the hot water supply/return lines. This connection to the MANABLOC does not require any form of thread sealant and none shall be used. DO NOT USE ANY FORM OF THREAD SEALANT TO MAKE THIS CONNECTION. NOTE: Water Service connections to adapt to most types of plumbing supply materials are available. Consult the Viega Product Catalog for a complete listing of available connections. 1. Connect water service adapters to water supply piping before attaching the swivel fitting to the MANABLOC (instmctions included with adapters.) Excessive force from threaded fittings, or solvents from solvent welding (PVC or CPVC) will cause damage to the MANABLOC. Drill all holes in wood members for water supply/return tubing BEFORE mounting the MANABLOC. 2. When using male or female pipe thread transition fittings, to connect to supply tubing, use only Teflon® TAPE to seal pipe threads. DO NOT use pipe dopes, thread sealers. Teflon® pastes, etc. 3. If copper sweat fittings are used anywhere in the MANABLOC water supply line or water heater supply/return lines, these fittings must be soldered, cooled and flushed of any flux residue before these lines are connected to the MANABLOC. Soldering creates a tremendous amount of heat, which could melt the MANABLOC, and solder flux contains strong acids and may also contain petroleum products. These compounds can attack the plastic materials from which the MANABLOC is made and cause crazing, cracking and failure of the MANABLOC, resulting in leaks and water damage. 4. Ensure that the hot/cold supply lines are connected to the correct supply inlet/outlet on the MANABLOC. Red valves designate hot ports; blue valves designate cold ports. 5. Supply lines shall enter and/or exit the MANABLOC in a straight line. If bending of the supply lines is required, the tubing must be anchored to a framing member to isolate the bend stress from the MANABLOC or use a directional fitting. 6. After the supply tubing has been connected to the transition fitting, remove the plastic protective cap from the MANABLOC inlet/outlet part and thread the swivel nut onto the threaded male adapter hand tight only. DO NOT CROSS-THREAD. Viega Part No.50346 is available to connect 3/4" PEX, copper and CPVC lines to the MANABLOC. /V IMPORTANT WARNING: AV aux, PVC AND CPVC SaVENTS /I\ WIU. CRACK THE MANABLOC ^^H^ Instmctions fiKfudedwittt fitting. TO MANABLOC 50346 O COPPER CO PEX 0_J CPVC /V Swivel fittings must be /f\ ALIGNED CORRECTLY # • \ before being attached to the * * MANABLOC. The piping material must not be altowed to put stress on the MANABLOC, as leaking and damage may result HAND TIGHTEN ONLY HAND TIGHTEN ONLY DO NOT ELECTRICALLY f \ GROUND TO THIS •A SYSTEM. 49 Viega IM-PF 0511 520709 16.5 Filling and Testing the MANABLOC All PureFlow systems must be pressure tested in accordance with local code or the system working pressure after installation. Connections may be pressure tested immediately after completion. Refer to section 17.1: Pressure Testing PureFlow Systems for specific testing requirements. 16.6 Draining the MANABLOC System If the MANABLOC system has been filled with water and there exists the possibility that the ambient temperature will drop close to or below 32° F (0° C), then the MANABLOC unit MUST be drained to prevent irreparable damage. The process of draining involves loosening and removal of 1 or more supply line connections and 2 distribution lines from the MANABLOC. NOTE: Depending on the installation, some supply connections may be capped. If that is the case, remove the cap(s) as instructed below. 1. Turn off all water supply(s) feeding the MANABLOC. Open both sides of all fixtures served by the manifold and leave the fixtures open during draining. For each port of the MANABLOC where there is a distribution line connected, make sure the port valve is in the open position. 2. Loosen and remove the bottom supply connection(s) (or cap(s)) and the lowest pair of hot and cold distribution lines. 3. As the connections are removed, most of the water contained in the MANABLOC main bores and some of the water in the distribution lines should purge from the system. 4. Allow to drain until no water purges. 5. Reattach the supply line(s) or cap(s) and the distribution lines. Tighten the supply connections according to the instructions in section 16.4. When reconnecting the distribution lines, DO NOT overtighten the connections. These only need to be hand-tight! NOTE: The procedure described above will leave a small amount of water in the MANABLOC unit and, depending on the installation, may leave some or most of the water in the distribution lines. This remaining water should not cause damage to the manifold unit or to the PEX distribution lines in the event of a freeze. However, for complete assurance that freeze damage will not occur, perform the following additional steps. 16.7 To Completely Drain the System: 1. Loosen and remove all of the supply line connections (or caps) and all of the distribution lines from the MANABLOC. 2. Remove the 4 attachment screws and withdraw the MANABLOC unit from its mounting. Note: Grasp the unit firmly before removing the last attachment screw to prevent the unit from falling and being damaged. 3. Completely drain the MANABLOC unit by inverting the unit several times until there is no water coming from any of the supply connections or ports. 4. To purge the PEX distribution lines, first make sure that both sides of all of the fixtures are in the open position. Using low pressure air from a tank or compressor, force the water from the lines by connecting the air pressure source to each line one at a time and blow air through the lines until no water flows from the fixtures. 5. Reattach the MANABLOC and reconnect the supply and distribution line connections. NOTE: When reconnecting the distribution lines, DO NOT overtighten the connections. Compression connections should require only about 1/8 turn past hand tight when reinstalling connections that were previously tightened to the specificafions outiined in this installation guide. PEX Press and PEX Crimp connections only require to be hand tightened. Viega IM-PF 0511 520709 50 viega 17. PRESSURE TESTING PUREFLOW SYSTEMS 17.1 General Upon completion of the installation the system shall be filled and pressure tested. When hydrostatic testing, use only POTABLE water. NOTE: During the initial pressure test period, the system pressure indicated on the gauge may decrease due to the initial deformation of the pipe, followed by a slow expansion. The pressure drop is dependent on ambient temperature, system capacity and pressure but shall not be more than 8 psi in an hour. When pressure testing the MANABLOC, open all connected port valves before filling the system with water or air and pressurizing. If the MANABLOC is filled and pressurized before the port valves have been opened, read valve notice below. Testing PEX Systems (Branch and Main / MANABLOC) Test Method Min/Max Duration (Min) Max Pressure (psi) Min Pressure (psi) Allowable Variance (psi) Water 15 min/1 hr 100 40 N/A Air 15 min/1 hr 100 40 8* NOTICE - VALVE INFORMATION! Opening a port valve to an empty or unpressurized distribution line may cause valve damage. To prevent potential valve damage or failure, open the port valves before filling and pressurizing the lines. The force of water mshing to fill an empty line can cause the valve's seal to "clip off," resulting in incomplete sealing or complete valve failure. CARE must be exercised when opening a port valve to an empty or unpressurized line. The fixture to which the line is connected should be in the OFF position and the valve must be opened slowly until water starts to flow into the line. DO NOT CONTINUE to open the valve until the line is full and pressurized. Open the valve fully only after the line is up to system pressure. The fixture can then be opened to purge the line of air. Valve stems are replaceable. Order Stock Code 51602. * If the pressure in the system declines more than eight psi during the 15-minute to one-hour period, repressurize the system to the original test pressure and retest. If the system pressure declines more than 8 psi again during the test period, test the distribution line test caps or any other fittings in the system with the approved leak detect solution. NOTE: Some plumbing fixtures may not withstand test pressures greater than 80 psi. Consult fixture manufacturer's instructions for pressure limitations or plug all distribution lines at the fixture end. The system shall, at a minimum, withstand the test pressure, without leaking, for a period of 15 minutes. WATER TESTING SHALL BE AVOIDED DURING FREEZING CONDITIONS. UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL THE SYSTEM BE TESTED AT TEMPERATURES LOWER THAN 10T | THE WATER HEATER SHALL BE ISOU\TED AND NOT INCLUDED IN THE SYSTEM AIR TEST -12°C). WARNING! PRESSURES USED IN TESTING CAN BLOW UNMADE OR INCOMPLETE CONNECTIONS APART WITH TREMENDOUS FORCE! This force is many times greater when air is used as a test medium. To reduce the risk of personal injury, ensure that all connections are completed before testing. Use only the pressure and time required to determine that the system is leak free. 51 Viega IM-PF 0511 520709 17.2 Leak Detection Leak detection: Use only a mixture of Original Palmolive Green'^'^ dishwashing soap (#46100-46200) or Palmolive Ultra™ (#356140 or 46128) mixed with potable water at a ratio of 2 ounces of soap to one gallon of water (mix Ultra at a ratio of 1.5 ounces per gallon) NOTE: If such a solution is used, the antifreeze solution must be sufficiently concentrated to withstand the lowest temperature encountered while the testing fluid is in the system. Aintifreeze solutions should be purged and the system flushed with potable water prior to consumer use. NOTE: If the solution does not show a leak on any of the caps or fittings, isolate the MANABLOC by turning the valves to the "OFF" position, repressurize if needed, and apply the same solution to the MANABLOC manifold components. When testing a MANABLOC and no leaks are found on any of the caps or fittings, isolate the MANABLOC by turning the valves to the "OFF" position, repressurized if needed, and apply the same solution to the MANABLOC manifold components. Any connections found to be in question must be replaced or remade and the pressure test repeated. Viega IM-PF 0511 52 520709 viega 18. SYSTEM DISINFECTION 18.1 General Local codes may require system disinfection. When no other method is available, follow the time limitations and exposure levels show below. 1. Use a chlorine solution and one of the exposure durations listed below: Concentration Period Authority 200 PPM 3 hours IPC/UPC® 50 PPM 24 hours IPC/UPC® 2. Mix the disinfection solution thoroughly before adding it to the system. 3. The chlorine solution must reach all parts of the system. Open all fixtures (both sides) and flow water until a chlorine smell is present. As an altemative, chlorine test tablets can be used to detect chlorine at each fixture. 4. The chlorine source for the solution can be, but is not limited to, the following: Chlorine Source % Active Chlorine Form Amount Per 100 Gallon Water for a 200 PPM solution Laundry bleach 5.25 Liquid 3 pints (48 oz.) 5. After the solution has been in the system for the time required by the Authority Having Jurisdiction or the exposure durations listed in step 1 above, the system shall be flushed completely with potable water. 6. The system must be purged or drained of all water or protected from freezing. FAILURE TO FLUSH THE SYSTEM NOTICE! To prevent reduced service life of system components, disinfection solutions shall not be allowed to stand in the system longer than 24 hours. Thoroughly flush the system with potable water after disinfection. 53 Viega IM-PF 0511 520709 19. CODES, STANDARDS AND APPROVALS 19.1 Codes PureFlow is accepted by the following model codes for use in potable hot and cold water distribution systems. UPC - Unifomi Plumbing Code IPC - Intemational Plumbing Code IRC - Intemational Residential Code NSPC - National Standard Plumbing Code Most state written codes Check with your local Viega representative for code compliance in your area. 19.2 Standards ASTM - American Society for Testing and Materials ASTM F876/F2023: Standard Specification for Cross-linked Polyethylene (PEX) Tubing - This standard contains finite dimensional requirements for SDR9 PEX tubing in addition to burst, sustained pressure, chlorine resistance and other relevant performance tests at different water temperatures. ASTM F877: Standard Specification for Crosslinked Polyethylene (PEX) Plastic Hot- and Cold-Water Distribution Systems - This standard contains performance requirements for SDRS PEX tubing and fitting systems. The standcird contains finite dimensional requirements for tubing, in addition to burst, sustained pressure and other relevant perfomiance tests at different water temperatures. F1807 - This standard contains finite dimensional requirements for metallic insert fittings for SDR9 PEX tubing and other relevant performance tests at different water temperature. F2159 - This standard contains finite dimensional requirements for plastic insert fittings for SDR9 PEX tubing and other relevant perfomiance tests at different water temperatures. NSF Intemational ANSI/NSF 14: Plastics Piping System Components and Related Materials- This standard establishes minimum physical and perfomiance requirements for plastic piping components and related materials. These criteria were established for the protection of public health and the environment. ANSI/NSF 61: Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects - This standard establishes minimum health effects requirements for the chemical contaminants and impurities that are indirectly imparted to drinking water from products, components and materials used in drinking water systems. This standard does not establish performance or taste and odor requirements for drinking water system products components or materials. ISO - Intemational Standards Organization ISO 9001 - This standard is intended to establish, document and maintain a system for ensuring production output quality. ISO 9001 certification is a tangible expression of a firm's commitment to quality that is intemationally understood and accepted. All PureFlow PEX press fittings are manufactured in ISO 9001 certified facilities. Check with your kx^al Viega representative for further Infbrmation or copies of above mentioned listings and certifications. 19.3 Listings and Certifications PPI - Plastic Pipe Institute TR 4 Listed Materials Usting of Hydrostatic Design Bases (HDB) Strength Design Bases (SDB), Pressure Design Bases (PDB) and Minimum Required Strengtii (MRS) Ratings for Thennoplastic Piping Materials or Pipe. Pressure/Temperature Ratings: •160 psi at 73.4° F •100 psi at 180°F •80 psi at 200°F NSF Intemational NSF-pw certification mark - Product meets all applicable performance standards for pressure-rated potable water applications required in /\NSI/NSF Standard 14 and complies with ANSI/NSF Standard 61 for health effects. cNSF®us pw-G - product meets Zero Lead listing meeting California AB 1953 and Vermont Act 193. CSA - Product meets requirements of Canadian CSA B137.5 listing. NSF U.P. Code - Product meets requirements of the Unifomi Plumbing Code PEX 5006 - Tested and listed to tiie NSF- pw (CL5) chlorine resistance rating for an end use condition of 100% @ 140''F per ASTM F876, which is the highest chlorine resistance rating available through /\STM. When the product is marked with the PEX 5006 (CLS) designation it affimis the product is approved for use in continuous domestic hot water circulation systems with up to 140°F water temperatures. lAPMO R&T - Intemational Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials Research and Testing Certificate of Listing - Product meets the requirements of the Uniform Plumbing Code™. ICC - ES - Intemational Code Council - Evaluation Services ICC ES-PMQT" - Product complies with Intemational Plumbing Code. Viega IM-PF 0511 520709 54 > • PureFlow^ Warranty viega VIEGA LIMITED WARRANTY PUREFLOW® POTABLE WATER PLUMBING SYSTEMS Subject to the conditions and limitations in this Limited Warranty, VIEGA LLC (Viega) warrants to owners of real property in the United States that the components in its PureFlow Plumbing Systems (as described below) when properiy installed by licensed plumbers in potable water systems, under normal conditions of use, shall be free from failure caused by manufacturing defects for a period of ten (10) years from date of installation. This warranty also applies to those supplying products covered by this warranty and installed on the property. PureFlow Plumbing Systems and components covered by this ten-year warranty are: ViegaPEX™ and ViegaPEX™ ULTRA cross-linked polyethylene (PEX) tubing, FostaPEX®, MANABLOC®, Minibloc™ or manifolds sold by Viega and using approved connections sold by Viega installed together in manifold plumbing systems. ViegaPEX and ViegaPEX ULTRA cross-linked polyethylene (PEX) tubing or FostaPEX installed with PEX press fittings and PEX press sleeves sold by Viega. ViegaPEX and ViegaPEX ULTRA cross-linked polyethylene (PEX) tubing and crimp insert fittings installed with copper crimp rings and meeting the specifications of ASTM Fl 807 and certified/listed for conformance with ANSI/NSF Standards No. 14/61 and Viega PolyAlloy™ fittings. Power tools and jaws used with PEX Press fittings are warranted by the manufacturer and Viega extends no separate warranty on those tools or jaws. Viega wanants that PEX Press hand tools sold by Viega, under normal conditions of use, shall be free from failure caused by manufacturing defects for a period of two (2) years from date of sale. Viega wan-ants that PEX Crimp hand tools sold by Viega, under normal conditions of use, shall be free from failure caused by manufacturing defects for a period of twelve (12) months from date of sale. Viega warrants that properly installed stop valves, PEX lav and closet risers and riser accessories manufactured and/or sold by Viega shall be free from failure caused by manufacturing defects for a period of two (2) years from date of installation. Under this limited warranty, you only have a right to reimbursement if the failure or leak resulted from a manufacturing defect in the products covered by this warranty and the failure or leak occurred during the warranty period. You do not have a remedy or right of reimbursement under this warranty and the warranty does not apply if the failure or resulting damage is caused by (1) components in the plumbing system other than those manufactured or sold by Viega; (2) not designing, installing, inspecting or testing the system in accordance with Viega's installation instructions at the time of the installation, applicable code requirements and good plumbing practices; (3) improper handling and protection of the product prior to and during installation, inadequate freeze protection, exposure to water pressures or temperatures in excess of the limitations on the tubing or application of unauthorized solvents or chemicals; (4) acts of nature such as earthquakes, fire, fiood or lightening. In addition, the warranty does not apply if distribufion lines and their connections to the MANABLOC system are not ViegaPEX or FostaPEX tubing or connections sold by Viega. In the event of a leak or other failure in the system, it is the responsibility of the property owner to obtain and pay for repairs. Only if the warranty applies will Viega be responsible for reimbursement under this warranty. The part or parts which you claim failed should be kept and Viega contacted at the address below* or by telephoning 800-976-9819 within thirty (30) days after the leak or other failure and identifying yourself as having a wan-anty claim. You should be prepared to ship, at your expense, the product which you claim failed due to a manufacturing defect, document the date of installation, and the amount of any claimed bills for which you claim reimbursement. Within a reasonable time after receiving the product, Viega will investigate the reasons for the failure, which includes the right to inspect the product at Viega and reasonable access to the site of damage in order to determine whether the warranty applies. Viega will notify you in writing of the results of this review. In the event that Viega determines that the failure or leak and any resulting damages were the result of a manufacturing defect in the products and occurred during the time periods covered by this wan-anty, Viega will reimburse the property owner for reasonable repair or replacement charges to include drywall, flooring and painting costs as well as damages to personal property resulting from the failure or leak. VIEGA SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR CONSEQUENTIAL ECONOMIC LOSS DAMAGES UNDER ANY LEGAL THEORY AND WHETHER ASSERTED BY DIRECT ACTION, FOR CONTRIBUTION OR INDEMNITY OR OTHERWISE. THE ABOVE LIMITED WARRANTY IS IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. IF FOUND APPLICABLE, ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES ARE LIMITED TO THE DURATION OF THE TIME LIMITS SET OUT IN THIS WRITTEN WARRANTY. Other than this limited warranty, Viega does not authorize any person or firm to create for it any other obligation or liability in connection with its products. This written warranty applies for the full term of the applicable warranty regardless of any change of ownership in the property. Some states do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages or limitations on the duration of implied warranties in certain types of transactions, so the above exclusion or limitations may not apply to you. This limited warranty gives you specific legal rights and you also may have other rights which vary from state to state. This warranty shall be interpreted and applied under the law of the state in which the product is installed. * 301 N Main, 9th Floor, Wichita, KS 67202 55 Viega IM-PF 0511 520709 Professional products, service and training for professional contractors viega Rely on Viega for the most complete line of high-tech/ high-quality plumbing, heating and snow melting systems available today... plus the most comprehensive customer field support in the industry. Dedicated to education, Viega has been recognized by industry professionals as offering some of the most innovative, informative and interactive training courses. We have a comprehensive list of sessions in a variety of forms from half-day workshops to rigorous three-day programs. Call to receive our complete course catalog. Viega 301 N. Main, 9th Floor, Wichita, KS 67202 Phone: 1-800-976-9819 Fax: 1-800-976-9817 www.viega.com Viega IM-PF 0411 520709 ProPress® System Flameless copper joining technology. ProPress&" System Flameless copper fuel gas joining technology. PureFlow® Systems Flexible PEX tubing plumbing technology. ProRadlantr Systems Comfortable, efficient heating technology. S-no-lce® System Snow and ice melting technology. Geotechnical <> Geologic ° Coastal @ Environmental 5741 PalmerWay » Carlsbad, California 92010 » (760)438-3155 «> FAiX (760) 931-0915 • vmw.geosoilsinc.com DATE: TO: FROM: SUBJECT: References: MEMORANDUM November 26,2012 Excel Hotel Group, attn: Mr. Neil Patel Mr. Robert Crisman, CEG, Mr. Andrew T. Guatelli GE 2"" Geotechnical Review of/I 16, Palomar Oaks Business San Diego County, California W.O. 6286 (, Portion (Fairfield I 80-38, Carlsl 1. "Engineering System Solutions, 2012a, (Foundation plans for:) Fairfield Inn & Suites Carlsbad, Palomar Oaks Way, Carlsbad, Ca.". Job No. STR 11 2008, dated August 17,2012, revised November 20. 2012. by Engineering System Solutions. 2. "Geotechnical Review of Plans for a Proposed Hotel Site (Fairfield Inn), Lot 16, Palomar Oaks Business Park, Portion of Carlsbad Tract 80-38, Carlsbad, San Diego County, California," Dated November 5, 2012, by GeoSoils, Inc. 3. "Supplement to the Preliminary Geotechnical Investigation for a Proposed Hotel Site. Lot 16, Palomar Oaks Business Park, Portion of Carisbad Tract 80-38, Carlsbad, San Diego County. California, W.O. 6286-A1-SC, dated July 27, 2012, by GeoSoils, Inc. In accordance with your request, GSI has perfomned a review of the referenced plans (see Reference No. 1) that have been recently revised in response to our geotechnical review (see Reference No. 2). Based on our additional review, the revised structural plans appear to be In general accordance with the intent ofthe geotechnical reports (see Reference No. 2 and No. 3), with the following additional comments. • Comments presented in Reference No. 2 regarding structural calculations have been adequately addressed in electronic mails prepared by Engineering System Solutions, dated November 20"^ and 21 2012. • The scope of our review dated November 5,2012 inoiuded a review of the project grading pians. To date, a response from the civil consultant to that portion of the review has not been provided. Per Reference No. 3, an appropriate wait period (post grading) prior to construction and supplemented with a monitoring program could be incorporated into the civil grading documents. The conclusions and recommendations presented herein are professional opinions. These opinions have been derived in accordance with current standards of practice, and no warranty, either express or implied, is given. Standards of practice are subject to change with time. GSI assumes no responsibility or liability for work or testing performed by others, or their inaction; or work performed when GSI is not requested to be onsite, to evaluate if our recommendations have been properly implemented. The opportunity to be of service is greatly appreciated. If you have any questions concerning this report, or if we may be of further assistance, please do not hesitate to contact this office. Geotechnical • Geologic • Coastal • Environmental 5741 PalmerWay • Carlsbad, California92010 • (780)438-3155 • FAX (760) 931-0915 • www.geosoiisinc.com DATE: TO: FROM: SUBJECT: References: MEMORAND W.O. 621 November 27, 2012 Excel Hotel Group, attn: Mr. Neil P< Mr. Robert Crisman, CEG, Mr. Andrew T. Guatelli G 3"^ Geotechnical Review of Plans (Grading Plans Only) for a Proposei Site (Fairfield Inn), Lot 16, Palomar Oaks Business Park, Portion of Carisbad Tract 80-38, Carlsbad, San Diego County, California 1. "Coffey Engineering, inc., 2012, grading plans for Fairfield Inn, Palomar Oaks Way, Carlsbad, 20 scale, 6 Sheets, Project No. CUP11-06, DWG. 476-2A. revised/undated. 2. "2"'^ Geotechnical Review of Plans for a Proposed Hotel Site (Fairfield Inn), Lot 16, Palomar Oaks Business Park, Portion of Carlsbad Tract 80-38, Carlsbad, San Diego County, California," W.O. 6286-A@-SC, dated November 26, 2012, by GeoSoils, Inc. 3. "Geotechnical Review of Plans for a Proposed Hotel Site (Fairfield Inn), Lot 16, Palomar Oaks Business Park, Portion of Carlsbad Tract 80-38, Carlsbad. San Diego County, California," Dated November 5, 2012, by GeoSoils, Inc. 4. "Supplement to the Preliminary Geotechnical Investigation for a Proposed Hotel Site, Lot 16, Palomar Oaks Business Park, Portion of Carlsbad Tract 80-38, Carlsbad, San Diego County, California, W.O. 6286-A1-SC, dated July 27, 2012, by GeoSoils. Inc. in accordance with your request, GSI has performed a review of the referenced plans (see Reference No. 1) that have been recently revised in response to our geotechnical reviews (see Reference No. 2 and 3). Based on our additional review, the revised grading plans appear to be in general accordance with the intent ofthe geotechnical reports (see Reference No. 3 and No. 4). with the following additional comments. Subsequent to the excavation for the proposed Ttriton Underground Stormwater Storage Vault, the exposed subgrade shall be evaluated bythe geotechnical consultanL Based on the consultants findings, additional mtigation may include, but not necessarily be limited to compaction ofthe exposed subgrade to a minimum 95 percent relative compaction per ASTIVI D1557, or other methods. The conclusions and recommendations presented herein are professional opinions. These opinions have been derived in accordance with current standards of practice, and no warranty, either express or implied, is given. Standards of practice are subject to change with time. GSI assumes no responsibility or liability for work or testing performed by others, or their inaction; or work performed when GSI is not requested to be onsite, to evaluate if our recommendations have been properly implemented. The opportunity to be of sen/ice is greatly appreciated. If you have any questions concerning this report, or if we may be of further assistance, please do not hesitate to contact this office.